#489: Cara made $100,000 in commissions this year, her biggest bonus ever. What should she do with the money if she wants to retire early? An anonymous caller is upset that the 401k plan he sold his boss on is charging him an Assets Under Management (AUM) fee. Should he keep the 401k at all? Remy and her husband need to come up with $30,000 for IVF treatments. How do they build their family without breaking the family finances in the process? Another anonymous caller and his partner have lived in an RV for years. They’re ready to settle. Should they sell most of his investments to purchase raw land and build an off-grid home? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode489 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#488: Ever made a flippant, seemingly minor decision that radically changed the course of your life? Morgan Housel has experienced this. At age 17, he made a quick decision that ended up saving his life. Sadly, two of his friends were less fortunate. He shares that story in today's podcast episode, and sheds light on the lessons he's learned from it. Housel says that his lifesaving choice -- and many of our other important decisions -- are snap verdicts, ones that we don’t spend much time thinking about. If pivotal moments are decided in a flash, how do we navigate risk? How do we evaluate our options? Housel says this comes understanding concepts that remain constant, consistent, and universal. We need to accept that humans aren’t rational. We must appreciate the reasons why the best answer doesn’t always win. We ought to remember that we overlook many good things happening around us. These constants will most likely impact our futures. Housel was named by MarketWatch as one of the 50 most influential people in the market. He is the New York Times bestselling author of The Psychology of Money. His new book is titled Same As Ever. He joins us to discuss the ideas in his latest book. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode488 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#487: Luis’s wife is killing it at her side hustle. The unexpected income has led Luis to YouTube for hacks to capitalize on their surplus. Can a 529 plan double as long-term care savings? Elizabeth is frustrated with the housing market. She’s been saving for years but isn’t anywhere near her goal. Should she give up and spend it on a dream pottery course instead? Steve has a dilemma. He doesn’t borrow money on principle. And his wife doesn’t want to sell their current house until they’ve closed on the next one. How is he going to make this work? Greta wants to “reverse” rollover an IRA into a 401k to avoid the pro-rata rule. Is that a thing? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode487 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#486: By every definition of the word, we’re in a bull market. The S&P 500 hit record highs for five consecutive days last week, and remained strong throughout this week. The Dow is above 38,000 for the first time in history. Unemployment has stayed below 4 percent for 24 months, marking the strongest employment in half a century. And consumer sentiment, which reflects more pessimism than the data warrants, is showing signs of improvement. The Fed met this week and decided to hold rates steady, as expected, but there are hints that they’ll start dropping interest rates within a few months. Inflation isn’t yet down to the Fed’s target rate of two percent, but it’s getting closer — with one notable exception. Auto insurance has skyrocketed; across the nation, car insurance is 17 percent higher than last year. Meanwhile, a shake-up in the real estate industry is creating tumult for the National Association of Realtors, which is facing its first serious challenge in 100 years. The outcome could determine how steeply you’ll have to pay when you sell your home. Where do we go from here? What’s next for the economy? We tackle these questions in this First Friday podcast episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode486 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#485: If you’ve ever thought: "I’d love a business BUT …” I don’t have TIME I don’t have MONEY I don’t have IDEAS I have TOO MANY ideas and I don't know where to start I'm not technical I'm not creative or artistic I'm not good at sales You're not alone. Countless people don't start businesses or side hustles for these reasons. And they're losing thousands -- perhaps millions -- in opportunity cost. How much could you make if you started a side hustle that eventually scaled into a business? Possibly millions. Today's guest, Noah Kagan, is living proof. Noah was employee #30 at Facebook. His stock options, if fully vested, would be worth over $1 billion today. (If you want to do the math -- his stock options came to 0.1 percent of the company, which has a current market cap of $1 trillion.) But Noah was fired just a couple months before his stock options vested. So rather than getting a billion-dollar payout, he got nothing. He sank into a deep depression, eventually recovering with the help of a therapist who counseled him on how to reframe the experience. Then he rolled up his sleeves and got to work. He became a serial entrepreneur, building multiple businesses. His most successful venture now makes $80 million in gross revenue, and his personal take-home is $3.3 million per year (which comes from a $200,000 annual salary and $3.1 million profit distribution.) His net worth is $36 million. Not a billion, but still not too shabby. Noah recently wrote a book called "Million Dollar Weekend: The Surprisingly Simple Way to Launch a 7-Figure Business in 48 Hours." He sits down with us (in person!) to share: -- how to find business ideas -- how to overcome objections and rejections -- how to scale By the end of the episode, the common objections that you often hear -- like "I don't have time/money/ideas" -- will be quashed. Please enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode485 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#484: Kristen’s financial advisor charges a 1.3 percent fee on her investments. They also sold her term life, whole life, and long-term disability insurance. Do they have her best interests at heart? Casey has $290,000 in student loan debt. He committed 10 years to one employer for a chance at public service loan forgiveness. But five years in, Casey questions what he’s missing out on. Sara feels like it’s time to move to a more conservative asset allocation but she’s torn between buying bonds from Vanguard or Treasury Direct. What’s the difference anyway? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode484 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#483: Competitive. Results oriented. Driven to be the very best. These are a few ways to describe achievement culture. Achievement culture can also be described as stressful, high pressure and unhealthy. Yet, there is consistently the pressure – internally and externally – to make more money, be a better parent, spouse, friend, or employee. These burdens comes at a heavy cost to our well-being. Jennifer Breheny Wallace, author of the New York Times Best Seller “Never Enough: When Achievement Culture Becomes Toxic - and What We Can Do About It” shares with us how to manage our need for success AND how to avoid the toxic traps that can accompany obsession with success. She offers insights into the consequences of this culture on individuals' mental health, and overall well-being, while also discussing practical solutions to common challenges. If you've ever felt the burn of trying to do it all, or if you just want a smarter way to navigate success without losing your sanity, the insights shared in this interview will help you develop a more fulfilling and balanced life. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode483 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#482: A caller named “M” wonders if liquidating stocks for a larger down payment makes sense in a high-interest rate environment. An anonymous caller wants to take a pay cut to pursue his passions. But 75 percent of his net worth is in real estate. Is this too risky? Tiffanie hasn’t saved enough for early retirement, but she has a plan to use home equity to accelerate her goals. Is this going to work? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode482 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#481: Predicting the stock market is a terrible idea. But we can look at economic indicators and upcoming events to get a big-picture, 30,000-foot view of where our economy might be heading in 2024. In today’s episode, we explore what’s in store for 2024. We talk about the recent surge in Bitcoin prices, and the expected SEC approval of a Bitcoin ETF. We discuss when the Fed will lower interest rates, and the impact this might have on home buying. We talk about Robert Kiyosaki’s recent admission that he’s holding $1.2 billion in debt. And we take inventory of black swan events and election year abnormalities that might impact the flow of money. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode481 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#480: The death of a sibling. Being declared dead after a head-on collision with a drunk driver. Suffering financially during the Great Recession. CANCER. Today’s guest, Hal Elrod, has battled all of these tough challenges. His little sister passed away in his mother's arms. Years later, Hal was hit by a drunk driver, broke 11 bones, declared dead, and once revived, learned that he might have to spend the rest of his life in a wheelchair. (He eventually regained his ability to walk.) And after that, he was slammed hard in the wallet during the Great Recession. But he's a fighter. He needed to develop practices to build his resilience. So Hal created “The Miracle Morning,” a morning routine practice that gained massive popularity when he released it in 2012. The six-step Miracle Morning routine is coined S.A.V.E.R.S. -- silence, affirmations, visualization, exercise, reading, and scribing (writing). The routine became wildly popular, in part due to its flexibility; Hal explains that time-crunched people can start this as a six-minute routine; dedicating just ONE minute to each of these six steps. Over time, people can see the positive changes that this makes, and expand the time they allot for this. The routine is now the subject of a documentary, also called the Miracle Morning, available on Prime Video. Midway through filming, Hal was diagnosed with a rare form of leukemia and given a 30 percent chance of survival. He let the cameras roll as he coped with his diagnosis in real time. He joins us on this podcast to describe that experience, and to talk about the practices that he's used to stay productive in the face of grief, severe injury and cancer.  He talks to us about: the powerful Five-Minute Rule that helped him recover from a nearly fatal car crash the six most popular personal development practices of the successful specific tactics you can harness to create YOUR most successful life. As we move into the New Year, many of you are setting goals and resolutions. Hal describes specific, actionable tactics that you can use to build scaffolding and support around your new goals. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode480 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Nicole’s 78-year-old mom is paying huge fees for low returns. How can Nicole help her mom make better investments? Paul is a single dad, worried about paying his daughter’s college costs. He’s trying to figure out how to report lower income on the FAFSA, so that his daughter can get better financial aid. Nick is in his 40’s. His long-term care insurance rate is nearly doubling. Should he stop spending on this type of insurance? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode479 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#478: Ever skipped that extra drink, pricey cheese, or a night out for the sake of your wallet? If this feels familiar, then you’ll appreciate today’s episode with Jamila Souffrant. Jamila is a Certified Financial Education Instructor, podcast host, and author, guiding us on making savvy choices to save while still having fun. Jamila explores the power of understanding our ""why not,"" staying motivated on our financial paths, shaping a success-bound mindset, and posing THREE crucial self-assessment questions for goal alignment. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode478 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#477: Kayla is torn between paying off a loan early or catching up on missed retirement contributions. Josh wants to retire early and meets the threshold for zero capital gains taxes. Should he put all his retirement savings into a brokerage account? An anonymous caller wants to know how to merge financial lives with her husband from another country. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode477 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#476: Mike Massimino stared in disbelief at his TV. The date was July 16, 1969, and he marveled as Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin landed on the moon. At that moment, he knew he wanted to become an astronaut. He was six years old. But as Mike grew older, he developed more “realistic” dreams. After all, every kid wants to become an astronaut. The chances of making it are incredibly slim. He went to a local college, studied engineering, and took a job at IBM. But he couldn’t shake the tiny voice inside that said – “why not try?” So Mike upended his life. He enrolled in a Ph.D. program at MIT, and then proceeded to fail the qualification exam so badly that his professors gently suggested that perhaps a doctorate isn’t right for him. He battled to pass the exam on his second attempt, and went on to teach at Georgia Tech, from where he repeatedly submitted applications to NASA for their astronaut candidate program – which they called “as* can.” He was thrilled when he finally received his acceptance – until he learned that he needed 20/20 vision. At the time, NASA required astronauts to have naturally 20/20 eyesight, without surgery. So he sought out a doctor to help him re-train his eyesight. Then he learned that he’d need to pass a swim test. He was in his 30’s and had never swum. “Can’t I just take a math quiz?,” he joked. But he … didn’t let that sink him. (Pun intended). In today’s special episode, former NASA astronaut Mike Massimino explains how anyone – including you – can take your own moonshot. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode476 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#475: Born in 1924, Charlie Munger was raised during the Great Depression. At the time of his death on Tuesday, his net worth was estimated at $2.6 billion. But Munger’s greatest achievement wasn’t merely the scorecard of his net worth. His wit and wisdom, which Munger shared with the world through his book, Poor Charlie’s Almanack, which made him one of the most respected investors of the last century. Munger is the man who taught Warren Buffet how to invest. He’s lauded as the moral compass of Berkshire Hathaway, the company where he has served as vice chairman since 1984. He’s the man who famously said, "In the short run, the market is a voting machine. But in the long run, it is a weighing machine." Munger and Buffett met each other in Omaha, their shared hometown, at a lunch at the local Omaha Club, where they were introduced by mutual friends. They instantly connected. Buffett was an unknown at the time, but Munger saw his potential. Munger’s wife once asked him, “Why are you paying so much attention to [Buffett]?,” and Munger replied, “You don’t understand. That is no ordinary human being.” Their business partnership and friendship has lasted for more than 50 years, and Munger played a key role in many of Buffett’s investing decisions. He passed away on November 28, 2023, at age 99. In today’s First Friday bonus episode, we pay homage to the late investing legend Charlie Munger. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode475 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#474: When Tiffany Aliche was in her 20’s, she fell victim to a credit card scam. A crafty swindler convinced her to take out a cash advance against her credit card for $35,000. He said that he’d invest the money and produce Bernie Madoff-style returns. She was an inexperienced investor. She believed him. She never saw that money again. Aliche worked at a preschool. She didn’t make much money to begin with. But matters worsened when the school shut down, and she lost her job. She fell behind on mortgage payments and lost her condo. In order to recover from such huge setbacks, she had to grapple with an enormous sense of financial shame. Today, financial educator Tiffany Aliche, better known as The Budgetnista, shares how she overcame financial shame. She talks to us about the opposite of shame, which is a sense of financial wholeness. And she discusses practical tips for how to navigate the challenges of debt and scams. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode474 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#473: Sarah has cash to pay a $8,000 medical bill but she’s reluctant to drain her savings. Should she sign up for the hospital’s interest-free payment plan? Jennie is an independent consultant but gets paid as a W-2 employee. Without access to a SEP IRA or a 401k plan, is there another option to save for retirement? An anonymous caller is wondering how to run a cost-benefit analysis on pursuing a graduate degree. Brian is getting inundated with spam calls as a real estate investor. Is there a way to stop the madness? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episodes473 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#472: Imagine this: You’re a teenage musical prodigy, a world-class classical French horn player. You drop out of college at age 19 and spend your twenties touring the globe as a musician (including, once, tripping and falling off the stage at Carnegie Hall). At age 31, you retire from your musical career, get a Ph.D., and become a professor – first at Syracuse and then at Harvard, where you teach both at Harvard Business School and at the Harvard Kennedy School. You publish 13 books and write a column for The Atlantic, which gets noticed by Oprah Winfrey. Oprah then invites you to dinner, where she asks you to co-author a book together. This is the life of today's guest, Harvard Professor Arthur Brooks, whose collaboration with Oprah, a book called Build the Life You Want, focuses on the science and research behind happiness. Brooks teaches a class on leadership and happiness to second-year Harvard MBA candidates. In our conversation, we discuss a range of topics, including metacognition (thinking about how to think), the neurobiological basis of ruminating, and how to balance the concept of contentment with the innately human urge for ambition and progress. He also offers a formula for happiness: enjoyment + satisfaction + meaning and purpose. So – I hope you enjoy this episode; I hope you find it satisfying, and I hope it fills you with meaning and purpose! – Paula For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode472 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#471: Bob split a $350,000 windfall between savings and paying down his mortgage. But now he’s wondering if he made a good choice. Can Paula and Joe do the math to justify his gut-driven decisions? Julia wants to tap the equity from a second home to buy a third home in Texarkana, Texas. Is this a good plan? Joey Jr. wants to retire early, put two kids through college and buy a vacation home within the next five years. How can he afford to do it all? An anonymous caller wonders if $1 million is a good budget for a retirement pad. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode471 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#470: The economy is booming. GDP grew 4.9 percent last quarter, the fastest rate of growth since 2021. Consumer spending jumped 4 percent. Unemployment is holding steady at 3.8 percent, historically low. The U.S. added net new jobs for the 34th consecutive month. And yet – people are worried. Online discussion around layoffs at its highest point since July 2020. High-profile headlines about major staffing cuts – most recently from Schwab, which is dismissing 2,000 employees – fuel these fears.  Why is there such a disconnect between sentiment, which is pessimistic, and economic data, which is robust? We explore that qu estion in today’s episode. We also discuss the controversial Credit Card Competition Act, which if passed might eliminate credit card rewards like airline miles and cashback. We talk about Mint, the budgeting app with 3.6 million users, announcing that it’s shutting down. We also share details about the student loan repayment debacle. And we describe a landmark court ruling for $1.8 billion – yes, with a B – against the National Association of Realtors and several real estate brokerages, a verdict that may revolutionize the business model of how homes are bought and sold. Enjoy our First Friday of November 2023 episode! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Lindy feels like her $300,000 of accumulated equity could be put to better use. But she doesn’t want to buy more real estate right now. What’re her options? Katie wants to become a landlord in her home state but she’s concerned about the effects of redlining. Should she look into Section 8? Claudia lives in Germany and wants to buy an apartment in Manhattan. But she knows nothing about US real estate. Where does she start? I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode469 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Money management is all about setting priorities. Maybe you have the twin goals of sending your kids to college while also saving enough for retirement. And maybe you’re struggling to figure out how to balance the two. Today, Bryan Kuderna, a certified financial planner, shares a framework for helping us set priorities. We talk about the importance of economic literacy, in addition to financial literacy. We discuss how retirement has changed throughout history. And we apply those broader lessons to how you think about retirement. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode468 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#467: Should Knoxville use a higher-interest Home Equity Loan (HELOC) to pay off a lower-interest 401k loan? Joelle’s tenant is interested in a rent-to-own agreement. Is this a good idea from a landlord’s perspective? A recent wildfire shifted Sharon’s house into a flood zone. Should she sell before FEMA redraws the map and it becomes official? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode467 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#466: The Consumer Financial Protection Bureau reported in 2022 that medical debt is the most common reason to get a debt collector call. A Census Bureau study in 2021 found nearly 1 in 5 households (19%) couldn’t pay for medical care when it was needed. These statistics underscore the fact that the potential for unforeseen medical expenses to negatively impact our lives is ENORMOUS. Dr. Virgie Bright Ellington, a medical billing expert and author of “What Your Doctor Wants You to Know to Crush Medical Debt,” joins us for today’s episode to discuss the thorny topic of medical expenses. The episode begins by acknowledging the widespread and detrimental impact that medical bills can cause, especially in a healthcare system as intricate as the one in the United States. Dr. Ellington emphasizes the importance of proactively addressing medical bills to prevent them from becoming a source of financial stress. She then shares a detailed roadmap that will empower listeners to navigate the complex world of medical bills with confidence, ultimately achieving financial peace of mind in healthcare. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode466 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#465: The Fed is holding interest rates steady for now. The jobs report is better than expected. Stocks and bonds are both going down. What's going on right now in both the economy and in the markets and where should you put your money and your time and attention? That’s what we’re going to cover in this episode. Links mentioned: https://affordanything.com/inflation https://affordanything.com/365 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#464: More than ever, most people's lives are packed to the brim with activity. We are trying to fit in demanding jobs and families, commuting and a neverending list of chores. Social lives often suffer. It’s no wonder that in 2021, 12% of U.S. adults said they did not have any close friends, up from 3% in 1990. This has enormous consequences on our health, productivity, and our ability to grow our net worth, make money, and enjoy life. Dr. Mariso Franco, a renowned psychologist and best selling author, shares invaluable insights on the significance of fostering meaningful connections and discusses the detrimental impact of NOT having fulfilling connections in our lives. Today’s episode also delves into the importance of connection in the workplace. We chat about how cultivating genuine relationships with colleagues can boost productivity, enhance job satisfaction, and contribute to a positive work environment. Throughout the episode, Dr. Marisa Franco shares practical tips and actionable advice on how to nurture and sustain friendships in our fast-paced, digital age and improve our overall well- being. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode464 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Mary is struggling to compare two job offers: one from a large corporation and another from a tiny business. How should she decide? An anonymous caller wants to buy a different home, and convert his current home into a rental. How should he finance this move? Christina recently slayed her debt and put herself on track for financial success. But now she’s bored. How can auto-investing be more exciting? Speaking of debt, Christina shares a creative HACK to SAVE $60,000 in student loan interest payments.  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode463 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#462: Being rich, getting rich, what it means to be rich are all fascinating topics. We hear news stories, see social media posts, and read books about these topics. But what if what we are consuming is just misleading us? Seth Stephens- Davidowitz’s research has shown him that what we hear, read and consume about being rich is, in fact, misleading us. He is a New York Times bestselling author, a writer for the New York Times and a data scientist. He holds a PhD in economics from Harvard University. In today’s episode, we talk about how the stories around those who are rich - and how to get rich - are misleading. We talk about the truth behind those stories, the businesses that quietly make people millionaires, the kinds of people and the paths that they take to become rich, and share actionable takeaways that will help you do the same. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode462 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#461: A special LIVE recording in front of an audience at Podcast Movement, an industry conference in Denver. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle two questions in today’s episode. Our first question comes from a soon-to-be-single-mother on the precipice of divorce. How should she navigate this financially? Our second question comes from the spouse of a Purple Heart veteran of the war in Afghanistan. She and her husband would like to take a one-year sabbatical from work when they turn 40, which is in five years. They’d also like to pivot into lower-paying but more enjoyable careers. How should they map out their money for this transition? Joe and I dedicate this episode, recorded live on stage, to answering these two questions. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode461 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#460: Mental toughness is the bedrock of starting a business, growing a multimillion-dollar portfolio, investing in real estate, crushing your debt, retiring early. Today’s guest, Dr. Nate Zinsser, mentors elite athletes, soldiers and executives in confidence and mental toughness. He is the sports psychology mentor for two-time Superbowl MVP Eli Manning and the Director of the Performance Psychology Program at the U.S. Military Academy at West Point. He’s mentored the NHL’s Philadelphia Flyers and NCAA teams, and has been a consultant for the FBI Academy, U.S. Army Recruiting Command, and the NYC Fire Department. He holds a PhD in sports psychology from the University of Virginia. In today’s episode, we discuss how to develop the type of mental toughness and confidence that can help you grow your investments, start a business, take risks in your career, make offers on houses, and overall master your financial life. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode460 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#459: Andrey is a savvy 10-year-old wondering what’s the best way to save up for his first car. Ingrid wants to know if her parents’ preference for Retiring on Dividends is a better approach compared to the 4 Percent Rule. Erica’s part-time work schedule will place her in an unusually low tax bracket this year. Should she take this rare chance to execute a Roth conversion? Or is it better to prioritize debt payoff? Chloe is worried about the end of student loan forbearance. Should she pull back from making retirement contributions to focus on debt payoff? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#458: Today we chat with Scott Trench, the CEO and President of BiggerPockets, a real estate investing education company with more than 2 million members. He joins us to share cutting-edge insights on today’s real estate market. We discuss economic trends, demographic shifts, and talk about how interest rates impact home buyers. Whether you're a potential homebuyer, an investor, or simply curious about the housing market, this conversation will shield light on what’s REALLY happening in today’s confusing real estate market. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode458 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#457: Angie sold all the stocks in her retirement account last year. And now the market’s climbing. What should she do with her $500,000 cash position? Christina will be graduating with six figures of student debt. Should she refinance out of a federally protected loan to lower her interest rate? An anonymous caller wonders how Paula and Joe handled their primary residences when they moved out of state. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/podcast-questions For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode457 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#456: Stanford psychology professor Jamil Zaki shares his research and findings around the science of empathy – and how we can apply this to improving our relationships with colleagues, clients, customers, co-founders, and business and investing cohorts. Zaki is the director of the Stanford Social Neuroscience Lab, and the author of “The War For Kindness.” We'll break down the science. We talk about why empathy matters in business, investments, and in career growth, and we’ll discuss its digital age dynamics. How does AI impact the way in which we relate to others? If you want to learn the science of emotional intelligence, and how to apply this to your career and business interactions, you’ll learn a lot from today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode456 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#455: Yvette recently retired with the goal of reaching a $10,000 monthly income from her real estate investments. Should she put her money toward debt payoff or portfolio expansion? Carly wants to buy a second home and convert her current home to a rental. What are the pros and cons of tapping into existing equity versus saving cash for a down payment? An anonymous caller plans to move back to her touristy hometown in six to seven years. Is it smart to buy something now and take advantage of a thriving Airbnb market? I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode455 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#454: Amy says she hit “rock bottom” with her finances. She says she struggled to ask for help before her situation became an emergency. How can others ask for help sooner? Rebecca is a mother of four, which means she’s juggling four distinct college timelines and 529 plans. How does she make a withdrawal plan when there are so many unknowns?  Anne Marie switched jobs. What should she do with her old retirement accounts? And Dylan wonders if the IRS Rule of 55 applies to Roth 401k accounts. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode454 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Today I chat with Simone Stolzoff, a consultant for organizations ranging from Google to the Surgeon General’s Office, and the author of "The Good Enough Job." He’s a graduate of Stanford and U. Penn. Simone has spent a lot of time thinking about the role of work in our lives, and he's got some really interesting ideas about how we can see work as just one part of a happy and fulfilling life. We'll be talking about what happens when work becomes more than just a job, how to challenge the idea that work has to be our calling or our dream, and how to build a more well-rounded life. If you’ve ever “over-identified” with your job, then you’ll find today’s conversation thought-provoking. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode453 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#452: Peter Atwater, an economics professor at The College of William and Mary and author of “The Confidence Map,” joins us to discuss how confidence shapes our financial markets. He explains how The Hunger Games relates to the Lehman Brothers collapse. He describes why you should “Buy Adele and Sell Pharrell.” From the Panic of 1857 to the patterns behind modern media consumption, Peter talks us through the intricate web of behavioral oddities that extend beyond finance. He talks about the “K-shaped recovery” – how different segments of the population are experiencing different economic realities. He touches upon economic, political, and social trends, and the hidden dynamics that shape market behavior and reveal the profound impact of consumer confidence. Our conversation will leave you with a deeper understanding of how behavioral patterns shape the financial landscape – including your investments. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode452 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#451: Rachel’s car is nearing its end of life and she’s short on cash. Should she sell before she’s hit with a major repair? Cam wants to arbitrage a hefty low-interest loan with a three-year payback period. Is this the opportunity of a lifetime or a disaster waiting to happen? Kris has tried all the budgeting apps but they’re cumbersome and time-consuming. Is there a better way to track his monthly expenses? An anonymous caller feels stretched thin with a high mortgage on a single income. Should she sell off some stocks to lower her monthly payments? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode451 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#450: On the First Friday of each month, we roll out a bonus episode that’s totally different from what we usually produce. These bonus episodes are special, unique, and – we hope – round out a fuller, more multifaceted picture of what we think about. Today, I’m introducing you to a business and economics correspondent from Moscow who I’m honored to call a close friend. Her name is Andrea Palasciano. She’s covered business stories from Paris, Marseilles, Rome and Moscow. She’s fluent in Italian, German, Spanish, French, English and Russian. She’s covered stories ranging from diamond mining in Siberia to sleep deprivation. She’s close friends with Evan Gershkovich, the 31-year-old Wall Street Journal reporter who’s currently in a Russian prison. Today is his 100th day behind bars. Andrea and I were both Knight-Bagehot Fellows and bonded during our year of immersing ourselves into deeply understanding how to tell better stories about business and economics. She joins me in this special episode to talk about the stories she’s covered, the sabbatical experience, and why it’s critical to understand how a bond works (!!). Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode450 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#449: Jackie is a 42-year-old paralegal with two rental properties. She wants to buy three more. She asks for Paula’s thoughts about today’s economy. Should she buy under these economic conditions? Jen’s husband will retire with a pension that pays twice their living expenses. Does she still need her own retirement account? Rachael just bought a duplex, which she wants to househack. But she’s having second thoughts. Did she bite off more than she can chew? “Minouche” is a return caller with new information: she believes that borrowing from Dad is her only path to home ownership. Does this change Paula and Joe’s advice to her? (And is it even true?) And Molly, a concerned mom, shares some thoughts about this situation. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#448: An anonymous caller is dealing with guilt over spending a large cash gift. What’s the best use if she doesn’t have an obvious financial goal to throw at it? Eric reached financial independence a few years ago but he hesitates to quit his job. What the heck is a Roth conversion ladder and how can he overcome his psychological barriers? Another anonymous caller and his wife earn $300,000. He feels like they should be financially independent but they’re far from it. What’s going on? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode448 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#447: We talk to Stanford economist Nick Bloom about his groundbreaking research on working from home. Nick has been studying remote work for more than 20 years – since the 1990’s, when people were “telecommuting.” His research, in real-time, looked at how events such as 9/11 shaped attitudes about remote work. The pandemic created a surge of interest in his research. It brought many newcomers to the field. But Nick has the benefit of historical knowledge. He’s spent his career deep-diving into this topic. Nick sheds light on the advantages and challenges of remote work, drawing from extensive data and analysis. He shares surprising numbers and statistics. We discuss productivity, collaboration, employee well-being and organizational dynamics. We also discuss the impact of remote work on cities and housing. Enjoy! For more information, visit https://affordanything.com/episode447 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#446: Paul suffered a stroke at 48. He’s on disability and feeling lost. How does he figure out what’s next? Should Ashley’s aging parents spend a third of their retirement savings on a house? Margaret is wondering if she could use her 401k for a down payment and save on her taxes. An anonymous caller is concerned she won’t have enough access to cash if she retires at 50. Is an Indexed Universal Life policy the right solution? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode446 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#445: We sit down with Steve Chou, an accomplished entrepreneur who, alongside his wife, built two businesses that each bring in seven figures – and gives them the freedom to spend more time with their kids. We delve into the challenges he faced in the early stages of his business and how he overcame these obstacles. Additionally, Steve opens up about the personal and emotional aspects of running a business. He candidly discusses the fears, doubts, and sacrifices he and others have encountered during this transformational journey, emphasizing the importance of resilience and avoiding the comparison trap. Whether you're contemplating leaving your job to start your own venture or simply seeking inspiration from a seasoned entrepreneur, this episode with Steve Chou is a must-listen. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode445 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#444: The student loan pause is coming to an end. A moratorium on student loan repayments has been in place since the start of the pandemic, but starting Sept. 1st, millions of borrowers will be required to start making payments on their loans again. What does this mean for borrowers? In this episode, we'll discuss what borrowers can do to prepare, including an in-depth look at the variety of repayment plan options. We’ll also talk (in general terms) about how to handle ANY surprise new monthly bill – whether it’s a medical bill, a family member who needs ongoing financial help, or a student loan repayment that’s about to restart. For a list of Sources and Resources mentioned in the show, go to https://affordanything.com/episode444 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#443: As a former corporate powerhouse turned successful entrepreneur, Amy knows firsthand the challenges and triumphs of building a business from scratch. Amy is the host of the top-ranked podcast "Online Marketing Made Easy," and the owner of a multi-million dollar digital course business. She is also the author of “Two Week’s Notice,” a guide to quitting your job and building your own business. Get ready to be inspired as we uncover Amy's secrets to building a thriving business and learn how you can apply her proven techniques to achieve your own entrepreneurial dreams. Whether you're just starting out or looking to take your business to the next level, this episode is packed with actionable advice that you won't want to miss. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode443 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#442: An anonymous caller is struggling with a tempting offer from her family to buy her first house. Chris recently tripled his income. How should he manage this unexpected surplus? Tyson is wondering if it's a good time to convert his bonds into treasuries. “Jaula” wants to know if she should count her side hustle income as part of her retirement money. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#441: It’s GRADUATION WEEK! For those of you who’ve been following along this past year, you know that I’ve been completing the Knight - Bagehot Fellowship at Columbia University. This week, my family and I are celebrating the countless hours of studying, all-nighters and eye opening experiences, so here at Afford Anything, we’re airing an important episode from our archives. This episode addresses important questions we’ve been getting from the Afford Anything community, including: Where do I invest? How do I diversify outside of the stock market? How many individual stocks should I hold? I’m looking forward to returning to the amazing Afford Anything community full-time as of June 1st, and eagerly anticipating sharing everything I’ve learned with YOU!!!! The team has big plans for the next year, so enjoy this episode and stay tuned for future announcements. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#440: An anonymous caller wants to retire and travel in 20 to 30 years. How does she know if she’s saving enough? Trace plans to take a mini-retirement next year. Where should she keep her savings until then? Samantha and her partner have lived out of their truck for 20 years. They sorta-kinda feel ready to buy a house and settle down. But they’re hesitating. What if they hate it? “Barbara,” an anonymous caller from Episode 422, is struggling with a scarcity mindset. How does she stop worrying about the future and build the confidence to enjoy life now? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode440 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#439: There are massive rapid changes unfurling in the financial world. This week’s biggest news: First Republic Bank collapsed; JP Morgan Chase acquired it. (As it happens, I was one of 12 people who was lucky enough to have dinner with Chase CEO Jamie Dimon exactly one week ago – just days before the acquisition. I tell that story around the 8-minute mark of today’s episode.) The Fed issued a 10th consecutive rate hike, raising interest rates another quarter of a percentage point. Inflation is still double the target rate. And public confidence in bedrock financial institutions, as measured by a regional banking index fund, is in the toilet. I talk about these issues for the first 18-ish minutes of the podcast, and then we switch to a replay of an interview that we held with acclaimed financial advisor Michael Kitces, which originally aired as Episode 64. Enjoy! The interview with Michael Kitces originally aired on February 13, 2017 https://affordanything.com/64-michael-kitces-mind-powerful-money/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#438: “Do you want to save money? Or do you want to enjoy your life?” That’s a common question, but it’s strange. It assumes these ideas are opposites: frugality is synonymous with deprivation; spending is a proxy for enjoyment.  That premise is wrong.  Let’s stop conflating spending with happiness. Let’s stop using “savings” or “free” as a euphemism for second-tier or sucky. Most online articles that discuss free or frugal enjoyment are poorly-thought-through listicles that offer half-baked ideas, like “go to the park” or “host a potluck.” Not only are these insufferable, they also miss the point. Behavioral change doesn’t come from a laundry list. It comes from cognitive reframing. To facilitate this reframe, we’ve invited Yale-educated former attorney and world-renowned happiness expert Gretchen Rubin to return to our show.  Gretchen was a guest on Episode 40, when she cited research about effective habit formation. She returns with a methodical, structured look at how to derive more joy from daily experiences through heightened sensory awareness. She draws from science, philosophy, medicine, literature and psychology to tell a layered story about how to find simple pleasures in everyday things. Her latest book, Life in Five Senses, came out on April 18 and immediately hit the New York Times bestseller list. Enjoy! Timestamps as of April 2023: 10:44: Why you should visit the same place everyday 11:55: How going to the same place can change over time 16:40: Advantages of being in tune with our senses 24:07: How to deepen your sense of smell 31:00: How culture impacts senses 37:19: How does your age impact your sensory experience? For show notes, go to https://affordanything.com/episode438 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#437: Do you have a project you want to start … but you’re stuck in analysis paralysis? Do you feel like if you want to do something right, you have to do it yourself? Do you try to wind down after the end of a long day, but your energy levels are just not quite restored? If you answered “Yes!” to any of these questions, then this episode is for you. Psychotherapist Katherine Morgan Schafler, a former on-site therapist at Google, and author of “The Perfectionist’s Guide to Losing Control,” joins us to chat about her research on perfectionism. She shares a framework on five types of perfectionism. She describes the pros and cons of each type, and how to work through some of the negative tendencies to build a more emotionally healthy life. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode437 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#436: Jeremy wants to attend graduate school. Should he take student loans or cash out his investment portfolio? Andy is wondering if the 4 percent rule stands up to high inflation. (There’s a shockingly simple answer!) Did Rudolfo discover a hack to supercharge his 401k investing? Nandini is overwhelmed by her investing choices. What accounts should she use? What funds should she pick? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#435: Lee is 30 and facing a tech layoff. She can live for a year on her savings. She’s thinking about taking the rest of the year off. How should she prepare her investments? Stacy wants to buy an Airbnb but she’s scared she’ll regret selling her company stock to do it. An anonymous caller is tired of living paycheck-to-paycheck as a freelance artist. How can she stabilize an inconsistent income? Danelle is a DIY investor. She can’t find a financial advisor who gives advice without insisting on managing her investments. Is she looking in the wrong places? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode435 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#434: The majority of financial advice is geared to people with 9-5 jobs: “Negotiate for a raise.” “Max out your 401k match.” “Budget based on your income.” Where’s the financial advice for people who earn money in tips: restaurant servers, bartenders, hairstylists, concierge, valets, ushers, nail salon workers, strippers, or other service industry professionals? What about gig economy workers, freelancers and entrepreneurs? People who don’t earn a regular paycheck? Not only do these workers earn a volatile and unpredictable income, they also often don’t have job-provided health insurance, retirement plans, and paid time off. They need to provide themselves with these benefits. What should they do? That’s where Barbara Sloan comes in. She’s a financial coach and author of “Tipped: the life changing guide to financial freedom for waitresses, bartenders, strippers, and all other service industry professionals.” Her book and advice applies to anyone who works outside of the traditional confines and systems. If you (or someone you know) works for tips, you’ll love Barbara. And if you’re curious about exploring work outside of the normal 9-to-5, and wonder how to set yourself up for financial success when your income is hit-or-miss, this episode is for you. Enjoy! Estimated Timing of Discussion Points as of March 2023: 01:59: The tipped workers we may forget 03:54: Financial challenges for tipped workers 05:57: The importance of thinking like an entrepreneur 23:02: Tips for the self employed 25:19: Budgeting with volatile income 27:13: Tracking income vs. tracking expenses 32:15: The distinction of budgeting based on income vs expenses 36:13: Budgeting as a trigger for disordered behavior For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode434 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#433: Should “Walker,” an anonymous caller, give up a cushy job to take a year-long sabbatical in Europe? Blue wants to rent out his East Coast home, take a sabbatical from work, travel to the West Coast with his family, and start a YouTube channel and other entrepreneurial projects. How should he manage his money to make this happen? Melissa regrets buying a house two years ago in Ft. Lauderdale. She’s poured $30,000 into repairs, all of which she borrowed. Her home-related debts have mounted. She’s over-extended. Should she cut her losses? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode433 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#432: Have you ever worried about running out of money after you retire? Do you keep checking your net worth to make sure you have enough? Does this always feel a little … unsatisfying? This episode discusses why. Today's guest, Michael Lynch, is a certified financial planner and author. His most recent book, “It’s All About The Income,” says that we’re obsessed with the wrong thing. Retirement planning is focused on growing assets. But your assets aren’t going to keep the lights on. Your INCOME, not your assets, is the centerpiece of your retirement. He shares real-life examples of the biggest risks to your income — the risks that might halt you from enjoying your retirement years. He shares tips on how to make sure your income is smooth and secure, even when you’re not punching the clock anymore. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode432 Estimated timing of discussion points as of March 2023: 01:36: The disconnect between living on income vs. assets in retirement 02:15: “There’s no such thing as safe” 04:41: The three-bucket approach to retirement 08:17: Sources to learn the history of the stock market 10:33: This historical best hedge against a declining stock market 16:25: The ideal asset mix for short-, medium- and long-term investments 17:01: The need to distinguish between money you’ll need vs money you’ll need to generate income 20:16: When to be a saver vs. an investor 23:49: How to approach the medium-term bucket 36:03: Lowering sequence of returns risk with the three-bucket method 37:02: Inflation risk and the impact on retirement Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#431: The title says it all. Paula Pant interviews Mr. Money Mustache about his dating life. We chat about why he wants to date inside the FIRE community (financial independence, retire early) – and whether he’s had any luck. We discuss the perils of navigating into the dating world after a divorce, which he did at age 43. And – AHEM – HE’S ON THE APPS. Well, specifically, he’s on one app. And it’s technically not an app, it’s a website. Whatever. HE’S ONLINE DATING, FOLKS. We talk about the difference between flirting in real life vs. online, and he talks about what he looks for in a dating profile. Our conversation also covers: What’s the point of dating someone inside the FIRE community, anyway? Do you really want to talk about money all day? (Hint: nope) Is he a serial monogamist? What should you do if one person is more interested in frugality, while the other is into investing? Personality, values, communication, chemistry … how can you find that ideal fit? How long does it take to figure out if you’re compatible? How quickly has he introduced his teenage son to his former (then-current) girlfriends? What advice does he share with his son about dating? Mr. Money Mustache is the pseudonym of Pete Adeney, one of the most prominent figures in the FIRE movement. He co-stars with Paula, Tiffany Aliche and Ross Mac in the 2022 Netflix documentary Get Smart with Money. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode431 The Fire Dating app can be found at https://firedating.me Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#430: D is worried that she’s going to suffer from her parents’ poor financial choices. Is it time to confront them about it? An anonymous caller and her fiance both own a house. Which one do they move into after the wedding? In a world of rising inflation, Nick wants to know if it’s time to change the way he saves for his future. Another anonymous caller wants to buy a second home within a decade. How does she start planning now? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode430 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#429: Have you ever thought about remodeling a kitchen? Retrofitting a camper van for #vanlife? Converting your basement into an Airbnb? Building a custom website? Recording an album? Did you worry that this project will cost more and take longer than you expected?  This episode is all about how to complete projects on-time and under budget.  Today's guest, Dr. Bent Flyvberg, is an Oxford University professor with a Ph.D. in urban geography. He’s published more than 200 scholarly articles on megaproject planning and management, decision-making, and social science methodology. He’s written or edited 10 books, including recently co-authoring “How Big Things Get Done.” He shares examples ranging from the Sydney Opera House to Pixar movies to the California High Speed Rail, illustrating why some projects flourished while others flopped. He joins us on today’s episode and talks to us about why some projects succeed while others turn into colossal disasters. He offers tips for how we can apply lessons from megaprojects to our own lives. Enjoy! Timing of discussion points as of February 2023: 02:19: Why are some projects on time and under budget and others aren’t? 03:24: The difference between successful and unsuccessful projects 07:38: Which questions do you ask when you’re choosing someone to work with on the project? 11:44: How cognitive biases and power dynamics and influence project outcomes 24:22: Why people forsake common sense when it comes to big projects 29:34: How to plan and iterate, knowing that things will change 39:26: The biggest risk to projects For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode429 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#428: Jamie currently lives at home and dreams of reaching financial freedom by her early 30s. How can she take advantage of her low expenses to accelerate her wealth building? An anonymous caller has enough to retire in 5 years. Does she still need her financial advisor or is it time to do it on her own? Meghan is a personal finance enthusiast who wants to start a coaching side hustle. What’s the best way to get started?  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these five questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode428 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#427: Okay, maybe the phrase “side hustle” is overused. But it’s also misunderstood. “Side hustle” is a catch-all term that people use to describe everything from low-paid gig economy labor – Doordash, Uber Eats, Rover – to six-figure consulting for Fortune 500 companies.  On the remote-work side, it includes everything from freelance graphic design (services) to selling bundles of presentation deck templates (digital products).  On the physical goods side, it includes everything from wholesaling (real estate) to flipping antique grandfather clocks (personal goods).  On the e-commerce side, your side hustle might mean starting your own manufacturing, white-labeling and shipping services, in which you distribute toothpaste or trash can lids or desiccant packs. How do we make sense of such an umbrella concept? In this interview with Nick Loper, we learn how to wrap our minds around the huge world of hustles. We talk about how to understand the options available, choose a path, and start with minimal capital. This interview originally aired as Episode 85. Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#426: Behavioral researcher, Vanessa Van Edwards, talks to us about the critical importance of charisma - and how to use the perfect blend of warmth and competence to be charismatic. Dr. Michael Slepian walks us through what secrets mean, what they cost, and how we think about them. We dive into the world of long distance real estate investing, and talk about two of the major components of investing - Cash and mindsets - to help you determine if long distance real estate investing is right for you. International best selling author, Julie Winkle Giulioni, reviews eight dimensions of career development and how to navigate them. Chris Hutchins, entrepreneur and life hacker extraordinaire, spills his best secrets on optimizing spend to travel more cheaply. Kiersten and Julien Sanders join us to discuss money topics for couples, and their framework for being financially independent in 15 years. Stanford professor Jeremy Utley breaks down the art of creativity and producing new ideas - and shares actionable tips on how we can be more creative and have better ideas. Dr. Daniel Crosby discusses how we are not wired to be good investors, and how to overcome our evolutionary wiring. Enjoy this compilation of our favorite episodes to air in the second half of 2022. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode426 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#425: Ellen’s dad died unexpectedly. Her mom is clueless about finances. How does she help a 70-year-old unravel financial complexities? Mike has an opportunity to buy into his friend’s growing business. What should be his legal, financial, and relationship considerations? Pepp wants to know what’ll happen to her Restricted Stock Units when her company goes private. An anonymous caller needs to build her nest egg. She’ll be a full-time student with no income. She has 20 years until retirement. Should she execute a Roth conversion? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode425 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#424: We’re taught to stay in the game. Persist. Be gritty. Try, try again. But sometimes, the best decision is to walk away. Move on. How do you know when that’s right? When should you double-down … and when should you fold? Today’s guest, Annie Duke, won more than $4 million as a professional poker champion. She wrote the bestselling book Thinking in Bets and co-founded a nonprofit that teaches kids decision-making skills. Her most recent book, “Quit: The Power of Knowing When To Walk Away,” teaches the behavioral science, mental models and recognition of cognitive biases needed to successfully quit. It highlights real-world examples of startup founders, athletes, mountaineers, and entertainers who either quit – or didn’t – and explains how to make a wise, grounded choice. She joins us on today’s episode to describe the forces that hold us back from quitting – and how to recognize when quitting could lead to a better life. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode424 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#423: We’ve heard the warnings about following your passion.  People ask if you can *actually* make money doing what you love. They frame the question “passion or profit?” as though these are in opposition.   The majority – who have never tried – decry, “what if you fail?” Nobody asks the more important question: what if you succeed? Are you still going to love your passion when you rely on it to pay the bills? We grapple with that question in today’s episode, which is devoted to side hustles and starting a business. We use questions from two of our listeners as a jumping-off point to discuss the realities of going into business for yourself, doing what you love.  We share examples from our own lives as professional podcasters, as well as from the lives of friends who are full-time photographers, musicians, writers and other creative entrepreneurs. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode423 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#422: Emily is saving aggressively for financial independence, but it’s hard to enjoy the present. Is it time to increase spending? Monroe wants to stop working. Forever. Which is more important: debt payoff or investing? Another anonymous caller and his spouse dream of building a homestead on an expensive piece of land. How much is too much to spend on housing? Given the high costs of moving, Sarah wonders if buying a starter home is the best decision. Should she and her fiance jump straight to buying their forever home? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode422 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#421: Life is busy. We spend too much time on chores, errands, commuting, emails and other draining tasks. We lack time for joy and hobbies. Or do we?  Today’s guest, Laura Vanderkam, talks to us about how to make the most of our time and carve out more space for gratifying experiences. Laura Vanderkam is a time management and productivity expert. Her latest work, “Tranquility By Tuesday: 9 Ways to Calm the Chaos and Make Time for What Matters” shares actionable steps to help you fill your schedule with more of what you love. Enjoy! Timing of discussion points as of January 2023: 06:06: Where the time management focus should land 13:44: What is tranquility? 15:22: How to structure your hours 16:33: Set your bedtime: the foundational rule for time management 24:18: The power of planning on Fridays 29:05: Move your body by 3 pm 35:02: Create “backup slots” 37:10: The impact of various time management guidelines 38:43: The Big Adventures Rule 44:06: Taking a night for yourself 47:51: Batch the little things 50:16: The effortful before the effortless For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode421 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#420: Harvard professor Arthur Brooks described two types of intelligence – and explained, in scientific terms, the wisdom that comes with age. Dr. Ellen Vora, M.D., shared insight into the roots of procrastination, offering evidence-based tips for how to overcome our own inner demons of anxiety, fear and laziness. Psychology professor Bill von Hippel described why too much happiness is just as detrimental to our long-term health and wellbeing as too little happiness. Wall St. Journal columnist Spencer Jakab observed the perfect storm of conditions that gave rise to meme stonks and other oddities of our era. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy argued for “strategic under-diversification” and explained the Sharpe Ratio. Data scientist Nick Maggiulli explains the save-invest continuum. And financial planner Bill Bengen, the creator of the 4 percent retirement withdrawal rule, talks about what most people misunderstand about the safe withdrawal rate. These are just some of the highlights from the Afford Anything podcast in this 2022 year-in-review episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode420 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#419: Casey isn’t happy at her job. If she leaves before her one-year mark, she’ll lose her 401k contributions. Should she stay or find a new job? Daan resides in a high-cost-of-living area where real estate appreciates rapidly. But there’s no cash flow. How should he evaluate real estate as an investment? Emily already maximizes her 401k contributions. Should she contribute to an after-tax 401k next? Ryan’s investing for his son. If the yield is the same between two mutual funds, can he leave his son with more money if one mutual fund pays dividends more frequently? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode419 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#418: When Jordan Grumet was a child, his dad died unexpectedly. That was decades ago. Jordan is a father today, but he thinks often about the possibility of dying young. And he wonders how to balance enjoying today vs. saving for tomorrow, given that none of us know how long we’ll be on this earth. How do we think about our lives when the clock starts to run out?  Beyond money, what other tools can we use to live a fulfilling life? Jordan Grumet, a hospice doctor and host of the Earn and Invest podcast, discusses this in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode418 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#417: Our first anonymous caller is getting married. What are the financial considerations the couple should be thinking through since there is a large income gap between them? Our second anonymous caller is concerned about her ability to continue working due to major depression. Should she consider disability insurance? Carly is an accidental landlord and would love to keep her rental property. The problem? It’s losing money right now and she’d probably take a loss if she sold it. What should she do? Shelby has an amazing opportunity to relocate to Tokyo for work, but she’ll have to take a pay cut. How should she think about her investment options? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode417 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#416: Crypto is tanking. Household debt is climbing. Student loans are tangled up in the court system. And the house market…did what?! Today’s bonus First Friday episode takes a look at the latest economic headlines, with analysis, commentary and hot takes. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode416 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#415: The average American donates 2.1 percent of their income to charity, according to data from the Giving Institute. But an ordinary couple living in Nashville, Bob and Linda Lotich, refuse to be average. When they were both 31, they decided to “give their age” – they pledged to donate 31 percent of their income to worthwhile causes. They’ve increased their charitable giving every year since, to match their age. The couple is now 41 years old, and they give away 41 percent of their income. When they began this project, the Lotich’s were earning a combined household income in the high five-figures. They were making just under $100,000 combined, living in St. Louis. They carried a mortgage on their home. They worried that their commitment to giving might impact their ability to pay the bills. Over the last decade, their income has fluctuated – up some years, down in others. They moved to Nashville and had three children. These higher living costs have drastically impacted the family budget. But their commitment to giving persists. In today’s episode, Bob Lotich joins us to talk about why and how he committed to the “give your age” philosophy – and shares his advice for anyone who wants practical tips for increasing their capacity to donate to meaningful causes. Enjoy! Timing of discussion points as of November 2022: 04:46: Adjusting mental and budget space to allow for more charitable donations 13:12: The decision give to individuals vs. charitable organizations 14:57: Does giving to an individual impact the relationship? 16:56: Recommendations for platforms with giving opportunities 25:01: Managing the giving budget after starting a family 25:56: Guilt and shame around generosity 27:41: Giving from a place of gratitude and a place of pain 28:47: The concept of giving dreams 30:19: Building for a continuous impact vs. a large impact 31:48: Getting the children involved 37:48: How to increase your charitable giving For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode415 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#414: Amanda is worried that her recently diagnosed health condition might force her to stop working. How should she financially prepare her family? Anonymous is a savvy DIY investor who wants to retire early and is wondering if she should hire a financial advisor. Should Krista tap into the equity from one of her rentals to rebalance a portfolio that is weighted heavily in real estate? Natasha thinks she and her husband have saved enough to retire early but it feels scary. Is she truly ready or is she nuts?  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode414 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#413: If an idea dominates the headlines, we notice it. But maybe we shouldn’t. Today’s guest, psychologist and behavioral finance expert Dr. Daniel Crosby, says there’s a difference between a prediction that gets repeated, and one that’s likely to unfold.  What’s salient isn’t accurate, he says. And vice versa.  He also talks about how money problems have morphed over time. He chats about how our evolutionary wiring is at odds with our goals. And he even discusses how we’re wired to be ‘lazy’ – and how to work with that tendency instead of fighting an uphill battle against it. Dr. Crosby researches the intersection of mind and markets. His latest work, The Behavioral Investor, is an in-depth look at how sociology, psychology and neurology impact our investment choices.  Timing of discussion points as of December 2022: 03:10: The overlap between psychology and investing + new ideas 04:41: Counterintuitive behavioral finance discoveries  07:27: Money as a “hygiene factor” 08:39: The “new class” of money problems for the more affluent 13:44: Factors that impact our financial decisions 15:22: The influence of evolutionary wiring  17:02: Cognitive and physical wiring leading to laziness and group think 27:45: The benefit of community for investors 28:52: The four types of behavioral risk: ego, conservatism, attention, and emotion 36:21: The three E’s of behavior change: education, environment, encouragement 42:30:  Confusing things that are loud with things that are likely 45:21: The risk of managing emotion For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode413 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#412: Taylor recently graduated. She wants to reach financial independence as soon as possible. What should she do first: invest or repay low-interest debt? Carter doesn’t want to pay too much for his investments. He’s worried about the tax drag. He wants to know how to improve cost efficiency in his portfolio. How should he manage decisions about basis points, dividends and capital gains? Our first anonymous caller has been working and investing for a decade. Today her portfolio is large enough that she and her husband can finally take a mini-retirement. They’d like to rebalance their portfolio. They want it to reflect the fact that they won’t be working for a while. They’d also like to calculate how much money they need to travel with their children. How should they handle this? Our second anonymous caller is worried that their portfolio is out-of-whack. Their money is in a target date retirement fund. They’d like to move some of it to a three-fund portfolio. But this is a scary time to sell. Stocks are low. What should they do? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#411: In the final installment of this two-part mini-series, we walk you through becoming a subject matter expert in your investment city of choice. We discuss who you should talk to, where you can find them and what you should talk to them about. Timing of discussion points as of November 2022: 06:11: Who you should talk to  10:09: Why conversations with non- real estate professionals are important 11:49: Where to meet other real estate investors 13:19: Expanding your network, character due diligence and making friends 13:59: Thinking through others cognitive biases 15:56: Potential implications of neighborhoods with “good cash flow” 20:57: An example of objective feedback 29:40: Dumpsters, sewers, permits and problems: Other specifics to discuss For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode411 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#410: You face plenty of problems. But you have a scarcity of good solutions. Stanford Professor Jeremy Utley can help. He says that solving complex problems requires creativity. And creativity comes from deliberate practice. It’s not an innate talent. It’s a skill. And it’s useful in any occupation, from accounting to zookeeping. Jeremy speaks and writes on the history of invention, discovery, creativity, and innovation. He also leads Stanford d.school's work with professionals. Today he talks to us about how some of the greatest innovators produce new ideas. He tells us about their creative process. He describes how researchers and authors improve their skills. And he shares pointers to help you understand how to do the same. Timing of discussion points as per November 2022: 3:00: How to focus while staying open to creativity 6:23: Definition of creativity 14:02: Different cognitive biases faced 17:35: The idea quota 19:28: Where ideas come from: the Lego analogy  21:32: How Ben Franklin honed his creativity 28:36: Capturing inspiration 46:04: The importance of reviewing the problems in your life 50:24: The roles of creative collaboration and distributed reasoning 54:49: The argument for quantity over quality  56:07: The value of bad ideas For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode410 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#409: Liz and her husband are planning to retire in 5 to 10 years. They have rental income properties, but Liz is bored of managing these, and she’s intrigued by the idea of buying stocks at a discount when the market is low. Should she sell her rental properties and use the money to buy stocks instead? Rebecca is a high income earner and thinking about investing in a Roth 401k … but she’s scared of how much she’ll have to pay in taxes. Should she do it anyway? Anonymous made big changes last year: she got a new career AND sold a house! Now she needs help figuring out capital gains and lowering how much she’ll have to pay in taxes … and she won’t have access to her company’s 401K for most of the year. Kyle and his wife are moving into their dream home! What should they do with their current place? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#408: When Kiersten and Julian Saunders began dating in 2012, they fell in love quickly, and their relationship felt strong – until they started talking about money. They broke up as a result of their first money conversation. Luckily, they got back together, figured out how to have tough conversations, and paid off $200,000 in debt over the next five years. Then they started thinking about how to hack their careers. They came up with a plan for a 15-year career. Today, they join us on the podcast to talk about the 15-year career framework and how to approach your career - and your finances - in 5 year stints. Timing of discussion points as per October 2022: 00:25: Introduction to Kiersten and Julien Saunders 02:05: The money conversation that changed everything 11:25: Examples of interaction patterns around money discussions 12:08: Tactics to continue difficult money conversations 16:18: Starting a 15-year career 17:48: The focus of the first five years: your financial foundation 18:17: Transitioning to the second five years and defining your super power at work 18:50: Building your exit plan in the last five years 22:57: Thinking about side hustles and the factors of urgency and upside 24:29: How does a person know how to make money 29:28: Maintaining momentum towards your goals over the 15 year time span 31:37: Is it possible to accelerate the 15 year timeline? 35:12: Thinking about risk after your career Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#407: Ionnie wants to vet her tax professional as diligently as she assesses her financial advisor – how should she go about doing that? Anonymous needs a career change, and she needs help figuring out how to approach the decision making process when choosing and preparing for her next field of employment MM prefers the simple path to wealth and investing in real estate but is looking for more information on a more intentional and selective approach to investing. Ingrid calls in to ask whether she should include her rental income when trying to figure out how much she can contribute to her Roth IRA. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#406: In this two-part episode, we first tackle the data points needed to assess various investment locations within your city of choice. We will cover seven specific neighborhood characteristics to review before diving into deal finding, and three things to look at once you've found a specific deal to evaluate. Then, we interview Kristen Lazure, the producer behind the Netflix movie "Get Smart With Money". The movie follows 4 financial coaches — Tiffany Aliche, Peter Adeney, Ross Mac and myself — as we help four people who are struggling with some aspect of their financial lives. Tune in for behind-the-scenes movie insights and enjoy today's episode! Timing of discussion points as per October 2022: 01: 49: Topic introduction 04:03: Tip on visualizing the data 06:00: Current and future locations of employers 11:55: Impact of the local business landscape and housing prices 13:22: Investments from municipalities 15:02: The importance of school districts 16:28: Adjusting location evaluations based on strategy 18:57: Understanding the crime landscape, flood plains and walk scores 29:28: Introduction to Kristin Lazure and Get Smart With Money discussion Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#405: Daniel and his wife want to go on an extended vacation and leave their jobs next year…and still have money in case there’s a problem at their rental properties. Would a HELOC help them? Anonymous and her husband have received a large commission and want to understand how to better plan for their future by optimizing for these inconsistent windfalls. Brian has hit coast F.I.R.E and would like guidance on how to prioritize between tax advantaged accounts and retirement accounts. Anonymous and his wife have been focused on getting short term rentals in a single location - is his portfolio too focused on this singular strategy?? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#404: When Rand Fishkin was 25 years old, he carried $500,000 in credit card debt. Less than a decade later, Rand was the Founder and CEO of a company that grossed $35 million in annual revenue. In this episode, Rand shares the story of hitting his financial rock-bottom and making the ultimate comeback. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#403: September Sabbatical continued! If you’ve been listening to the show for the past few years, then you know that we’ve entered our September Sabbatical, where the team takes a break from podcast production and airs a few of our favorites from the 400+ episodes we’ve aired to date. F.I.R.E. holds four pillars: Financial psychology, Investing, Real estate, and Entrepreneurship. This September, we’re running four weeks of episodes focusing on each of these four pillars. Today’s episode is focused on real estate. —------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Chad Carson’s friends called him a “nerdjock.” When former college football linebacker Chad Carson graduated from Clemson University, he decided to start a business. But he didn’t have any money. He was a 235-pound athlete who attended college on a football scholarship. He graduated debt-free with $1,000 in savings from various odd jobs. He wanted to become an entrepreneur, and he knew he was starting from zero. As Chad viewed it, starting from zero meant he had nothing to lose. He started jogging around local neighborhoods near the university. Whenever he noticed a property in disrepair, he’d ask if it was for sale. If he noticed a ‘For Sale by Owner’ sign in the yard, for example, he’d dial the number. If he noticed a home with an overgrown lawn and no curtains in the windows, he’d leave a note on the door, or he’d knock on the neighbor’s doors to get the owner’s phone number. By doing this, Chad started a real estate wholesaling business. He’d find off-market properties, enter into a sales contract with the owner, and then ‘flip’ the contract to an investor. He earned around $5,000 for each deal. The benefit to a wholesaling business, Chad discovered, is that he could get a foothold inside the real estate industry without much access to capital. He was a recent college graduate without any official employment, so most banks weren’t interested in offering him loans. Wholesaling gave him a start in the industry. But after awhile, he wanted to chase bigger deals. He and a business partner decided to start flipping houses themselves. They earned profits of around $20,000 to $30,000 for each deal. While this was great, Chad wanted to transition into something that would provide a steady, stable income stream. He was running an active business; he wasn’t accumulating a portfolio of passive investments. He and his business partner stopped flipping homes and began accumulating buy-and-hold rental properties. Today they have 90 units between the two of them. A few years ago, Chad realized that the passive income from his investments made him financially independent. He and his wife decided to enjoy their newfound freedom by moving to Ecuador with their two children, ages 3 and 5. They spent 17 months living in Ecuador, learning Spanish and enjoying a slower pace of life. They recently returned to the U.S. and are considering moving to either Spain or Germany — or maybe Colorado? — for their next adventure. In today’s episode, Chad and I discuss real estate, financial independence, and international travel with children. Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#402: Do you wrestle with the idea of leaving your savings in an account earning next to nothing versus investing it in the stock market? Do you use investment strategies that allow you to work with your nature, rather than against it? Are you careful to seek investment advice from those who share your investment goals, or do you get caught up in the trends of day traders? Morgan Housel, author of The Psychology of Money, joins us to discuss why investing is not the study of finance, but the study of how people behave with money. Morgan is an award-winning financial journalist, former columnist for the Wall Street Journal and The Motley Fool, and one of the foremost thinkers in the world of investing. As a long-term investor who shares our buy-and-hold philosophy, Morgan has behavioral finance insights that can help us invest for financial independence with more clarity and a better understanding of ourselves. We discuss how to develop self-awareness around biases, the importance of flexibility for long-term strategies, saving like a pessimist and investing like an optimist, becoming durable in the face of market adversity, the key difference between patience and stubbornness (and how it affects your mindset), expectation management, the importance of bonds and emergency funds, and a difficult lesson about tail risks that Morgan learned at age 17. You’ll enjoy this episode if… You’re super Type A with your investment portfolio and have a hard time letting go of plans that didn’t work out You want to learn a framework that can help you roll with the inevitable punches of the stock market You feel behind and have no idea how to develop a sense of what ‘enough’ is You’re tired of trying to overcome your inherent biases and reactions to the market and want to try something different For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode402 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#401: It’s September! If you’ve been listening to the show for the past few years, then you know that I’m on what I’ve dubbed my September Sabbatical, in which I’m taking a break from podcast production. F.I.R.E. holds four pillars: Financial psychology, Investing, Real estate, and Entrepreneurship. This September, we’re running four weeks of episodes focusing on each of these four pillars. Today, we kick off with an episode focused on financial psychology. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Today we’re sharing three talks given at the EconoMe conference, with each of these talks relating to F.I.R.E. The three discussions are: FI-Landia is a lie - What I Learned On My Journey To F.I.R.E., with Carl Jensen What If You Achieve All Your Goals But You’re Still Not Happy, with Rich Jones How To Never Again Say, “I Can’t Afford It”, with Paula Pant Details below: Carl Jensen: 05:27: Session begins 08:02: Sharing the message of financial independence and being hit with the “What If’s” 12:24: The concern about running out of money 20:16: The real value of fire Rich Jones: 32:50: Session begins 35:55: The importance of knowing who you are, what you want, and why 39:36: Day jobs: love vs. purpose 43:26: Why you should track your work 46:18: How to think like a recruiter 51:44: Why giving yourself permission could be your game changer Paula Pant: 59:34: Session begins 1:02:21: The importance of reframing the word “can’t” 1:10:29: Traditional budgets, zero based budgets and anti budgets 1:19:49: The benefit of high friction activities  * Timestamps accurate as of September 2022. Starting 60 days after episode release, timestamps may shift slightly as we make updates and changes **The next EconoMe will be held March 17th-19th 2023, in Cincinnati, Ohio. For more information or 10% off tickets, please go to: EconoMe Conference and use discount code: AFFORDANYTHING. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#399: Bella is SO CLOSE to reaching F.I.R.E and is worried about her withdrawal rate if the stock market drops. If the stock market does drop, can she withdraw as much as she had originally planned? Sam has been investing for several decades and thinks that he should stay invested in his portfolio, despite the recent drop in value…but he is still wondering if there’s a chance that he should sell. Meisha is making more money at her new job but can’t contribute to her 401(k) for the first six months - what should she do with her extra money in this interim?? Kyria is a young investor with multiple goals: she’s wondering how to best save for a downpayment without it being eroded by inflation and also whether her investment choices should take on more risk, since time is on her side. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode399 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#398: Chris Hutchins is an avid life hacker, a financial optimizer and the host of the top ranked podcast “All The Hacks”, where he shares his quest to upgrade his life without having to spend a fortune. These passions have led him to being featured in a documentary on financial Independence called “Playing with FIRE” and collecting millions of points and miles. If you want to learn more about optimizing your spend so that you can travel with less of an impact to your bank account, you’ll want to hear what Chris has to say. Timing of discussion points as per August 2022: 04:13: Is travel hacking a good use of time? 08:15: What is the simple path to optimizing spend? 09:108: Why focus on one rewards program? 10:46: Why are there recommendations for transferable point programs and what are the benefits of co branded cards? 18:08: How can the value of points or miles be estimated? 22:08: Is the best redemption value in booking business class international flights? 32:34: How do you know the best flight to book for optimal redemption? 37:00: What is the difference between airline miles and credit card points? 38:25: What is a “positioning” flight and how do I utilize this strategy? 47:42: What is the process for choosing flights based on reward redemptions? 57:15: What are the best ways to boost an existing points balance? 1:02:12: Discussion on credit cards with crypto rewards… 1:04:17: Tips for those who want deals but don’t want to work with miles or points… For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode398 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#397: Nic’s parents are forced to confront earlier than anticipated retirement…and they aren’t financially prepared. Now, a bank is offering to buy a part of their mortgage or a part of their house. Is this a scam?! Jon from Colorado is curious about after tax contributions to a Roth 401k, and would like us to talk about why we wouldn’t recommend it. Anna is househacking, and she locked down an awesome interest rate. But, she’s still carrying PMI and is wondering if there’s a way to remove the PMI without refinancing. Courtney from Denver is a real estate investor who wants to invest in new locations, and wants tips on building out her network. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode397 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#396: International best selling author and leadership speaker, Julie Winkle Giulioni, talks through a multidimensional career framework that features eight dimensions of career development. She spells out how to apply the dimensions of contribution, competence, connection, confidence, challenge, contentment, choice and climb to different parts of your professional life, whether that’s assessing your current job, navigating a conversation with your superior or setting yourself up for the next progression. In this episode, we cover: 01:15: Introducing the topic of optimizing engagement at work 05:02: The “Why” behind the Great Resignation 07:28: How to feel like you’re making a true contribution 14:01:The need to increase competence for growth 16:03: Solving for boredom with your superior 23:16: Forging connections in the era of remote work 32:18: Enhancing confidence and imposter syndrome 38:36: Appreciating the role of contentment in the workplace 39:18: The dimensions of choice and climb Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode396 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#395: Welcome to Invest Anywhere, our monthly series on long-distance real estate investing. Invest Anywhere airs on the First Friday of each month and is co-hosted by Paula Pant and Suni Rao. In this episode, we tackle the challenging decision of how to evaluate a city for rental property investment. We will cover three specific sets of analysis, talking through a macro business cycle view, a more specific economic analysis, and then encourage you to review your own personal network. Enjoy! 01:30: Topic introduction 2:30: Evaluation to be discussed: Business cycle, economics, and hierarchy of boots on the ground 5:48: High level look at the business cycle 08:40: The four phases of the business cycle 11:12: The peak phase of the business cycle 25:40: The recession phase of the business cycle 37:15: The recovery phase of the business cycle 39:40:: The expansion phase of the business cycle 47:10: Factors to consider when choosing a specific economy 57:48: Hierarchy of boots on the ground For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode395 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#394: Bill listened to our episode with Bill Bengen, father of the 4% rule, and he wants to know if there was a way for him to figure out how much money he should be keeping in cash. Sheryl gets stock from her company, and she would usually sell it…but the stock value has decreased. And now, she isn’t sure what she should do. Heather inherited an IRA but MUST empty it within ten years - but she doesn’t need it right now. What should she do?? Julie and her husband have access to an HSA for ONE MONTH. Can they max it out before they lose access to it? In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough questions. Enjoy! Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode394 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#393: Chuck Jaffee is a forty year veteran financial journalist who regularly writes for the Wall Street Journal and is also a nationally syndicated financial columnist. He discusses how money and investors' attitude towards investing has changed over the last few decades. 00:44: Introducing Chuck Jaffe 03:05: How people interacted with the market in the 1980’s 06:50: Dealer and liquidity risk when investing in the market 09:23: How the environment 40 years ago impacted investor psychology  12:53: Long term impact of Black Friday, the worst market crash experienced by any living investor 16:10: Discussion of fund options that are more illiquid and can sell at discounts  18:04: The combined influence of access real time data and the ability act in real time  28:31: Moving away from employee supported retirement plans 29:00: The difference between financial education and financial literacy 31:26: Chuck’s take on the 4% rule 50:16: Portfolio and personal optimization For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode393 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#392: Colleen and her husband own SEVEN paid off rental homes. Now they’re heading into retirement and disagree on what to do with some of that equity. Kevin wants to hit FIRE (Financial Independence, Retire Early) and believes his motivation comes from witnessing the financial trauma of the Great Recession. He’s wondering if others are motivated to reach FIRE for similar reasons. Anonymous wants to learn more about utilizing HSA accounts and Susan wants to learn more about investing in tax liens. In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough questions. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode392 ________________________________________ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#391: Dr. Reza Abraham, an international leadership consultant, walks us through a framework of staying in control of your career and your life. This framework utilizes a singular core, three cornerstones and twelve principles.  He explains how to apply and execute these principles to reinforce personal fulfillment, growth and progression.  0:00:47: Introducing Dr. Reza Abraham + the framework for staying in control of your life through a core, three cornerstones and 12 pillars 0:02:48: The core of taking control: consciousness 0:06:41: The first cornerstone: contentment 0:08:46: The second cornerstone: consistency 0:12:30: The third cornerstone: conversion 0:15:05: Five reflection questions to review for intentional growth and progression 0:24:17: The first pillar: character 0:30:03: The second pillar: communication 0:33:16: The third pillar: curiosity 0:35:15: The fourth pillar: compass 0:38:14: The fifth pillar: courage 0:39:22: The sixth pillar: collaboration 0:45:46: The seventh pillar: connection 0:48:04: The eighth pillar: competency 0:52:04: The ninth pillar: companionship 0:56:18: The tenth pillar: cash 0:56:53: The eleventh pillar: condition 1:00:52: The twelfth pillar: contribution Resources mentioned: #383: How to Talk About Money with Confidence and Charisma, with Vanessa Van Edwards - Afford Anything For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode391 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#390: We start this episode with two anonymous callers who have opposite problems: one says her bills are too high, while the other is worried that she’s saving too much. Anonymous (“Izzy”) saves A LOT. She wants to relax about her spending more, and start including more joy into her life. How should she approach the next 10 or 20 years, so that she can enjoy her financial security? A different anonymous caller (“Starlight”) has the opposite problem: her expenses are mounting. Her bills make her uncomfortable. She wants to shake up her investments so that she can tap her assets in order to make her payments. Ideally, she’d also like to buy a house in Europe within the next 10 years. How should she do this? John liked the episode with Bill Bengen, where we discussed the 4% rule. However, he questions whether that rule should really be applied to the FIRE community. Steve is a landlord who needs his property to cash flow, but doesn’t like to raise rents. What should he do? Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode390 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#389: Should you bother investing in real estate … especially from a distance? Is the hassle worth it? What’s the upside? Do you really want this? Or should you just stick with index funds? Isn’t it scary to invest out-of-state? How do you know if you’re ready? In today’s episode of Afford Anything Presents: Invest Anywhere, my co-host Suni Rao and I tackle these common questions. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode389 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#388: Recessions are terrifying. Market crashes often bring out the worst in people’s anxieties and fears. This fear triggers us to act even more irrationally than usual – which can lead to making expensive mistakes in our investment portfolios. In today’s episode, Scott Nations, who spent his career studying market volatility, describes some of the most common cognitive biases and irrational behaviors that investors make. He shares tips on how to master the mental game of investing, especially in turbulent times. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode388 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#387: Lila is concerned about inflation and the risk of a recession. Should she invest in the stock market, despite the scary headlines? Or should she pay off her primary residence or her investment properties? Linda invested in a 529 for her son’s college, and he’ll be starting in the fall. But, the value of the plan dropped right before she was planning on using it and she is wondering how to keep from losing more money. Jen and her husband want to retire in 8 years. They’re hoping to have paid off their mortgage AND hit their net worth goals when they stop working. How should they prioritize between these two goals? Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode387 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#386: We all have our secrets. We keep some secrets from bosses, colleagues and clients, like the fact that we hope to retire early, change careers, or start a business. We keep other secrets from friends and family, like our income, net worth, spending habits and investing mistakes. Research from around the world shows that we tend to keep the same types of secrets – around 38 common varieties, including secrets about finances, ambitions, beliefs, habits, unpopular opinions, mental health, trauma, addiction, and drug use. These 38 common types of secrets fall into three categories: (1) moral secrets, which we fear will either cast judgment on us or will cause harm to another; (2) relational secrets, which we fear will harm our relationships; and (3) goal and ambition secrets, related to career, business and finances. In today’s episode, Columbia University professor Dr. Michael Slepian discusses the secret life of secrets. Dr. Slepian is the Sanford C. Bernstein & Co. Associate Professor of Leadership and Ethics at Columbia Business School. Prior to that, he was a visiting scholar at Stanford University. His research focuses on the social costs of secrecy. What impact do secrets have on our lives and health? What are the hidden costs of keeping quiet? Are there certain things that are better left unsaid? What should we share, with whom, and when … especially when there are career, social and financial repercussions to revealing information? Dr. Slepian joins us today to share his insight. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode386 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#385: Anonymous (“Jennifer”) keeps hearing us say that you should “start with the end in mind” – that your investments should match your goals and timeline. But what if you don’t have any specific financial goal? What if your risk tolerance is different than you once thought? Rachel’s new employer won’t let her contribute to retirement for more than a year - what should she do?? Carri’s parents are in poor health and can’t work much - what should they do about their life insurance policy and their health insurance? Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode385 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#384: Welcome back to the third episode in our special series, Afford Anything Presents: Invest Anywhere. Invest Anywhere is a new monthly series that runs on the First Friday of each month. It lays out the information you need to invest in real estate at a distance. Many of you want to invest in real estate, but you live in a high-cost-of-living area. (Ahem, California and New York). The homes in your city are prohibitively expensive, and they offer lackluster returns. You could invest in a lower-cost area like Cincinnati, Indianapolis, Omaha or Wichita … but HOW? That sounds terrifying. We’re here to dismantle that fear, piece by piece, by sharing our knowledge and experience. The Invest Anywhere series is dedicated to giving you the guidance you need to make smart, confident choices about investing out-of-state. It’s co-hosted between myself (Paula) and esteemed real estate investor Suni Rao, who’s experienced everything ranging from buy-and-hold rental investing to (accidentally) wholesaling. She’s managed short-term and long-term rentals. She’s owned houses, multi-units, and even a mobile home park.  She joins me in this episode to talk about a variety of strategies that will help you make money in real estate. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode384 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#383: Behavioral researcher Vanessa Van Edwards, who runs the research lab Science of People, breaks down the psychological secrets behind feeling and looking more confident, competent and charismatic. She explains how to apply these techniques to critical conversations around money, whether you’re negotiating your salary, buying a home or car, or arguing with your spouse about your household spending. Subscribe to get the show notes delivered via email, for free, at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#382: Joe is buying his first house hack and would like to understand if the FHA loan or the doctor loan would be better for him. Sara wants to leave her job to spend time with her children, and she needs help in calculating her FIRE number. Kat received a windfall and is wondering if she should invest it in stocks, real estate, or a combination of both. Aisha is moving to the US and wants to start investing ASAP - how should she approach her goal to reach FIRE? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode382 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#381: Maybe you’re envious of your friend who bought Bitcoin in 2015 and held until it hit 7-figures. Maybe you’re anxious about rapidly rising home prices. Maybe you regret that you didn’t buy a rental property five years ago, because – at the time – you felt like prices had already risen so much (from 2012 to 2017) that you just couldn’t justify paying 2017’s pricetag. Our lives, finances and careers invoke many strong feelings. In today’s episode, Mollie West Duffy, the co-author of Big Feelings, shares strategies for not letting our feelings hijack our choices. Mollie and her co-author, Liz Fosslien, run an Instagram channel about emotional management with half a million followers. Fosslien is an economist and behavioral scientist whose work has been featured by The Economist, Freakonomics and NPR. Duffy is an organizational and leadership development expert who’s written for Harvard Business Review. They tackle relatable workplace issues like perfectionism, productivity guilt and Zoom fatigue, among much more. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode381 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#380: Matt wants to optimize his portfolio and wants to know if he should invest along the Efficient Frontier – despite the fact that the asset allocation it recommends is absolutely bonkers; it’s wild and risky and tilted like nothing he’s ever seen before. Ionnie just rolled over her Roth IRA and would like to understand how to withdraw her contributions without getting penalized. Anonymous and her spouse are both in the military and about to reach retirement. They have an expensive whole life insurance policy, costing $550 per month, and wonder if they should switch to term life insurance. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Also – we’re launching a book club!! Each month, we’ll read and discuss a book written by an Afford Anything podcast guest, starting with Morgan Housel, James Clear, Ken Honda, and Dr. Susan David. Sign up here. P.P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode380 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#379: Welcome to our First Friday bonus episode. Once a month, Afford Anything presents a special feature called Invest Anywhere, in which we teach our audience how to invest in real estate from thousands of miles away. We kickoff today’s episode by discussing current market conditions. Yesterday the Fed raised interest rates by another 50 basis points, which means mortgages are more expensive than they’ve been in years. Additionally, jittery investors worried about an impending recession led the stock market to its worst day of the calendar year so far. How should we interpret the current market conditions? Is this a good time to buy an investment property? We cover this in the first 20 minutes of today’s episode. Next, we discuss 5 challenges associated with investing in long-distance real estate investing: (1) fear, (2) accountability, (3) traction, (4) stress, and (5) relationships. We elaborate on each challenge and offer solutions. Finally, we discuss 4 benefits to investing out-of-state: (1) competitive ability, (2) diversification, (3) returns, and (4) repeatability. We elaborate on four types of diversification: economic, strategy, business cycle, and asset based. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode379 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#378: Anonymous is 25. She has a job offer that comes with a substantial raise. Hooray! Buuut … there’s a problem. If she accepts this job offer, her new employer won’t allow her to contribute as much money to her company retirement accounts.  How should she think about the trade-off between increasing income and funding her retirement? Meanwhile, Dan from California is retiring soon and wants to know what he and his wife should do with the loan they took out against their 401(k). Finally, an anonymous caller who goes by “Daughter” has a whole life policy that only costs her less than $50 per month. Since her policy is so cheap, should she keep it? In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough situations. Enjoy! Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#377: Today’s episode is sheer retirement nerd bliss. We talk to the creator of the 4 percent retirement safe withdrawal rule, Bill Bengen. If you’re new to retirement planning, you might not yet grasp the gravity of this. Let’s cut to the chase: the 4 percent rule is one of the most revolutionary, groundbreaking insights in the field of retirement research in the past 30 years. To understand why, let’s climb in our time machines and return to 1994. Back then, many financial advisors were telling their clients that they could safely withdraw 7 percent of their retirement portfolio each year. After all, the simplistic logic went, the stock market has historically yielded between 7 to 9 percent returns, so that type of withdrawal rate shouldn’t dwindle the principle … right? ⠀ Bill Bengen, an MIT graduate and former rocket scientist, decided to build a better model. He looked at the performance of investment portfolios across 30-year time horizons, beginning in 1926. Under the assumption that the portfolio is invested 50 percent in an S&P 500 Index and 50 percent in intermediate-term bonds, in a tax deferred account, he found that retirees could only withdraw 4.2 percent of their portfolio in the first year of retirement, and that amount adjusted for inflation each subsequent year. He called this the “safe withdrawal rate” that gave people a reasonable chance of not outliving their money, based on historic performance. He published the results in the Journal of Financial Planning and caused a stir. This was revolutionary. It upended the assumptions that dominated the field at the time. And it remains a cornerstone of retirement planning to this day. We talk to Bill Bengen about his discovery – and his latest research – in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode377 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#376: Meghan’s mom is 64 years old and suffering under a toxic boss. It’s tough to switch jobs at her age. How should she think through the next steps? Ellen has a 20-year-old son with physical and developmental disabilities. Her other child, age 21, will need to look after him for the rest of their lives. How should she handle their inheritance? Joe wants to start working part-time in four years, and fully retire four years after that. He worries he’s investing too aggressively for his retirement date. In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough situations. Enjoy! Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail and we’ll answer them in a future episode. _______ For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode376 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#375: Here’s the deal: The majority of people who write about personal finance repeat the same tired aphorisms and cliches. “Millennials aren’t investing enough,” they’ll lament. “Millennials are amassing wealth at a slower pace than previous generations!” But when you ask for their source, they turn up blank. Each writer points to a headline, which sources another headline, in a neverending circular secondary-source-citation that fails to point to any primary data source. Nick Maggiulli doesn’t play that game. If you haven’t heard the name Nick Maggiulli yet, prepare to meet one of the most original, insightful voices in the media landscape of personal finance and investing. (His last name is pronounced “ma - julie,” and his godfather refers to him as “paper hands,” but that latter point is a different story for another day.) Nick is a data scientist with a knack for clear written communication, a rare Venn Diagram intersection of skill sets. He holds a laser-focused interest in the arenas of personal finance and investing, and he’s eager to share fresh, nuanced, evidence-backed takes about savings, spending and investing with anyone who will listen. He recently released his first book, Just Keep Buying; the title reflects a user-friendly reminder to continue dollar-cost averaging. It also speaks to the main idea behind wealth creation: accumulate income-producing assets, consistently, for as long as you possibly can. It’s an honor to welcome Nick Maggiulli onto the Afford Anything podcast for what I hope is the first of many appearances. In today’s episode, we discuss actionable strategies for managing your money, including assessing your spot along the save-invest continuum, implementing the 2X rule into your spending decisions, and saving half of your inflation-adjusted future raises. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode375 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#374: Andy in Palm Springs wants to create an income stream through a taxable brokerage account. What strategy should he use to minimize the tax impact of withdrawing his gains? Jake wants investment cash flow until he’s eligible for his military pension in 10 years. Should he buy small multifamily properties right now, wait a few years and invest in syndications or should he invest in index funds through taxable accounts? Anonymous is a US Citizen, lives in London, and can’t invest in index funds. How can he invest while reducing his risk? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#373: How do people make money in real estate? Many focus on rental income, but this is only one of five ways that properties create wealth. We explain five surprising ways that real estate builds your balance sheet: cash flow, appreciation (market-based and forced), tax benefits, principal paydown, and instant equity at closing. Why does this matter for long-distance investors? If you’re investing out-of-state, you’ll need to choose a city or town. How do you decide? First, think about how you want to bias your returns. Do you want to optimize for cash flow? More appreciation potential? Identifying this will help you align your city/town selection with your financial goals. If you’ve been thinking about investing in real estate – especially if you might invest long-distance – you’ll love this episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode373 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#372: Eve has been investing in her brokerage account and the tax liabilities are starting to add up. She wants to retire in 12 years and is wondering if she should invest in after-tax contributions and plan on a Roth conversion. Anonymous has rental properties and wants to start building his kids credit histories. Is it a good idea to add them as co-borrowers on the mortgage? Lily is really excited about investing in real estate, but househacking wasn’t the right fit. She’s looking for advice on investing in opportunity zones through crowdfunding platforms. In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough situations. Enjoy! Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#371: Psychology professor Bill von Hippel explains the evolutionary science behind how we’re hardwired as humans. We’re wired to be social, to connect, to communicate and cooperate. We’re wired to want to learn and teach, to build a collective body of knowledge that stretches beyond what any single individual could ever learn in their lifetime. We’re wired to feel surges of happiness that fade, so that we’re intrinsically motivated to keep repeating behaviors that lead to additional surges of happiness. Once we understand the evolutionary science behind what makes us happy, Dr. von Hippel explains, we can apply this knowledge to making better decisions for our work, money and lives. Bill von Hippel is a graduate of Yale University and the University of Michigan. He’s currently a psychology professor at the University of Queensland in Australia. He joins us to share his insights into the history and science of happiness. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#370: Kristen is 32, and she and her husband want to retire in less than 20 years. They make too much to contribute to a Roth IRA. Should they use back door Roth conversions to speed along their path to early retirement? Michelle makes $190,000 and is going to switch to a career that pays $40,000 on average. To prepare for this lower salary, she's selling her current home and buying a different one. Should she pay off her new home with the proceeds from the old one? Or should she invest her profits? Anonymous lives in a high cost-of-living area and is wondering where to keep her down payment and emergency funds. Should she use I-bonds, TIPS, or some combination of these two? In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough situations. Enjoy! Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#369: To answer these questions, we need a deep, tree-trunk understanding – a core, fundamental understanding – of how the stock market operates. What, exactly, IS a stock – and how are stocks valued? What’s the difference between the Dow Jones, the S&P 500, and the Nasdaq? Why is the market a voting machine in the short-term, but a weighing machine in the long-term? Brian Feroldi, the author of “Why Does the Stock Market Go Up?,” joins us for a Stocks 101 explainer episode. If you’d like a deeper understanding of the world of stocks, you’ll enjoy this explainer episode. And if you have a friend/spouse/coworker who’s said, “I need to learn more about investing,” share this episode with them. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode369 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#368: Grace wants to buy a manufactured home for rental income. Should she calculate her returns differently for a manufactured home? Alex is curious about cryptocurrency. How should she analyze the returns promised by different platforms and where can she go to learn more about crypto in general? Thomas and his wife have parallel goals of saving for a down payment and contributing to retirement accounts. How should they balance both of these goals? In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough questions. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode368 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#367: Since the start of the Covid-19 pandemic, many commentators have remarked that we’re living in an “epidemic of anxiety.” More than 40 million Americans suffer from anxiety, and countless millions more notice themselves “acting out” against their responsibilities in smaller, self-sabotaging ways: procrastinating, lacking motivation, grappling with an inability to concentrate. In today’s episode, Dr. Ellen Vora, M.D., discusses both the internal and environmental factors that can exacerbate anxiety. She talks about nutrition and sleep, as well as the fact that, frankly, your job just might suck. She applies these ideas to tactics that allow us to better handle our finances, investments, careers and lives. Dr. Ellen Vora holds a B.A. from Yale University and a medical degree from Columbia University. She’s a board-certified psychiatrist. Enjoy this conversation, and share your comments and feedback with members of our community at affordanything.com/community For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode367 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#366: Micheal’s parents just sold their home to pay off debt and fund their retirement. How should he invest the profits? Ryker would like to understand what it would take for cryptocurrency to be considered as a good investment option for a diversified portfolio. Megan has qualified for her employer's 401k and needs help deciding between investing in a Roth 401K and a Roth IRA. In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough questions. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#365: Nearly every financial news story for the past several months has centered around inflation – but what, exactly, is inflation? What are its causes? What are its effects? How is it measured? What notable inflationary events have unfolded throughout history, and what can we learn from these? In this episode, we peel back the layers of the onion in order to deepen our understanding of the concept of inflation. We discuss hyperinflation, biflation, stagflation; we discuss the CPI, the PPI, and core inflation. We discuss the demand-pull inflation, cost-push inflation and the wage-price spiral. We resist the temptation to make predictions about the future, choosing instead to focus on refining our understanding of the present. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode365 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#364: Our first caller is curious about whether he should keep his 30 year term life insurance policy or let it lapse with 12 years left on the policy? Anonymous is wondering which financial products would work best for to cover her older age care and expenses? Max is thinking through real estate and stock market returns as they relate to future population trends. Ramon asks us about the details behind infinite banking. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#363: In our 20’s and 30’s, we have high levels of fluid intelligence, or raw intellectual horsepower. We can ace tests, impress people with our memory and recall, and analyze facts, documents and data. But in our 40’s and 50’s, we have higher levels of crystallized intelligence, which allows us to draw together novel insights from across domains. Fluid intelligence allows us to analyze, or break apart. Crystallized intelligence allows us to synthesize, or put together. Each type of intelligence invites us to express different skills, to pivot our role at work – or perhaps even to change careers or industries altogether. In today’s episode, Harvard professor Arthur Brooks discusses these two types of intelligence, and outlines how we can gracefully move from one strength to the next. Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#362: David is questioning how to better manage his spending. He’d like a stronger framework to think through budgeting challenges. Elisa and her husband bought a home, and now they’re saving extra income every month. She has a pension and her husband is an entrepreneur. How much should they be saving for retirement and how should they invest their extra money? Geoff invested primarily in taxable brokerage accounts for the last twenty years. He’s built a $6 million portfolio and reached financial independence. He wonders about the smartest strategy for withdrawing from those taxable brokerage accounts to efficiently manage capital gains? Jenna and her husband are planning on buying their next home in a few years. She wants to know if I-bonds are a good way to save for the down payment and closing costs. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#361: Wall Street Journal columnist Spencer Jakab marks the one-year anniversary of that weird time when the subReddit Wall St Bets pumped shares of meme stocks like GameStop and AMC Theaters, triggering a short squeeze that forced several hedge funds to lose billions. What did we learn from that experience? And how do we actually take down Wall Street? How do we launch a truly effective financial revolution? We share those insights in today’s episode. Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#360: I’m worried my parents are getting ripped off by their financial advisor. What should I do? My wife is trying to qualify for student loan forgiveness … but we might lose a bunch of tax benefits in the process. Is it worth the risk? I’m enrolling in grad school, and I want to optimize how to pay for rent and groceries. Should I use money from a 529 plan? Three callers. Three questions. In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these tough Q’s. Enjoy! Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#359: Money, relationships, health and purpose: life is running smoothly when all four of these elements are working together in tandem, like wheels on a car. But how can we make spending and investing choices that facilitate stronger relationships, better health and a deeper sense of purpose? Andrew Hallam, who became a millionaire on a teacher’s salary, shares researched-backed, evidence-based insights into how to find balance, drawing from the worlds of behavioral finance and stock market history. Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#358: Where is the balance between the risks and potential returns of actively and passively investing in index funds?Where do you place your savings after you max out your retirement and HSA accounts? How do you finance building a rental unit when there’s already a home on the lot? Is it more beneficial to buy back pension time with post tax deductions or a 457b plan? Or should I not buy back pension time at all? In today’s episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I discuss the purpose and practice of mindful money. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Enjoy! Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#357: Discussing advanced investing topics with me is former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy. You may recognize him from the Ask Paula episodes, but we discuss financial topics shared in his new book "STACKED: Your Super-Serious Guide to Modern Money Management" - co-authored with Emily Guy Birken. Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#356: How do you find balance between smart money management vs. missing out on opportunities? Should you pile money into investments or take that dream trip to Tanzania? What should you do when your heart leads you to a decision that doesn't make sense on paper? In today's episode, former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I discuss the purpose and practice of mindful money. Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#355: When Jordan Grumet realized he has achieved financial independence, he fell into a deep depression. He didn’t know who he was anymore, he says, and he didn’t know what should come next. He learned about how to deal with us by observing his hospice patients. In this episode, Grumet, a hospice doctor, describes how working with the dying has taught him about life. Subscribe to the show notes at affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#354: Charlie in Cali has enough money saved to pay cash for a house, but she and her husband decided to finance their home, instead. They’d rather invest the money and arbitrage the spread. But one problem: how can they keep themselves from touching this investment? Jay is choosing between Fidelity and M1 Finance, and has questions about tax loss harvesting. Nicole and her siblings will be inheriting some properties that they eventually plan to sell. How should they set up or organize these properties among so many owners? Should one person take the lead? Do they need a shared business account? Also, how should they evaluate a property and make sure they get a good deal when they sell? Ed owns three homes, two of which he plans to sell in the next few years. He plans to live in them long enough to establish residence and take the capital gains exemption when they sell. Is his plan for handling the taxes solid? We answer these four questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! Subscribe to the show notes at https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#353: Daniel Pink joins us to discuss an unusual theory: (1) that our energy rises, falls, and then rises again; (2) that this pattern plays out across our days (morning energy, afternoon slump, nighttime second wind); (3) this also plays out across our lives, with serious implications for how we spend those “muddled middle” years of our 30’s, 40’s and 50’s. Get the show notes delivered to your inbox by visiting https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#352: Anna and her husband have volatile income, but Anna thinks that having 18 months of living expenses is unnecessary. She’s torn between paying off her student loans ($30,000) or investing the money. Mentally, she always figured she would pay off her debt first, but wouldn’t investing pay off in the long run? Charlotte and her husband are taking a phased approach to financial independence, where they need to bridge two gaps before they each turn 59 ½. How can they calculate how much they need at each phase? Elle has a retirement plan in place, but her company is adding a Roth 403(b) option soon. Should she stay the course or adjust her strategy in these last five years before retiring? Sara wants to purchase land and build her dream house by refinancing her rental property and turning her current home into a second rental. How can she improve this plan? Joe Saul-Sehy, my friend and former financial planner, joins me to tackle these questions on today’s episode. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it at here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Get the show notes delivered to your inbox by visiting https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#351: Geoff Woods, Vice President of The ONE Thing and host of The ONE Thing podcast, is an expert on ruthless prioritization, habit development, and goal setting. The simple framework he presents allows you to focus deeply and commit to the actions you need to take if you want to take your productivity to the next level this year. Get the show notes delivered to your inbox by visiting https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#350: Anonymous and her husband have set themselves on the path of saving for retirement. But an old mistake haunts them: a financial planner convinced them to buy a mix of whole and term life insurance, which costs them $700 per month. Do they need whole life insurance, and where else can they save their money? Mike has $60,000 in cash earning one percent interest. He has plans to buy a home and get married in three to five years. Where else can he put his cash to earn a little more? Is the stock market too risky for such a short time horizon? Anonymous and her future husband are wondering: what’s a realistic amount to spend on a wedding? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. To subscribe to the show notes, go to https://affordanything.com/shownotes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#349: A frank and candid conversation about life, dead-lifting, and enjoying the hell out of doing meaningful work. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode349 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#348: Aja’s mom is 75 and has to take required minimum distributions from her IRA. She doesn’t need the money. Where should she put it? Anonymous from MA is flummoxed by HSA-compatible health plans. His copay and deductible are awful, and even bronze plans seem better. Are HSA plans overrated, or does the math work out? Julia and her husband, both 27, want to retire by their early to mid-40s. Is there a point at which they should stop contributing to tax advantaged accounts and only contribute to taxable accounts? Ileana and her family like their home, but it needs to be bigger. A cash-out refi didn’t give them enough funds for their dream renovation. Should they put their money into the market in the hopes that it will grow large enough to fund a future renovation? Or should they move into a bigger house, rent out their house, and fix it up years down the road? Nick has a seasonal business. Can a sweep account help stabilize him? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer these questions on today’s show. Enjoy! Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode348 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#347: Back in the 1960’s, Jack Bogle thought that actively-managed mutual funds performed better than a passive indexing strategy. He pseudonymously published a paper saying so. But academic data from the University of Chicago challenged his preconceived notions. He attended seminars that showed how the drag on returns that come from management fees and trading costs, coupled with the reality that the bulk of gains come from a hard-to-predict handful of equities (a concept known as “skew”), lead to index funds holding long-term outperformance. At the time, index funds were only available to major institutional investors. Regular folks couldn’t access these winners. And that might have continued for a long time … … except history turned on a dime. In the early 1970’s, Jack Bogle got fired. Rather than accept defeat, he turned into a renegade. He launched Vanguard and began offering index funds to ordinary individual investors. And the rest, as they say, is history. In today’s episode, we learn about the revolutionary ideas that paved the path to passive investing. We learn about the radical invention of the index fund. We discover the drama, the tenacity, the betrayal and redemption behind it. And we discover the lessons that the history of the index fund holds. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode347 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#346: Pensions make Chad uncomfortable, to the point of quitting his job to roll his $175,000 over to an IRA. Is the 12 percent match his employer offers good enough to beat the two percent growth of his pension? Or should he leave and never look back? Anonymous and his wife have $275,000 saved and a child on the way. They’re 27 and want to reach financial independence by 35. They want to buy a house, but with this crazy market, what’s the smartest way for them to use their savings? Anonymous and his wife are 30 and hope to reach financial independence in five years. They want to know: is a taxable brokerage account the best place for their leftover $1,000 after they max out their pre-tax 401k contributions? Norm wants to buy a house in cash and doesn’t want his name on public record. Is it possible for him to stay anonymous? Sharon called in on episode 336 and called back to clarify her question. Her husband purchased a below-market property which has a cap that limits how much they can sell it for. Should they keep the home, or sell it, even if they can’t get the full price for it? Joe Saul-Sehy, my friend and former financial planner, joins me to tackle these questions on today’s episode. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode346 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#345: Let’s talk about one of the biggest expenses you might ever encounter: health care costs. When you get a hospital bill, do you understand it? After all, it looks like it’s written in code (and sometimes it literally is). How do you know if the bill is accurate? Has everything been coded properly? Are you being charged for the services that you actually received? If you need to dispute an item, what’s the process? Pulitzer Prize finalist Marshall Allen joins us to shed light on the complex world of medical billing. He breaks down the “explanation of benefits,” describes a step-by-step process for obtaining your medical records, and explains an actionable plan for how to contest a bill. If you’ve ever felt overwhelmed by the complexity of your health care bills, you’ll learn a lot from this concise, informative episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode345 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#344: Russell’s job offers the option to contribute to a 457 plan. Since he’s in the highest tax bracket, should he take advantage of the tax deferral offered through the 457 or invest within a taxable brokerage account? Anonymous is on track to be financially independent in 14 years, but isn’t living up to her potential working a boring job. How can she live up to her potential and do more without sacrificing her quality of life? C wants to know what tax implications she should consider before working remotely from abroad? Daan is wondering if he should stake or lend his current cryptocurrency portfolio to make additional gains on assets he plans to hold long-term? Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode344 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#343: The real estate market in 2021 has been bonkers. That’s the technical term. From 2012 to 2020, home prices nationwide rose at an annualized average of 5.8 percent per year. From April 2020 to April 2021, home prices climbed 17.2 percent. This sudden surge in prices has many homeowners and would-be investors fearful of a crash. The memories of the stark price run-up prior to The Great Recession are all too salient. What goes up must come down, right? Not exactly. In this episode, we walk through market fundamentals — discussing housing supply, lumber prices, and the distinction between cheap credit vs easy credit — to illustrate how today’s market is unlike anything we’ve ever seen. More importantly, we offer tips for everyone —whether you’re a renter looking to get into your starter home, an empty-nester looking to downsize, an owner-occupant who wants to lock in your gains, or a curious aspiring investor who wonders if it’s too late. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode343 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#342: Russell is a busy professional who’d like to invest passively in real estate. Is there data he can use to compare this approach to owning and managing their own properties? Laura wants to purchase her first investment property in Miami. Should she cash out some RSUs and stock from her company to use as a down payment? And what type of mortgage is she eligible for since she already owns a home? Jordan and his wife own three properties and are under contract on a new house since they have a new baby on the way. Should he sell any of his existing properties to be in a stronger cash position, thus mitigating the risk of future fluctuations in his income as a real estate broker? Or should he keep his rental properties since his goal is to reach financial independence through rental income? Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode342 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#341: Imagine a line. Cowardice exists at one extreme end of that line. Recklessness exists at the other extreme end. And in the balanced middle, you’ll find courage. Today’s conversation is about courage. We’re not talking about inspiring physical acts of bravery in this episode; rather, we’re discussing moral and social courage. The type of courage you need to make an investment. Buy a rental property. Invest in stocks. Start a business or side hustle. Retire early. Travel overseas. Have a difficult but diplomatic conversation. Express your feelings constructively rather than bottling them up inside. Raise an issue with immediacy rather than hesitation. Break bad news to someone. Ask for help. Launch an initiative. Try something new. We’re talking about the type of courage that’s required to become a better, bigger person in your work, your relationships, your life. We’re having this conversation with Ryan Holiday, the bestselling author of a series of books on Stoic philosophy. Enjoy. Resources Mentioned: Courage is Calling, by Ryan Holiday affordanything.com/realestate affordanything.com/viplist For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode341 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#340: Imagine this: You start a side hustle. Maybe you sell planners or lead workouts in the park. You make a few thousand dollars during your first year. It’s fun beer money, but not enough to quit your day job. But you keep growing. You run this as a one-person operation, though you bring on freelancers or independent contractors. Your revenue grows into the five figures. Then six figures. After a few years, you’re running a one-person, million dollar company. This sounds like a pipe dream, right? But it’s the true story of Laszlo Nadler, who created a line of planners and calendars. It’s the true story of Stacy Berman, who started leading 5:30 AM fitness bootcamp classes in the park. And it’s the true story of hundreds of other solopreneurs interviewed by business journalist Elaine Pofeldt, who took a deep-dive look at the lives and businesses of entrepreneurs who run companies that gross more than $1 million, but have no employees. In today’s episode, we take an inside look at the secrets behind one-person, million-dollar businesses. If you’ve ever considered starting a side hustle or business of your own, don’t miss this. This episode originally aired in March 2019. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode340 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#339: Have you ever thought, “I’d like to invest in rental real estate but there are no cheap properties in my area!” “Homes in my city are too expensive. I’d have to invest out-of-state, but that sounds terrifying.” Or have you ever thought, “I’m curious about real estate but I’m not a fan of the idea of taking on all that debt.” Today’s interview is right up your alley. We talk to Rich Carey, who bought 20 single-family rental properties in Alabama, totally debt-free, while stationed in Germany and South Korea. He invested not just out-of-state, but entirely from outside the country. He bought his properties free-and-clear. And he did it on a military salary while raising two kids. This interview originally aired in June 2018. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode339  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#338: This month, we’re running four episodes based around the four pillars of F.I.R.E. — financial psychology, investing, real estate and entrepreneurship. Today’s episode, which originally aired in April 2018, offers advice to investors who want to sharpen and hone their competitive edge. Here are three lessons from this conversation with investment writer Morgan Housel: Lesson #1: Great investors need patience and humility. Lesson #2: Read broadly. Don’t just read books about finance and investing. Read from a broad multi-disciplinary array of subjects, so that you can form a latticework of ideas. Lesson #3: Play a strong defense. On the surface, it seems like playing defense is a conservative strategy. Emergency funds and a strong income-producing allocation, for example, both sound conservative. But in the long-term it could prove to be the opposite. Enjoy this interview, which originally aired in April 2018. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode338 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#337: Meet Kristen Berman, a top researcher in the field of behavioral economics. She’s the co-founder of Irrational Labs, which designs products that are evidence-based in the behavioral sciences. Her co-founder, Dan Ariely, is the James B. Duke Professor of psychology and behavioral economics at Duke University, and one of the most famous behavioral economists in the world. Here are some of the (counterintuitive!) ideas that Kristen shares: Habits are overrated. Automate instead Budgeting doesn’t change your spending behavior Commit in advance Forget about the outcome Focus on the process You need accountability Think about the Three B’s: behavior, barriers and benefits Tune into this episode to hear Kristen elaborate on these research-backed, evidence-based ideas about how to improve our spending, saving and investing habits. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode337 *Note: This interview originally aired in October 2019. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#336: Anonymous and his partner have a one-bedroom condo that they rent out in Pasadena, CA. The problem? They’re barely breaking even. Should they keep the condo, or sell it and make better use of the profits? Sam wants to know: how much of an emergency fund does a rental property need? Michael and his wife expect their taxable income to be less than $10,000 this year. Should Michael (age 56) take distributions from his 401k to minimize or eliminate their income tax burden? Shanon wants to switch to an ethical bank with values that align with hers. How can she create a framework for making decisions about financial institutions when authentic information is scarce? Sharon's husband purchased a property with a below-market loan in 2008. They now have an extra $4,000 per month, and Sharon wants to buy a property as a first-time buyer. They're torn between keeping the property or selling it. What should they do? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer more of your questions. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. For more information and resources, go to https://affordanything.com/episode336 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#335: Have you ever spent years studying the wrong major, climbing the ladder at the wrong company, chasing the wrong career?  Have you spent years living in the wrong city? Wrong relationship? Wrong lifestyle? It’s hard to discern what *we think we want* from what we really want. Society teaches us what we’re “supposed” to want. And we follow along. The result is keeping up with the Joneses. It’s the hedonic treadmill. It’s lifestyle inflation. And it causes conflict, both within ourselves and with others.  Today’s guest, Luke Burgis, discusses mimetic desire — how our “wants” are imitative — and how we can find our deeper truths.  For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode335 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#334: In today’s episode, we answer three questions from a college senior named Rafael. He asks about productivity tools and tactics, student debt, Robinhood and market investing, and how to establish yourself as an expert in a given domain. We answer his questions by widening the lens. People often ask about productivity tools. “Do you use Asana or Trello?” But nobody asked Michelangelo what paintbrush he used to paint the Sistine Chapel. The discussion around tools misses the point, which is to master the craft. Sure, we answer his direct, overt questions. But we also dive deeper, refining these topics and exploring the questions *behind* his questions. This is an episode in which we peel layers off the onion. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode334 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#333: In the 1890s and early 1900’s, we had recessions every two years. From 2009 to 2020, we enjoyed an 11-year bull run, the longest bull run in history. And when we finally had a recession, it lasted only two months. It was the shortest recession in U.S. history. The duration between recessions is growing longer (these days, we average 10 years between recessions, as opposed to two years at the turn of the previous century). And when recessions strike, we recover faster. The average length of recessions is growing shorter. What does this mean? If we project these trends into the future, are we bound for the end of recessions? That’s the question that kicks off this discussion with Ben Carlson, Director of Institutional Asset Management at Ritzhold Wealth Management and the host of the Animal Spirits podcast. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode333 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#332: Ginger’s financial independence (FI) number is $2 million, but she doesn’t want to fully retire early. Once she hits ‘coast’ FI, she wants to 1) buy her time back with outsourcing, 2) take a mini-retirement, and 3) buy a vacation home. Does it make sense for her to divert retirement contributions to these goals, or should she aim to save $2M? Wilson plans to have a two percent withdrawal rate in retirement. Given this low rate, should he go all-in on stocks? Or should he split up his retirement funds and invest one half conservatively and the other half aggressively? Jennifer has a low-stress doggie-daycare, but she needs a bigger space to scale up. How the heck can she find a property to suit her needs in Austin, TX? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer another round of listener questions. (If you have questions on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing, leave them here and we’ll answer them in a future episode.) For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode332 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#331: Four thousand weeks. That’s how long we live if we’re lucky enough to celebrate our 80th birthday. We rarely think of our lifespan in terms of weeks. When we do, it seems painfully short. And that’s the point that Oliver Burkeman, author of Four Thousand Weeks, wants to drive home. Rather than fight a losing battle against time, Oliver recommends that we embrace our cosmic insignificance, redefine what a meaningful life looks like, choose what to fail at, burn bridges, and ruthlessly limit our works-in-progress. If the financial independence movement is a rebellion against trading the rest of our limited time for pay, Oliver’s unconventional view on time management is a rebellion against trading the rest of our limited time for an illusion of productivity. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode331  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#330: Linda is 58 and wondering how to account for her Social Security benefits when thinking through the 25x expenditure equation. Her expected expenses are $100,000 - $150,000. How can she figure out if she’s ready to retire? Alise has dreamed of living abroad for long periods of time and wants to buy a property in Portugal before the minimum spend requirement increases. Should she go through with this, or is there another way to gain dual citizenship or travel abroad for long periods of time? An anonymous lawyer from Colorado has $250,000 in a SEP-IRA account that’s invested in mutual funds with fees ranging from 0.61 percent to 1.06 percent. Fees on these funds are projected at $200,000 over the next 20 years. Should he and can he transfer these funds to another SEP-IRA account? What are the consequences of doing that? Mr. Man is eligible to retire with a full pension, health benefits, and social security at age 48. He has 20 years to go. Should he include his pension and social security benefits in his financial independence plan, or think of them as extras? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer more of your questions. Do you have a question on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing? Leave it here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode330 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#329: Have you ever thought about how an economist views financial planning? Would you guess that it's vastly different from how some financial planners approach this work? Today's guest, Laurence Kotlikoff, is a Professor of Economics at Boston University. The Economist named him one of the world's 25 most influential economists in 2014. Professor Kotlikoff has written 19 books, and hundreds of professional articles and Op-Eds. He's here to explain why economists take a different view than financial planners on investing, retirement planning, and risk mitigation. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode329 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#328: Sarah O Sahara’s parents sold their rentals and business of 24 years. They’d like to create a trust for their grandkids with boundaries in place to avoid entitlement. How should they structure this trust? Anonymous in Canada has a fully paid off condo that she wants to turn into a rental once her new townhome is ready. Should she mortgage against the condo to reduce the mortgage on her townhome? Are there any tax benefits to having a mortgage on a rental? Luis’s wife wants to start moonlighting in her field. Can she open and contribute to a Solo 401k even though she has a TSP account with her 9-to-5 employer? Russell and his partner want to emigrate to Canada in the near future. Should they move their investments into Canadian funds? Renee and her husband are in their 60s, and most of their retirement funds are in pre-tax accounts. They have federal tax credits they’d like to use to move these funds into taxable accounts. Is this a sound strategy? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me once again to answer your questions. Enjoy! (Have an investing, entrepreneurship, lifestyle, or decision-making question you’d like us to answer? Submit it here!) Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#327: The stories of success that highlight talent and hard work don’t tell a complete picture. The best artists, athletes, and entrepreneurs don’t always have innate talent. Not all of them have put in 10,000 hours of practice. What sets them apart is their framework for learning. Award-winning social psychologist Dr. Ron Friedman discusses his new book, Decoding Greatness, which answers the question, “why are some people so good at what they do, and what can we learn from this?” You’ll learn how to harness the power of reverse engineering, create a collection of masterworks from the best in your industry, and why practicing in three dimensions improves performance. If you have a specific skill set you want to develop or improve, tune in for Dr. Friedman’s framework for developing greatness. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode327 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#326: Anonymous is struggling with being too frugal, possibly to the detriment of her health. I mentioned in a previous episode that I struggled with frugality for a long time. She wants to know: in what ways was frugality a hindrance or an asset, and how did I get myself out of such a frugal mindset? John and his wife aren’t sure how much they should contribute to their daughter’s Ohio 529 plan. They want her to graduate from undergrad debt-free, but they imagine she’ll get help from scholarships and that she’ll work as a teenager. How much is enough? Rafael just got a job as a 1099 sales associate and is wondering how the heck to calculate what he’ll owe in taxes. Rafael has a second question: he opened an account at Vanguard in December 2020 and noticed that he could still contribute to that account for the first few months of 2021. Which year should he have focused on contributing to? Elizabeth has two rental properties: one that’s paid off and profitable, the other which shows a loss. If she put her profitable rental into an LLC, could she still combine the rent from both properties? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer another round of questions. By the way, if you have questions on business, money, trade-offs, financial independence strategies, travel, or investing, be sure to leave them here and we’ll answer them in a future episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#325: Okay, so everyone and their dog is talking about Bitcoin — but what exactly is it? And what’s Ethereum? If you’re feeling lost in the topic and confused by the jargon, start with this episode in which we cover the basics about blockchain technology and cryptocurrency.  For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode325 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#324: Rob and his fiancé are grappling with what to do about her $400,000 of federal student loan debt. Should they pay it off immediately, or bank on a 20-year dismissal? “Nurse Dreaming of FI” isn’t sure what her family’s next financial move should be. She’s torn between investing extra money into index funds, or using it to buy a fix-and-flip. Her goal is to make work optional. Which path will lead her there? Daniel recently discovered the financial independence retire early (FIRE) movement and got a job earning $50,000 per year. He wants to househack a duplex to get closer to FIRE, but how the heck can he find anything in this seller’s market? Anonymous and her husband have 457s with the City of Chicago. However, they found out that Illinois has a horrible credit rating. How can they - and should they - protect their funds? How much should they rely on their pensions? Nick is curious: how have my views on wholesalers changed over the years, and why? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer these questions today. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode324 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#323 Brad and Jonathan from ChooseFI join us for a deep philosophical and practical discussion around what we learned from 2020. We explore... What the pandemic taught us about work, finance, and life The importance of being mentally and logistically nimble and flexible The distinction between directionality vs methodology What we’ve learned about how to get a job, what type of education to get, and what to do with the rest of our lives For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode323 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#322: Jess wants to reach financial independence by the time she’s 50. But she’s worried that she doesn’t have enough money in cash or taxable brokerage accounts to bridge the gap in her first few years of retirement. What moves should she make, if any? Yisell wants to invest money now. Should she cash out her $70,000 pension in hopes to generate more than the $1,000 per month she’s guaranteed from it? Abbey is 22 and she would like to go back to graduate school for nurse anesthesia. Should she save up and pay for it in cash, or invest her money and take out federal loans? Eliana enjoyed our interview with Paul Merriman on the two-fund portfolio. She’s curious about what growth stocks and value stocks are, and how they fit into a passive index fund investing strategy. Finally, Sneezy wants to know: why aren’t stocks a good hedge against inflation? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode322 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#321: Have you dreamed of making a career transition, only to realize you have no idea where to start, who to talk to, or how to convey your skills to interviewers? Career expert Ashley Stahl has the information you need to take control of your career and pivot into something new. Ashley struggled with this, too -- but in the process, she figured out a system for identifying someone’s core skills and core nature to find a career and company more aligned with both. She also chats about the 10 core skill sets you can use to propel your career forward; the five root causes of burnout and what to do about them; and four sabotaging job hunting myths that can hold you back. If you enjoyed our interview with Gorick Ng, you’ll like this one. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode321 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#320: Rob is hoping to retire at age 60, but he has a pesky mortgage balance he wants to eliminate beforehand. He and his wife expect to inherit $300,000. Should they use this money to pay off their mortgage or should they bulk up their retirement accounts? Another anonymous caller has two separate questions. One is about the tax efficiencies of ETFs vs. mutual funds, while the other is about Ginny Mae funds and whether there are bond funds that have an inverse relationship with equities. Priya is looking for information on home equity loans: where can you get the best terms, and what are the disadvantages? Additionally, she’d like to know which city is best for rental investing: Atlanta, Dallas, or Raleigh? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me on the show to answer your questions. Let’s dive in! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode320 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#319: Julia Galef is an acclaimed expert on rational decision making. She’s hosted the Rationally Speaking podcast for the last decade, and she’s passionate about good reasoning. Her book, The Scout Mindset, highlights the importance of looking at situations objectively and honestly. This is something a lot of people struggle with -- humans are often irrational -- but Julia argues that this is a skill that we can develop with self-awareness.  In this interview, she shares the difference between what she calls a soldier mindset versus a scout mindset. She explains why we often default to the soldier mindset of defending ideas we desperately want to believe, and details several thought exercises that we can use to instead train our brains to scout for the truth. Good decision making and ensuring you look for high quality sources of information can help when weighing trade-offs, and it can also save you from making costly investment mistakes. Julia and I also discuss specific examples of when having a scout mindset can prevent you from risk of ruin. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode319 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#318: Joe is a new real estate agent and he’s looking for ways to save. Is opening a SEP IRA a good account when you’re no longer a W2 employee? Grace has a similar concern: she’s a tutor, but she’s paid as a contractor. Should she forget about her Vanguard brokerage account and open a SEP IRA or Solo 401k? Kim is newly divorced and celebrating the freedom to make her own financial decisions. She’s struggling to make a living -- also as a new realtor -- and wants to get started with real estate...but how can she do that on limited funds? Kim also wants to know: should she move her funds from an actively managed Fidelity IRA to a Vanguard Roth IRA? Chaz is 22 and has $2,100 - $2,500 left each month to put toward savings. Where should he keep this money if he’d like to move out-of-state in the near future? Anonymous just got a raise, and while awesome, it might push her income to a level that prohibits her from making full Roth IRA contributions. Should she make a partial contribution this year, or start adding money to a Traditional IRA to do a backdoor conversion? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to tackle these questions. Let’s dive in! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode318 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#317: What if work and life can coexist together - without enormous trade-offs? What if all you have to do is ruthlessly prioritize within each area and manage the rest with automation and delegation? If it sounds like a pipedream, it’s not. Guests Michael Hyatt & Megan Hyatt Miller, authors of Win at Work & Succeed at Life, share how work/life balance is more achievable than you think. They also discuss how constraints increase productivity, why working over 40 hours a week can harm your mental and physical health, why rest is critical, and how self-care can give you an edge at work. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode317 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#316: Pauly from Portland doubled the inheritance money he received from $50,000 to $100,000 during the pandemic. Now he’s wondering if it’s okay to use this $100,000 as a downpayment on a home in Portland. Is that a wise use of the money? Preethi accidentally withdrew funds from her Roth IRA as an excess distribution, and she’s already filed her taxes. What should she know for tax time next year? Michele wants to reach financial independence (FI), and her grandparents are leaving her their house. She already owns a home, and she’s torn between six potential options that will propel her toward FI. What should she do? Casey is in the market for a second rental property and wants to know: would we recommend purchasing a rental in a complex where she already owns a condo? Or should she diversify into a different complex in a different, nearby, more stable town? Fred doesn’t have access to a workplace retirement plan. Besides opening a Roth IRA, what else can Fred do to juice up his retirement savings? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer these questions on today’s show. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode316 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#315: Do you ever grapple with the differences between your present self and your ideal self? Katy Milkman, host of the Choiceology podcast and the James G. Dinan Professor at The Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania, shares the science of getting from where you are now to where you want to be. Her new book, How to Change, is a “science-based blueprint for achieving your goals, once and for all.” In this discussion, Katy reveals 1) why your strategy is key to making lasting change, 2) how we can pick the right strategy for our circumstances, and 3) the handful of science-backed tactics that bridge the gap between our present selves and ideal selves. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode315 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#314: Briale opened a Variable Annuity inside a 403b at work when she was 23. She has 17 years to go before retirement. As an elementary school teacher, her pension will be $6,000 per month. Should she stop contributing to the annuity and contribute to a Roth IRA instead? Hunter put a credit freeze on his two children’s credit, which required sending each credit union documentation via mail. Experian and TransUnion confirmed the credit freeze, but Equifax didn’t. Upon calling, the representative gave Hunter a different mailing address for the documents. What should he do? Debi has an extra $1,000 each month and isn’t sure where to save it. She also has $10,000 in a CD which will reach maturity in August 2021. Her goal is to buy a residence in the next five years. Should she save this all for a downpayment? Anonymous is concerned about her parents retirement portfolio. Their advisor charges a fee of 1.5 percent assets under management. Her parents are frugal and they don’t realize how much they’re paying. Should she talk to them, or drop the issue? Sarah isn’t sure whether she should put more of her savings towards a Roth 401k or a 529 fund for her future kids. Which option is best if she wants financial flexibility? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me once again to tackle these questions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode314  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#313: Do you know the unspoken rules about how to get ahead in your workplace or industry (and as a result, how to earn more)? Unspoken rules, and the corresponding social norms, create a major impact in how we’re perceived in the workplace -- and therefore how often we’re promoted. But these rules are rarely taught. Managers expect us to understand these implicit rules, but they never explain them to us. How are we supposed to succeed? Gorick Ng, a career advisor at Harvard who specializes in working with first-generation, low-income students, shares his wisdom on navigating the workforce at all stages of your career. His advice can help you make more money, get promoted, and accelerate your ability to save and invest. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode313 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#312: After paying basic living expenses and maxing out their 401k’s and Roth IRAs, Caroline and her partner have $4,000 - $5,000 left each month. Where should they put this money if their goal is to simply have their money work harder for them? Sanjay is torn between selling his townhome or renting it out. The rental numbers don’t work on his 15-year mortgage -- should he refinance to a 30-year mortgage instead? Kyle wants to construct a portfolio with the highest Sharpe ratios and wants to know: would the risk parity model work? What are the downsides? G is curious: does the stimulus check received for their children count as earned income for the kids? If so, can they put it toward the Roth IRAs they opened for their children? Anonymous has two unrelated questions: what are our thoughts on the housing market in relation to the moratoriums on mortgage payments and emergency bans on evictions? What will happen when they go away? Additionally, what tools, questions, or resources do we recommend to have a productive financial conversation with your partner? Finally, another anonymous caller wants to know: do they need to submit receipts for the HSA contributions they make? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me as usual to tackle these questions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode312 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#311: Do you find yourself overthinking and getting stuck in unproductive thought loops? According to a study commissioned by today’s guest, 99.5 percent of 10,000 people said they overthink. Chances are, you can relate. That guest is Jon Acuff -- a New York Times bestselling author who loves to nerd out about goals. In this discussion, he shares 10 signs you're overthinking, explains the differences between overthinking and being prepared, and presents a framework called the three R’s (retire, replace, repeat) that can transform your destructive thought loops into healthy soundtracks. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode311 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#310: Greta is tired of financial modesty. She wants to achieve financial independence through diversified income streams, and has her eyes set on owning local duplexes. What should she focus on to make this happen?  Jeannie wants to know: when should you scale back 401k contributions so you can invest in something else, like real estate? Steph and her husband came into $25,000 and aren’t sure what to do with it. Should they pay off their student loans, save it towards a house and starting a family, or purchase her company stock options? J from California is curious: how do you strike a balance between optimization and simplicity in your financial plan?  Dawn has $65,000 in a 403b through Ameriprise and the fees associated with it are outrageous. Should she take the money out and put it elsewhere, or leave it?  My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer these five questions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode310 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#309: Are we in a housing bubble? Are we going to see a repeat of 2006 all over again? Are there any good investment deals to be found right now? These are the questions playing on many people's minds, and we seek to explore the answers in today's First Friday bonus episode. We start by exploring some of the forces that are at play in today's real estate market. What separates the market of 2006 from the market of today? In the second half of the episode, Paula explains how and why she chose to buy a duplex in Indianapolis, despite it being a seller's market. There are deals to be had if you know where to look and what to look for. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode309  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#308: Ziggy purchased an $890,000 property in San Mateo, CA in 2016. After living there for a year, he had to move, so he rented it out. Unfortunately, it’s cash flow negative. Is this property worth holding onto, or should he sell? Vivek has a paid-off primary residence that he’s interested in renting out for a few years, before selling. He’s worried about capital gains tax – does turning the home into a rental impact the amount he’ll pay? Anonymous in Virginia wants to travel after retiring, which will increase her expenses for the first seven or so years of her retirement. How can she plan for a higher withdrawal rate at the beginning of retirement, and a lower withdrawal rate in the middle of her retirement? Given the talk around student loan forgiveness, Jess wants to know: should she pay the minimum on her student loan debt and save the payments she would otherwise make? Or should she keep throwing extra at her higher interest loans? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer these questions on today’s show. Let’s dive in! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode308 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#307: “Taxes are the single biggest factor that separates people from their retirement dreams.” That’s a quote from today’s guest, Ed Slott, a nationally recognized IRA distribution expert, practicing CPA, and bestselling author. He argues that there’s a high likelihood that tax rates could rise in the future, and as a result, we need to shovel more money into tax-exempt accounts like Roth IRA and Roth 401k’s. Ed says taxes are one of the biggest threats to our retirement plans, and draws attention to tax events that catch seniors by surprise, such as the so-called “widow/widower” tax. If you’re wondering how taxes could derail your retirement -- and what you should do about it -- you’ll learn an enormous amount from this episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode307 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#306: Jake and his wife want to retire in five years, at which point they’ll have 14 years before they can access their 401k funds. To help bridge that gap, Jake wants to know: what should their asset allocation look like for their taxable brokerage account? This year, Kim’s employer enrolled all employees into a “fully funded indemnity program combined with a nationwide direct primary care membership.” What the heck is this program, and how might it impact Kim’s finances? Burnt Out in Boston is switching their focus from financial independence to taking a mini-retirement. How can they financially and mentally prepare for this leap? Matthew is torn: should he and his wife -- both 26 -- max out their Roth IRAs and then save up for a rental property, or simply save cash for the rental and worry about their Roth later? Finally, Deva and her husband are fed up with their messy tenants. They’re kind and responsible, but they’ve left the yard a mess. They have a clause in the lease that addresses this, so beyond that, what can they do? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer these questions on today’s show. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode306 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#305: Financial independence is a continuum, a spectrum. How do you know where you stand? In this episode, financial writer JD Roth discusses the seven stages of financial independence, the seven rules of investing, the formula for calculating your lifetime wealth ratio, and the importance of managing your career as though it’s an asset. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode305 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#304: Paige and her fiancé have two autumn 2021 goals: save for a wedding and an emergency fund. There’s one problem: they only have around $200 per month to save. How can they grow the gap when they’ve run out of things to cut and ways to earn more? Kat’s investor friend connected her with a wholesaler who only deals in cash. How can she find $130,000 to buy her subject property? Anonymous “Countryside Living” is renting their grandparent’s property, which they plan to make their forever home. It’s on the older side and needs renovations, but the repairs don’t need to happen immediately. How can they fund these repairs while also avoiding a mortgage payment in their 60s? Annalis wants to know whose approach to business I prefer: Gary V’s, or Cal Newport’s? She also asks: how do you become a good speaker? Anonymous “My Job Pays for My Housing” is planning for financial independence. Given that their employer covers their housing, when should they start looking for a house? Now, or in the last year of their job? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer these five questions today. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode304 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#303: Can you imagine living in a world without email? Most of us can’t - how would we get work done? - but this is what Cal Newport advocates for in his newest book, A World Without Email. Cal cites a study that found the average knowledge worker checks various communication tools once every six minutes. At that rate, it’s a wonder we get any work done at all. Cal argues that modifying our habits (like checking email at designated times) isn’t enough. We need to look for solutions outside the inbox and seek to reduce back-and-forth communication at all costs. If you’re drained by your inbox, we chat about strategies, processes, and systems that can help streamline your work and communication flow. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode303  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#302: Did you know that optimists worry about their finances 145 fewer days than pessimists? They’re also more likely to save money, and are 7x as likely to experience better financial health. Michelle Gielan, bestselling author of Broadcasting Happiness, defines optimism “as the expectation of good things to happen and the belief that our behavior matters.” She shares specific tactics and mindset shifts we can make right now to become more optimistic and resilient, and, in the process, develop a better relationship with stress. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode302 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#301: Amelia is worried that she and her husband are under-insured. Should her husband get a short-term disability policy, even though it’s expensive and they’re unlikely to need it? Sarah wants to refinance her owner-occupied triplex, but she’s torn between a 15-year and a 30-year option. Which is better in her situation? Steven just discovered the financial independence (FI) movement in July 2020, and he wants to reach FI in 11 years. He has $30,000 in cash and $26,000 of student loan debt. How should he use his cash given his FI goal? The South American Anthropologist wants to make a career change. His baby daughter has inspired him to become an example of living life on your own terms. Will his financial independence plan sustain him and his family for years to come? Annalis and Mike are hunting for their first rental property, but they haven’t found anything nice that meets the one percent rule. Should they purchase a mansion and rent the rooms on Airbnb? For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode301 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#300: Here’s the deal: Target Date Retirement Funds are simple, automated, easy. The problem? What’s simple might not be optimal. Investment expert Paul Merriman joins us to discuss the two-fund portfolio, a mix of one target date fund and one small cap value fund. He describes why this could be the ultimate portfolio for buy-and-hold investors who want to boost their returns, without excessive complexity or risk. If you’re wondering what to do with your 401k, tune in. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode300 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#299: Chris bought Tesla a few years ago and Jinko Solar eight months ago. Both of these have gone up in value by a lot. What tax strategies can he use to sell these shares? Holly and her three sisters stand to inherit two side-by-side duplexes. How can they structure the ownership of these properties in a fair way? Eric feels hopeless about health insurance as a self-employed business owner. Are DPCs or healthshares the way to go? Frank and his wife have a nine-year retirement plan that involves selling their home and moving to Costa Rica. How can they maximize their savings and existing investments to set themselves up for success? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer these four questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode299 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#298: Money conversations with friends, family members, or significant others are unavoidable. Most of us dread these conversations - they’re awkward, heated, or draining. Erin Lowry, author of Broke Millennial Talks Money, shares tips and scripts for tactfully setting financial boundaries and expectations without drama. If you’re anxious about being in a wedding, splitting the tab with friends, or asking your siblings about taking care of your parents, this episode is for you. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode298 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

This morning, almost every major brokerage halted trading on the most volatile stocks, including GameStop, BlackBerry, Bed Bath & Beyond, Nokia, and AMC Theaters. We're in a situation where major trading platforms are blocking retail investors - us - from placing trades, while allowing hedge funds and institutional investors to drive prices. That is not a free market. When you don't let people buy, and you don't let people sell, you're locking people out of the game entirely. Yesterday, I was worried that grandma and grandpa would make the wrong investment choices and irrationally bet their life savings away. Now, they're prohibited from making any choice. 🤯 We deserve the right to make our own trading decisions. For the latest updates, follow me on Twitter (https://twitter.com/affordanything) or Instagram (https://instagram.com/paulapant; check out my stories). I'm updating there as things unfold. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

If you blinked, you missed the biggest stock market story since the crash of March 2020. It’s a story that led GameStop, a brick-and-mortar company that sells *physical* video games (remember when games came on 5.25-inch floppy disks?), to skyrocket its share price by 700 percent in two weeks. It’s a story of short selling, of high-frequency trading, and of individual investors who harbor deep anger towards hedge funds. It’s a story of social media vs. Wall Street ... and the innocent bystanders who get caught in the crossfire. That's the story we cover in today's episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#297: George is torn between paying down his student loan debt (which he deferred) or buying a househack. Which is better for his long-term goal of reaching financial independence? Mario is curious to know: is his two-fund portfolio at a 90/10 split is a good asset allocation for his Roth IRA? Hanan wants to figure out if a backdoor Roth IRA conversion will work for her. She also wants to investigate whether a Vanguard Institutional 500 Index Trust and a Vanguard Institutional Total Bond Market Index Trust are ideal. Are trusts different from index funds or mutual funds and if so, how? Vivian is worried about bridging the gap between when she retires and when she claims Social Security. Will her plan of doing a Roth conversion ladder work out the way she hopes? Lastly, June and her husband netted $400,000 from the sale of some golden parachute ISOs. They want to help their children pay for college and are trying to figure out how to strategically use this money. Should they pay off their home, buy rentals, fund 529s, or Roth their 401ks? My friend and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer these five questions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode297 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#296: There’s a lot happening in the market. The Dow is at a new high, there are runaway stocks causing irrational exuberance, and yet, unemployment claims are on the rise. How can this be? To make sense of this, we discuss how improving judgment and using mental models can protect us against risks and short-term thinking. We review one question people rarely ask that might save them from making costly investment mistakes. We then wrap up with a discussion on the so-called death of cities, and what this means for real estate investors. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode296 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#295: How well do you know yourself and the reasons why you manage money in the way that you do? You might not know at all, or you might have some degree of understanding, but digging into your money story can shed insight on your behaviors with money today. Rachel Cruze, four-time bestselling author and daughter of Dave Ramsey, shares three frameworks that can help us better understand our money habits. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode295 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#294: Jeffrey is curious: if I were to interview Suze Orman today, would I agree more or less with her thoughts on the financial independence retire early (FIRE) movement? Matt wants to know: if a property cash flows really well, is it worth paying significantly more than the appraised value to purchase that income stream? Sara and her husband are returning to the states after living abroad for a few years. They’re moving to an expensive area where three to four bedroom homes cost $800,000+. They have $150,000 saved for a downpayment, but a $600,000 mortgage isn’t what they had in mind. What should they do? Eva and her partner are squirreling away money before the birth of their baby. They’d like to pay off their $90,000 mortgage in three years, but they’re afraid to use the money in case of unexpected baby expenses. What’s their best move? Justin and his wife want to take a gap year with their children in three years. They plan to visit Spain and London for six months each. What are unexpected expenses that they should factor into their budget? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode294 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#293: Geoff Woods, Vice President of The ONE Thing and host of The ONE Thing podcast, is an expert on ruthless prioritization, habit development, and goal setting. The simple framework he presents allows you to focus deeply and commit to the actions you need to take if you want to take your productivity to the next level this year. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode293 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Sign up to take the 31-Day Challenge for an Awesome 2021 at https://affordanything.com/31daychallenge Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#292: Three Kids, FI has an all-equities broad stock market index portfolio that he’s held for years. He’s confident he can handle maximum volatility, so what investments can he lean into to that will provide him with great long-term returns? Jordan is a new listener and he has three questions: should he use $100,000 to buy more rental properties or invest in a brokerage account? Should he and his wife upgrade their home and buy a property that’s worth double their current home? And finally, how can self-employed individuals who earn more lower the cost of health insurance? Alex’s wife lost her job due to the pandemic. They live in Washington state and are married filing separately due to his wife’s student loans. Can he use half of his income to qualify her for Roth IRA contributions? Sarah rounds out this episode with a concern: a financial advisor told her that investing in VTSAX over-indexes her in large cap funds and technology stocks. Is this true, and what should she do about it? I answer these four excellent questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode292 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Welcome back to PSA Thursday, a weekly-ish segment in which we talk about how to handle money, work, and life in the year that is 2020. Today, we focus on the importance of end-of-year tax planning before you ring in 2021. We cover these tips: Open a retirement account  Adjust your tax withholdings Check your 529 Plan  Make charitable contributions Why this could be a good year to make a Roth conversion Spend down the balance in your FSA For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#291: Tracy Tutor is the author of Fear is Just a Four-Letter Word as well as the first female real estate broker on Million Dollar Listing LA. Tracy took her 20 years of experience in the industry and distilled the lessons she learned into this book. During our conversation, she shares tips and tactics for overcoming a fear of speaking out, how humor can help us connect with others, and why it’s important not to silence our inner voices. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode291 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#290: Sharon owns two condos that are worth $1.4M and has a cash cushion of $120,000 plus a $50,000 emergency fund. She’d like to move into a small house while keeping her cash cushion intact. Should she take out a home equity loan on her mortgage to essentially pay for her house in cash, or get a traditional mortgage and use her savings towards the downpayment? Jury and her partner are torn between two options: buying a condo, which would allow them to live off of one salary and invest the other, or buy a more expensive house – a much more attractive lifestyle option. Which should they purchase? Daine’s IRA balance is a result of 401k rollovers. He’s concerned that his lack of monthly contributions cause him to miss out on compound interest. What can he do to grow his retirement funds? Molly and her husband want to reach financial independence (FI) in 15 years, at age 50. They’re unsure of whether their rental property income will sustain their FI lifestyle. How can they plan for this? I answer these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode290 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

An update on the latest news in student loan forgiveness and forbearance, plus smart strategies for student loan repayment in 2021. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#289: Josh Kaufman, bestselling author of The Personal MBA, discusses the five parts to every business and how this information applies to everyone - not just entrepreneurs. He shares many examples and ideas on how to level up your business or career through simple steps. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode289 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#288: Karen and her wife are in their 50s, financially independent, and partially retired. They need $150,000 to buy a new home, and they aren’t sure which option is best. Should they take advantage of the CARES Act and pull money from their traditional IRAs? Raid their Roths? Or take out a mortgage? Ingrid’s mom is retiring this year. To fund her retirement, she’ll sell her property for $1 million. How should she invest this money so that she can live off of it in perpetuity? Elaine has saved $20,000 in a 529 plan for each of her two kids, but she realizes that they may not attend college. Should she keep the 529 plans, or save money elsewhere? Amanda is afraid to tap the equity in her home and use it to purchase a rental property. How should she think through whether this move is right for her? Lisa and her family plan to sell their home and move across the country. They might have the option to pay cash for a home, but they also want to buy an investment property. Should they get a mortgage on their new home or pay cash? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer your questions on this episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode288 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Many people in the personal finance / FIRE community have a complicated relationship with the concept of consumer spending. They may see family, friends and neighbors demonstrate one extreme -- they’re profligate spenders who will buy anything -- and, in an effort to be nothing like them, they may overcompensate by becoming extreme penny-pinchers. (I see this often at the start of a person’s FIRE journey, when the pendulum is swinging sharply in the other direction). The reality is that neither extreme is healthy. There’s a middle ground between being so gullible that you’ll buy anything vs. being so cynical that you build a wall that shuts real value out of your life and hampers your growth. In recognition of that balanced middle path, today’s PSA Thursday episode focuses on five questions that you should ask yourself before making a purchase. #1: Do I have high-interest debt or an inadequate emergency fund? #2: Is this a purchase or an investment? #3: How long have I been thinking about this? #4: Is this only serving an emotional need, or does it also have greater utility? #5: The five “ity’s” -- longevity, durability, applicability, versatility, utility. We elaborate on these five points in today’s PSA Thursday episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#287: Seth Godin is the author of 19 bestselling books on mastery, creativity, business and marketing. His books have been translated into 35 languages, and one of his books was the top bestselling marketing book of the last decade. He’s an inductee to the Marketing Hall of Fame (yes, it exists). Seth joins us today to talk about creativity, the importance of practice, and how to overcome your limiting ideas. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode287 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, in 2019, Americans spent just over $8,000 on food. If you're on a tight budget, slashing your grocery bill is one of the easiest ways to spend less. But what if you don't want to compromise on healthy eating? Today's guest, Rosemary Fotheringham, is a Functional Nutritional Therapy Practitioner (FNTP) who's also on the path to financial independence. She and her husband slashed their monthly grocery bill from $1,200 down to $300 - without eating pasta every night. She's here to explain their framework for healthy eating and her best tips for eating well on a tight budget. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#286: Kaitlyn has $78,000 saved for a property, but she isn’t sure whether she should buy a personal residence, a rental property, or both. How can she best use this money? An anonymous listener wants to lower their housing expenses. Should she and her husband buy a cheaper property and turn their current home into a rental, or should they stay and pay off the mortgage as quickly as possible while saving for a downpayment on another property? Alex is just getting started with financial independence and asks: how can you calculate your financial independence date, and how do you know how much you need to save to reach that number at a certain age? Ell wants to know: what’s the difference between a high-yield savings account and a money market account, and how can you maximize the interest you earn in these accounts? Jenn wants to know: is it possible for Canadians to find cash-flow positive real estate deals, either in Canada or the United States? I answer these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode286 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#285: Sam wants to use the funds in her Vanguard S&P 500 index funds for a downpayment on a house. She isn’t sure if she should keep her savings in the market. Should she move her money, and where? Hailey purchased a duplex in March and is already looking to sell due to a hostile tenant during the purchase process. How can she shift her focus from her initial return on investment to a long-term outlook? Zoe dreams of attending grad school, but her savings are locked away in retirement accounts. How can she save for grad school in the next two to three years? Mohamed wants to monetize a new podcast with affiliate relationships, but the service providers he wants to promote don’t offer affiliate programs. Can he still make this work, and how? I answer these listener questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode285 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Paula Pant and Andy Hill broadcast from Dallas, where they’re part of a bare-bones skeleton production crew that’s hosting the 10th annual FinCon, a conference for a community of personal finance podcasters, YouTubers and bloggers. On the evening before the event, they reflect on the importance of community, especially when it comes to learning about money management. Enjoy this behind-the-scenes glimpse. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#284: Morgan Housel is an award-winning financial journalist, and he’s a leading thinker and author in the world of investing. His new book, The Psychology of Money, highlights the influence that our behavior has on our financial success. We discuss developing self-awareness around our biases, saving like a pessimist and investing like an optimist, being critical of who we take investment advice from, diversification, expectation management, tail risks, and much more on the topic of behavioral finance. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode284 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Many of us have experienced disconnection from our loved ones this year, especially with older family members. It can be difficult to stay in touch when parents and grandparents aren't technologically savvy. They might not know how to text, how to use their cell phone to place a call, or how to initiate a video call. We hope that can change after you listen to this episode. To help us learn how we can stay connected with the senior citizens in our lives, we brought on Bria Sullivan. For the past six years, Bria has had a side hustle teaching seniors how to use technology. Today, she shares her best tips on how we can do the same with the elders we love. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#283: Andrea’s parents have a seemingly salesly financial advisor. He tried to get them to purchase a second life insurance policy, among other potentially pushy moves. Are her parents better off without his advice? Teresa can’t shake the feeling that the stock market is more of a gamble than an investment. Is there any advantage to holding funds for the long-run if the market drops and you lose your gains? June is curious about the best college planning strategies for families who are working toward, or close to, financial independence. How can you help your children while securing your financial future? Big Sister’s little sister rents a mobile home in an area she loves. The owner wants to sell, but her little sister might not obtain financing. Should Big Sister buy the property and sell it to her via seller financing? Managing for Mom in Massachusetts has an investment strategy that he wants to run by us. Does it make sense to shift a 50/50 stocks and bonds portfolio to 100 percent stocks, and shift back to a 50/50 split after the market returns to pre-pandemic numbers? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer these questions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/283 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

With the uncertainty of the Affordable Care Act (ACA) looming before us, many are asking: How can we plan for healthcare - now and in the future? How much will I need to save to cover healthcare in retirement? What can I do if I can't afford the expensive premiums?  As a community of entrepreneurs and early retirees, this is a major concern. To help us understand the healthcare landscape, Tanja Hester, author of Work Optional and the blog Our Next Life, joins us. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#282: Alan Donegan is the cofounder of PopUp Business School. His mission is to change the way entrepreneurship is taught and to make it more accessible. If you’ve daydreamed of starting a side hustle, Alan’s simple advice and actions will give you the knowledge you need to get started now. You’ll know if your idea is viable within a month. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode282 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

After a brief hiatus, PSA Thursday is back! For this episode, we take a short break from covering current events to 1) reflect on why this show exists, and 2) give you a sneak peek of future PSA Thursday episodes. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#281: Annie Duke, best-selling author of Thinking In Bets and former world champion poker professional, discusses the decision making strategies and tools outlined in her new book, How to Decide. Learn how to make quicker decisions, overcome hindsight bias, make decisions with incomplete information, and improve your decision making skills. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode281 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#280: Amy and her husband have $900,000 saved for retirement. They’re 40 years old and plan to retire at 65. Due to a job change + pay cut, they might only have $10,000 per year to save for the next 25 years. Will this be enough, given their yearly expenses of $144,000? Janie wants to get a solar power system for her house, but isn’t sure how to pay for it. Should she borrow funds from her seven-month emergency fund, or use funds from a taxable brokerage account that were earmarked for retirement? CJ and his wife netted $200,000 from the sale of their home. They aren’t sure when they’ll purchase their next home – their timeline could be as short as three years or as long as six years. Where should they keep the $200,000 to use towards a downpayment on their next home? Brandon wants to retire in the next five to ten years. He contributes 20 percent to his Roth 401k. Since he can’t withdraw those contributions early, does it make more sense to contribute up to the match of his 401k and invest the rest in an IRA with the goal of doing a Roth conversion? Anonymous “am I missing out?” wants to know the deal with tax-loss harvesting. When is it worthwhile? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode280 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#279: You might know several decision-making principles, but do you have a step-by-step strategy that pieces those principles together? Dr. Gleb Tsipursky is an internationally-recognized thought leader on decision-making strategies. He shares two decision-making techniques for any aspect of your life in this episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode279 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#278: Does this sound like you? You want to exercise, but you can never find the time for a workout. Eventually, you grow tired of putting exercise off. You commit to working out every morning. You become so enthusiastic, you buy new gym clothes for the occasion. Your enthusiasm carries you for five days, and on day six, you’re swamped with work. You promise yourself you’ll exercise tomorrow - after all, taking a break for one day won’t hurt. And then … you never get back on the wagon. The cycle repeats. Most habits and routines start with good intentions. But good intentions aren’t enough to carry you through tough times. Good intentions aren’t enough to overcome the excuses you’ll make, either. That’s what today’s guest, Gretchen Rubin, is here to explore. Gretchen Rubin is the New York Times best-selling author of The Happiness Project, Better Than Before, and The Four Tendencies. She joins us on the podcast to discuss the loopholes that we use - the excuses that we make - when it comes to breaking bad habits and forming good habits. Why is this important? The more aware we are of loopholes, the better we can resist them. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode278 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#277: Michelle Singletary writes The Color of Money, for The Washington Post and is a winner of the prestigious Gerald Loeb Award. Her column is syndicated in more than 100 newspapers nationwide. She’s the author of three finance books and holds an MBA from Johns Hopkins University. But her strongest financial education came from her grandmother. Her grandmother raised five grandchildren while working full-time as a Nursing Assistant at a hospital. She earned $13,000 per year, but never took welfare, was never late on a bill, and “handled her money like a pro.” In this podcast episode, Michelle shares timeless financial lessons she learned from her grandmother, including: Save from every penny or dollar you receive Live below your means Hate debt like it’s the devil Save for the future Don’t buy more than you can afford Don’t care about what other people think about what you wear or drive Michelle’s grandmother taught her resourcefulness, humility and the value of a strong work ethic. Michelle joins us to chat about the financial independence retire early (FIRE) movement, emotional spending, how her experience growing up poor gives her a unique perspective in financial media, and the falsehood behind the phrase “it’s not what you earn, it’s what you save.” You’ll enjoy this episode if… You’re new to the world of personal finance or FIRE and want to learn more about the basics. (#lessonsfromgrandma) You can’t relate to some of the discussion around FIRE because it seems unachievable to you. You love down-to-earth guests who tell it like it is. For more, visit https://affordanything.com/episode277 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#276: Have you found yourself mindlessly scrolling through social media feeds over the last few months? Have you also found yourself in a state of sadness, anxiety, or aggravation afterwards? We live in an increasingly noisy world. A world in which many of us use social media, or the internet in general, to escape. But our escapes often leave us feeling empty and annoyed at ourselves for wasting several hours of precious time. Here’s one possible remedy for this tiring, relentless cycle: embrace the philosophy of digital minimalism. "Okay, I’m in. But...what’s digital minimalism?" Digital minimalism is a term coined by Dr. Cal Newport, today’s guest. It describes a three-step process: Cull the time you spend staring at a screen Spend more time on digital activities that align with your values Ignore everything else For more information, visit https://affordanything.com/episode276 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#275: Even the nerdiest of money nerds are susceptible to making a dumb financial mistake. “Nope, not me! There’s no way I make any financial mistakes. I live and breathe this stuff.” You’re not capable of making any financial mistakes? Even 'hidden' mistakes, like having the wrong life insurance policy, not having an estate plan, or listening to the wrong ‘experts'? Exactly. Jill Schlesinger, author of The Dumb Things Smart People Do With Their Money, sets the record straight on 13 things you shouldn't do with your hard-earned cash. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode275 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#274: What does it take to create a sustainable sense of hope? That’s the question that I invited Mark Manson, megabestselling author of Everything is F*cked and The Subtle Art of Not Giving a F*ck, to answer. Mark says that three basic factors contribute to a sense of hope: 1) autonomy, 2) purpose, and 3) community. Mark and I keep these three factors in mind as we discuss how to define success, find new challenges, and choose what’s meaningful in life. We touch on the importance of emotional regulation and avoiding crises of hope. And we talk about how they relate back to the financial independence retire early (FIRE) movement. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode274 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#273: Dr. Dan Ariely, famed behavioral economist and best-selling author of Predictably Irrational, returns to discuss how to handle the emotional and financial volatility of 2020. Specifically: Preparing for a job loss The value of resilience Handling emotional spending Cutting through the noise to find a signal. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode273 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Andy Hill, father of two and founder of Marriage, Kids, and Money, joins us to discuss parental burnout in the midst of the pandemic. He shares his best tips on creating a family schedule, learning to embrace the reality of working from home with interruptions, and maintaining sanity as kids venture back to school - all while being a good enough parent and partner. For more PSA Thursday episodes, go to https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#272: “Anonymous Moving-Back-home” and her partner earn $150,000 per year after taxes. They’re currently saving 80 percent by living with family. What should they do with their savings? Leigh and her husband are three years away from retirement. They have an extra $50,000 in income this year and plenty of options for where to invest this money. Which one is the best? Kelsey doesn’t feel comfortable investing in total stock market index funds and would rather invest in ESG funds. How can she tell if she has the necessary $2,000 invested in a company to submit a proposal to participate in a proxy voting? Also, Vanguard has a poor history of supporting shareholder resolutions. What can we do about this? Dylan and his wife rolled her 401k into a rollover IRA with pre-tax contributions. They’ve continued contributing to this IRA with post-tax contributions. Should they separate the accounts, or can they worry about this when they’re ready to retire? Anonymous wants to buy and househack one duplex every year to achieve financial independence and leave his office job within the next three to four years. Is his plan realistic? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode272 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Millions of people are in financial limbo now that the $600 supplemental federal unemployment benefit has expired. The new $300 supplemental benefit is slooowly getting approved by FEMA, state-by-state, through an excruciatingly snail-like process, and you might not have time to wait. This episode will help you take action. We cover how to think about the ways in which you can earn extra income and decide which path is best for you. For more information, check out our guide at https://affordanything.com/extraincome Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#271: Dr. Wade Pfau, one of the foremost experts in the academic field of retirement planning, joins us to talk about how the events of 2020 might impact your retirement plans. If you’re wondering if you need to change your investing strategy, Wade’s recommendations may fascinate you. Watch out! These are NOT the recommendations you’re expecting from a typical financial independence retire early show. Prepare to be caught off-guard by what he says. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode271 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#270: Briana and her husband want to buy a home, but they don’t have enough saved for a downpayment. They also have student loan debt and a car loan. Which should they prioritize? Javier is sick of being in debt. What can he do to put himself in a better situation? Tracie wants to buy her first rental property, but she has student loans and a car loan to pay off. If she receives $20,000 from a cash-out refi, how should she use this money? Vanitha wants to start a non-profit organization in memory of her uncle. She wants to know: what does this process look like? Margie went under contract on a primary residence listed as a six-bedroom property. She found out that, legally, it’s a four-bedroom home. Should she re-negotiate the price, or ask for credits at closing? I answer these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode270 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#269: Are you scared to take the first step toward the habits that you want to build? Do you believe in your ability to change? Or are you completely lost as to where to start? Charles Duhigg, the Pulitzer Prize-winning journalist, author of the best-selling books The Power of Habit and Smarter Faster Better, and host of the How To! podcast, joins us to tackle these questions. By asking “why” instead of “how,” layer-by-layer we can reveal the factors that truly hold us back from taking action. For more, go to https://affordanything.com/episode269 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Do you have school-age children? If so, then brace yourself for a school year like no other. This year, some children will return to school five days a week. Others will learn from home five days a week, and yet others will experience a hybrid of the two. You and your kids may face wildly different schedules and challenges than anything you've encountered before. How can you cope with this? Mandy Bert and Rob Phelan, who both work as teachers and are on the K-12 Education Team at the ChooseFI International Foundation, join us to share tips to help your children - and you! - survive the school year. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#268: Natasha has $3,300 per month to either invest or use toward an early mortgage payoff. Which option should she choose? An anonymous caller and military member wants to know if she should move money from a USAA brokerage to Vanguard to pay less in fees. Her goal is to retire in 12 years with $3,000/month in passive income from rental properties, which will supplement her military pension. Should she only contribute to her TSP up to the match, and invest the rest in rentals? Chaim and his wife live in the Middle East and have $30,000 in a U.S. bank account. However, they don’t plan to relocate. How can they best use this money? June and her husband are in a sticky situation: they bought their dream house in Michigan last winter, ahead of plans to relocate there. June lives there with their kids, but her husband is unable to find a job despite the numerous contacts he has in the state. He currently works in a job that he dislikes in Southern California, living apart from his family. They’re currently a one-income family, though June has plans to open a firm in Michigan. What should they do? Anonymous in Portland has three questions: is a 75/25 US stock/international stock split aggressive? Is an S&P 500 index a close enough equivalent to a total US stock index? Is Betterment worth it for automatic tax harvesting? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer these questions. Enjoy! For more, go to https://affordanything.com/episode268 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Welcome back to PSA Thursday, a mostly-weekly segment (sometimes on Thursdays) in which we talk about how to handle money, work, and life in the middle of a pandemic. This week, we continue the conversation on what landlords can do to create and maintain open lines of communication with tenants. Doing so can help you avoid a situation in which your tenants ghost you. If you find these tips helpful, head to https://affordanything.com/psalandlord to download word-for-word scripts you can use with your tenants. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#267: This week, one of the most acclaimed names in the world of personal finance journalism joins us to reflect on the events of 2020. Farnoosh Torabi started covering personal finance in 2003 as a reporter for Money Magazine. She later became a correspondent for Jim Cramer's The Street and the host of CNBC's primetime show Follow the Leader. She's the host of the award-winning So Money podcast and the author of several bestselling personal finance books, including When She Makes More: 10 Rules for Breadwinning Women. She's a contributing editor to NextAdvisor, a personal finance platform in partnership with TIME, as well as a financial columnist to O, The Oprah Magazine and a contributing editor for Bloomberg Business. She joins us to discuss how the events of 2020 have led to a great financial reckoning. You'll enjoy this if: - You want to hear candid discussion about race, privilege, and the wealth chasm - You're curious to hear about how the personal finance landscape has changed in the last two decades - You're wondering if, in fact, "this time it's different" For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode267 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#266: Paul’s parents own a property worth $100,000, and they owe $80,000 on the mortgage. If he wants to buy this property from them, how should he do it? Max is torn between investing in a rental property or taking advantage of a mega backdoor Roth 401k through his company. Which is the better option? Ali is a travel nurse and wants to get into real estate investing. Should she buy a duplex that needs fixing up or a cheaper apartment that’s rent-ready? Kate and her husband own a townhome that has appreciated substantially, but they need a bigger house. They’re wondering: is it wise to keep it, rent it out, and use a cash-out refinance as a downpayment on their next property? I answer these questions on today's episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode266 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Welcome back to PSA Thursday, a mostly-weekly segment in which we talk about how to handle money, work, and life in the middle of a pandemic. This week, our focus is on answering a question that many landlords in our community have asked in recent months: what do we do when our tenants can't pay the rent, and our bills are due?  To answer this, we asked Alieza Durana, a journalist who works with the Eviction Lab at Princeton University, for her expertise.  The Princeton Eviction Lab is a group that rigorously researches the causes and consequences of the affordable housing crisis, housing instability, and the impact of evictions. Alieza shares data gathered from The Eviction Lab and offers tips for landlords who want to be part of the solution, but struggle with the reality of having their own bills to pay.   For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#265: Are you the same person you were five years ago? Ten years ago? Fifteen years ago? Of course not. Things in your life have changed: your interests, hobbies, decision-making process, and habits are different than they were a decade ago. Likewise, our personality changes -- and this means we can decide who we want to become. Today’s guest, organizational psychologist Dr. Benjamin Hardy, literally wrote the book on personality impermanence. During this episode, he shares research on why our personalities aren’t as fixed as we think they are and the strategies we can use to change. Dr. Hardy is the bestselling author of Willpower Doesn’t Work and Personality Isn’t Permanent. He’s a contributor to Inc. and Psychology Today. From 2015-2018, he was the number one writer on Medium.com. If you want to rise to the level of your goals, rather than fall to the patterns of your past, this episode is for you. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode265 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Welcome back to PSA Thursday, a mostly-weekly segment in which we talk about how to handle money, work, and life in the middle of a pandemic. This week, we focus on life and staying safe when venturing outside of your home. Many of us are concerned with reducing the risk of coronavirus infection in places like grocery stores, gas stations, or backyard BBQs, but the guidelines on how to stay safe aren't always clear. In this episode, we discuss specific precautions to take... When using a public toilet When picking up food at a quick-serve restaurant When you're exercising at the gym When filling your car with gas In your general day-to-day life when you're out and about For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#264: An anonymous listener, whom we call “Mary,” is curious about the auto-rebalancing feature offered by M1 Finance. Is it too good to be true? J isn’t happy with the target date retirement fund she chose for her 401k. She has limited options and is wondering: should she move funds around? If so, is now a bad time, considering the market volatility? Another anonymous listener is wondering how to choose the right mix of investments for a retirement portfolio. She also wants tips on rebalancing a portfolio. And when should she execute a Roth conversion? Tami has $160,000 in a G fund in her TSP. Should she move this money to a Lifestyle fund to increase her earnings? Andy and his wife contribute the maximum to their children’s 529 accounts, and they have three investment options to choose from. Should they continue with an aggressive managed portfolio, or choose something less risky? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode264 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Here's the sordid history of the Payroll Protection Program, plus four additional options for getting pandemic relief as an entrepreneur. In this episode we share the following resources for small businesses: Economic Injury Disaster Loans (EIDL) Employee Retention Credit. SBA 7(a) Program Mainstream Lending Program   For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psa-thursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#263: It’s been a tough year, and we’re only halfway through it. Today’s guest has insights and actions to help you build financial resilience in 2020. Not only will you emerge from the events of this year stronger, you’ll also face future personal challenges and economic downturns with more confidence and knowledge. Our guest is Dr. Brad Klontz, a clinical psychologist and Certified Financial Planner. He’s the author of five books on the psychology of money, a founder of the Financial Psychology Institute, a managing principal of Your Mental Wealth Advisors, and a fellow of the American Psychological Association. He’s also a former associate professor of personal financial planning at Kansas State. Dr. Klontz appeared on our show in April 2018 to discuss unhealthy attitudes towards money. We invited him back for his expertise on coping with recent situations and developing financial resilience For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode263 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#262: Tyson is taking a year off of work and plans to devote some of his time to domestic travel, volunteer work, and bolstering his rental property portfolio. He originally planned to travel internationally, but won’t due to the pandemic. How does this plan sound? Jace is wondering whether she should take advantage of the low stock market prices or keep a larger emergency fund due to the pandemic. Which is the better option, given her goal of financial independence? Jace also wants to know: where do you park your money after maxing out a 401k and Roth IRA? Venkat had to relocate after living in a condo for one year. He rents out the condo, but he’s in the red. Should he sell this condo? If so, when? TW has $250,000 in cash that he can use to either pay off his rental property or purchase two more properties. Which is the better option? For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode262 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

For more information, go to https://affordanything.com/tag/psa-thursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#261: I quit my job at the beginning of a recession and made it work. Two years ago, I did an interview with Lessons From a Quitter explaining how. Given that so many community members want to leave their jobs for something better in the future, whether it's freelancing, self-employment, or early retirement, I'm re-airing the interview. I hope my story sheds light on what's possible in the most inopportune times. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode261 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Welcome back to PSA Thursday, a mostly-weekly segment in which we talk about how to handle money, work, and life in the middle of a pandemic. In this episode, we cover how to manage student loans in the midst of the pandemic with Travis Hornsby, a Chartered Financial Analyst and the founder and CEO of Student Loan Planner. He's an expert in the complex topic of student loans. Travis shares deep insights into the changes that have occurred, and how those changes might alter the way you think about and manage your student loans going forward. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#260: Katelyn wants to fire her financial advisor and move her investments from mutual funds into Vanguard index funds. Should she do this during the pandemic? Or should she wait? Marisa asks: can you invest in a Roth IRA if your income is inconsistent and might exceed the cap? Anonymous Moving-for-a-New-Job had a Simple IRA at her old job that she can no longer contribute to. She also can’t contribute to a 401k until she’s been at her new job for a year. Where should she put her money in the meantime? Anonymous “Olivia” is interested in a Roth conversion ladder, but wants to know: does the pro-rata rule apply here as it does with a backdoor Roth conversion? Mary received an $80,000 grant of RSUs from her employer when she started. These RSUs began to vest after one year, and the price per share has increased 44 percent. What should she do with the shares? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode260 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#259: Leadership comes in all forms. Whether you’re a small business owner, a manager or department head at work, or the head of a volunteer organization, having a crystal clear vision is critical to success. Without a clear vision, you’re likely to stumble along a path that leads to nowhere -- or worse, a dead end. Wouldn’t it be better to have an idea of where you’re going? Michael Hyatt, a prolific bestselling author on the topics of business and leadership, shares the pitfalls of not having a vision and 10 ways to nail down a solid vision that will lead you to the path you want to be on. Check out bonus resources: http://visiondrivenleader.com/afford Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

We have muted the podcast thusfar this week, in support of the #amplifymelanatedvoices movement and in support of the #theshowmustbepaused movement. We have assembled a list of resources that highlight books, websites, podcasts, nonprofit organizations and GoFundMe campaigns that I would like to direct your attention to in lieu of our normal programming. These resources can be found at https://affordanything.com/psathursday We are also matching $3,000 in donations to the Committee to Protect Journalists, the Atlanta Community Food Bank, and the Children's Development Association. Please DM me on Instagram with a screenshot of your donation and I'll match it. Instagram: paulapant Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Let's start with the good news: the majority of U.S. households, 6 in 10, donate money to nonprofits and charities, and 1 in 4 adults in the U.S. volunteer their time and talent. The only way our society is going to get through the struggles and the stresses that we face is if we are good to each other. Compassion and common humanity are crucial. In this PSA episode we discuss strategies around giving, including how to donate money and volunteer time effectively, as well as how to embrace the opportunity to practice informal, random, spontaneous acts of kindness. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#258: “Burned Out in Boston” wants to reach financial independence. But she’s not sure she can stick it out in Boston much longer. She and her husband want to move to an area that doesn’t have many job prospects, and they want to make this leap soon, ideally before they reach FI. How do they know when it’s the right time to jump ship to their dream location? We tackle this topic, plus four other questions about stock market and real estate investing strategy, on today's Ask Paula episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode258 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#257: “The checking account is like the trash can of personal finance.”   Today’s podcast guest, the famed behavioral economist Dr. Dan Ariely, is not a fan of checking accounts. Or supermarket end caps. Or anything that distracts us from our financial goals.   In this episode, he explains why.   Dan Ariely is one of the world’s most renowned behavioral economists. He’s the James B. Duke Professor of psychology and behavioral economics at Duke University.   His TED Talks have been viewed more than 15 million times. In 2018, he was named one of the 50 most influential living psychologists in the world.   He’s the New York Times bestselling author of many books, including Predictably Irrational, a book that challenges our assumptions about our ability to make rational decisions. He also wrote Dollars and Sense, a book about our cognitive biases, and The Honest Truth About Dishonesty, a book about how we lie to everyone, including ourselves.   For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode257 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

How can you find business and investment opportunities in today’s tough pandemic bear market? What should you do to emerge from 2020 stronger than you started? We cover 7 specific, immediate actions that can set you up to succeed in this recession. Here's a peek: think about hiring a team, create an original piece of work, take online classes, and keep your plans intact (even if that means quitting an unfulfilling job).   For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/psathursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#256: Jon is wondering if now is a good time to move his RRSP into a tax-free savings account, given the market downturn. He knows you can’t time the market, but the opportunity is tempting. What should he do? Laurel’s question revolves around the CARE Act and early withdrawal from a 401k. She needs to rebalance her 401k and wants to buy a rental. Instead of selling stocks, should she sell bonds as a form of rebalancing and to withdraw for a rental property? After seeing so many businesses experience financial hardship, Rebecca and her husband are curious: why don’t companies have emergency funds? Salome sees the stock market downturn as an opportunity for tax-loss harvesting, but does this hold if you’ve held stocks for less than a year? Sheena has the option to purchase company stock at a 15 percent discount through an Employer Stock Purchasing Plan. However, it’s volatile right now. Should she contribute the maximum amount, or nothing? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer these questions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode256 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Before the pandemic, the U.S. housing market was strong. Home prices were at historic highs. Borrowers were more qualified than ever, with two-thirds of mortgage originations going to borrowers with excellent credit. As of January 2020, delinquencies (borrowers more than 30 days late on a payment) reached a 20-year low. How has the pandemic affected the market? Are we due for another spate of foreclosures? What's going to happen to housing supply? What about demand? Are buyers still buying? Are sellers still selling? And if you're thinking about buying a home -- either as an owner-occupant or as a rental property investor -- what do you need to know about the new pandemic landscape? We dig into depth in this short, researched-packed PSA Thursday episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/PSAThursday Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#255: When a crisis hits, do you stay calm and collected, or do you launch yourself down a rabbit hole of worry and worst-case scenarios? When the stock market spirals downward, do you shrug and stay the course, or do warning bells explode in your brain? When news of the pandemic hit, was your first instinct to form a calm and reasoned action plan, or rush to the store to buy months of supplies? Your personality influences your reactions to these scenarios. Today’s guest, Dr. Sarah Stanley Fallaw, has a Ph.D. in applied psychology and is the founder of DataPoints, a research firm based on the science of building wealth. What links between personality and money management has research uncovered? We discuss this topic in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode255 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#254: Lydia earns income as both a 1099 contract worker and a part-time W2 employee. She filed for unemployment as a W2 worker, but can’t find information on how to file as a contractor. Is there a process contractors can follow to file for unemployment? Florina and her husband have $70,000 in cash to invest. Where should they put this money in light of the current market? Ali and his wife saved eight months of living expenses in their emergency fund in case they get laid off during the pandemic. Is this too excessive? Danielle wants to take advantage of pandemic stock prices - what should she invest in? Anonymous in Real Estate wants to buy a multifamily property with the equity in their first rental as a downpayment. Their husband doesn’t want three mortgages. Should they accelerate mortgage pay-down and be one mortgage down in four years? I answer these five questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode254 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Welcome back to PSA Thursday, a segment in which we talk about how to handle money, work, and life in the middle of a pandemic. Today, our focus is on money - specifically, the stock market. Why did it crash in March? What effect did that have on us as a society? Why has it rebounded in the middle of a shutdown, and what does that mean? Are valuations too high relative to earnings? How can we handle our investments and retirement savings at a time when the movements of the market seem irrational and unpredictable? We explore these questions in today's episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#253: Dr. Steve Wendel is a behavioral economist and the head of behavioral science at Morningstar, an independent investment research firm. Samantha Lamas is also a behavioral researcher at Morningstar. They discuss the hidden biases in our decision making and how these hidden biases affect us - particularly during this pandemic and during times of high anxiety and stress. They also discuss techniques that will help us avoid deceiving ourselves. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode253 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#252: The government issued a $2 trillion stimulus. How will that affect the economy? Could we endure massive inflation or hyperinflation? Bradley kicks off today’s Ask Paula episode with this timely question. What inflation rate will we see in 2020, and how can we prepare? How should we hedge against hyperinflation? Anonymous Retiree (whom we call Sequencing Sally) is 64 and retired last year. She lives off of monthly withdrawals from a Vanguard portfolio. Given the bear market, should she leave her portfolio alone and spend from an emergency fund? Additionally, her target allocation is off-kilter. Should she rebalance now or later? Jay wants to reach financial independence in five years, but she’s in a job that will pay her $270,000 student loan balance if she stays there for another 17 years. Should she stay, or quit and face the balance? Jan has $500,000 in a managed fund with a three percent annual fee. He wants to move his funds into his Vanguard personal brokerage account, without incurring a ton of taxes from the sales of his holdings. How can he accomplish this? My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode252 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Download the 31 Tips to Stay Productive as you Work From Home at https://affordanything.com/productive Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#251: Do you love the idea of making money on your own -- without a boss? Can you imagine deciding how you spend each day? Are you bored and looking for a challenge? Do you love the thought of adventure? Today’s guest, Chris Guillebeau, knows all about hustling, living an unconventional life, working towards seemingly impossible goals, and combining his interests into an epic lifestyle business that brings him freedom and joy. Chris is the New York Times bestselling author of The Art of Non-Conformity, The $100 Startup, and The Pursuit of Happiness. He has traveled to 193 countries, served four years as a volunteer on a hospital ship in West Africa, and is a successful speaker, writer, and entrepreneur. Oh yeah, and he’s a high school dropout. (A super accomplished high school dropout.) How did Chris accomplish so much without a high school degree? How did he forge a path toward his goals despite depression and anxiety? What advice does he have for aspiring side hustlers and entrepreneurs? Find out in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode251 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

A weekly segment in which we talk about how to handle money, work, and life in the middle of a pandemic. Here's how to build an emergency fund during an emergency, and how the bear market affects your investment strategy. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#250: Should we invest in sustainable funds? If we choose sustainable funds, will our investment returns suffer? Will our expense ratios be sky-high? What drawbacks might we face? How do we know that these funds are actually ethical? And what choices are out there for people who want to invest ethically or sustainably? We invited Dr. Jon Hale to our show today to answer these questions. Dr. Jon Hale is a chartered financial analyst and the global head of sustainability research for Morningstar. He directs Morningstar’s research on sustainable investing, which launched with the Morningstar Sustainability Rating for Funds in 2016. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode250 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#249: I’m recovering from Covid-19 at the moment, so I couldn't put together a new episode this week. But in honor of the First Friday of the month, I wanted to re-air this interview with Cameron Huddleston, which we originally aired in August 2019. In this interview, we discuss how to have those important but awkward conversations with your parents and grandparents about estate planning, wills, trusts, power of attorney, and more. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Paula describes the experience of having Covid-19, the illness caused by coronavirus. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#248: We are living in a time of extreme uncertainty. Many of us are questioning how we can best use the funds we have to survive it. “Should I sell the funds I have invested in the market, or keep contributing?” “Should I continue with my plans to invest in real estate?” “Should I hoard all of my cash in case this gets worse?!” My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me on today’s show to shed light on the answers and how to handle the stock market collapse.   Here are the key points we discuss in this episode: Don’t panic sell and convert paper losses into real losses. Stay the course. If this is your first bear market, welcome to being a real investor! This is how you grow in the long-term. Dollar-cost averaging is your best friend. How this upcoming recession might be different. The silver lining? The economy was doing well going into this. But the speed at which our markets recover depends on the speed and dedication with which we flatten the curve. The financial principles you can use that will guide you to security in these rough times. P.S. – Unless you’ve been tested, default to the assumption that you’re infected and act accordingly. For more information, visit https://affordanything.com/episode248 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

It's Quarantine Day 10, and thank goodness I've been staying in, because yesterday I learned that I have a 102.3 degree fever. I don't know if it's Covid-19 or if it's a fever with extraordinarily bad timing. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

A new segment giving tips to help flatten the curve and manage your money during this global event. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#247: Caroline wants to buy her first home in Denver, CO. How can she calculate how much mortgage she can comfortably afford? Anne plans to retire later this year on rental income (woohoo!). She’s saved up a hefty emergency fund for her properties, and she wants to know 1) if she should invest a portion of this in index funds, and 2) whether she should rebalance her portfolio to account for this huge cash allocation. Anonymous Nurse has over $100,000 in debt, not including their mortgage. They want to invest in rental properties, but with so much debt, they're thinking of selling their home or renting it out. Which option is best given their interest in real estate? Joy wants to know if she should put $50,000 towards her primary residence mortgage, or use it as a downpayment on her first rental property. What are the pros and cons of each option? Anonymous owns a cash-flow positive condo...on leased land. The land will revert back to the owners in 32 years. When is the best time to sell this property? I answer these five questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode247 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#246: At 19 years old, after completing her first year of college, Jillian married her husband.  During their first year of marriage, they lived in a camper and earned a combined salary of $12,000. One year later, Jillian's husband graduated college and joined the military. They relocated to Washington D.C., where they earned a combined $60,000 per year. They saved half of their income and used that savings to chip away at $55,000 of debt. At 22 years old, Jillian and her husband adopted a son. Not long after that, they had a biological newborn. At 24 years old, they accumulated their first $100,000. Jillian and her husband remained committed to saving half of their income. This allowed them to buy a house in cash, invest in two rental properties, and invest in index funds. At 32 years old, Jillian and her husband achieved financial independence. All on a modest five-figure income.  How did Jillian and her husband live on $12,000 per year? How did they save $100,000 after three years on a $60,000 per year salary? What sacrifices did they make? And how did they transition from saving to spending? Find out in this raw, emotional interview. ____________ You'll enjoy this episode if: You earn less than six-figures and question your ability to reach financial independence Guilt prevents you from spending the money you’ve saved (“I can’t spend on X if I want to achieve FIRE!”) You want a relatable, realistic take on the journey to financial independence For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode246  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#245: Joe has a 24-year-old friend who won a $1 million settlement. How can she use this money to set herself up for financial independence? Jay is 52 years old and wants to retire at 59.5. He began investing in individual stocks to achieve this goal, and has had excellent returns so far. Is this a sound plan for early retirement? Or should he work until age 62 for Social Security? Steve is 54 years old. He plans to retire at 60, which is when he can collect 67 percent of his pension. A Vanguard advisor suggested that he direct some of his 403b contributions as Roth contributions, rather than pre-tax contributions. Should he act on this suggestion? Anonymous in New York City wants to invest their HSA contributions this year, but the expense ratios seem high. Can they move their HSA to a different provider? What fees are normal for HSAs? Brit has a similar question. She wants to know: is it possible to invest in the S&P 500 Fossil Fuel Free Index through Vanguard? My friend and former financial advisor, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me on the show to answer these six questions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode245 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#244: Grant Baldwin felt burned out. He worked as a youth pastor, which felt like a 24/7 profession. He had to attend student events held late into the night, which left him exhausted. One night, he came home to find his wife crying. She told him that she felt like she had a roommate, rather than a husband, because he was gone so often. So Grant did something drastic: he quit his job, with negligible savings, when his wife was four to five months pregnant. For the following year, he waited tables and worked odd jobs, cobbling together gig-economy money while raising a newborn. During his rare unscheduled moments, he started crafting a new career for himself as a self-employed public speaker. Today, Grant Baldwin is a speaker, entrepreneur, coach, and author of The Successful Speaker. He’s earned multiple seven-figures in speaking fees and has helped over 2,000 people become professional speakers. He shares how he made his dream a reality in this episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode244 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#243: Adam is 23 years old and wants to achieve financial independence as quickly as possible. However, he’s nervous about investing in the stock market and real estate. How can he overcome his fears? Paris, age 35, has a similar question. She earns $150,000 per year, is debt-free, and doesn’t own a home. How can she reach financial independence in less than 10 years? Paul wants to househack his first home, but none of the properties he's seen meet the one percent rule. He doesn’t want to rent forever. Does he need to compromise on his commute time, or wait until he finds an undervalued gem? Anonymous Househacker rents an apartment with three bedrooms, two of which he rents out on an inconsistent, short-term basis. They want to know: does the money they earn count as rental income if they aren’t making a profit on it? Ben is a real estate investor who’s curious about growing his portfolio from four units to 20 units. What’s the best approach to take? I answer these five listener questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode243 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#242: Ash Ambirge grew up in a trailer park in Pennsylvania. She never met her father. Her disabled mother, who raised her on government assistance, passed away when she was 20. Her childhood goal? To join the middle class. She dreamed of becoming one of those people who eats lemon pepper chicken. What’s more middle-class than that?  She attended college on a full scholarship. When she graduated and accepted her first cushy office job, earning $30,000 per year, she blew her paychecks. She bought a brand-new car, rented a luxury apartment and financed a $5,000 mattress. Yet despite her material luxury, she felt that some important element was lacking. In her quest to find meaningful and creative work, she launched The Middle Finger Project, a company that teaches skills like entrepreneurship, battling perfectionism, and trusting your most dangerous ideas.  She joins us on today’s podcast episode to share her incredible story about struggling to join the middle class, shrugging off a conventional career, and trusting her most dangerous ideas. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/242 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#241: Anton wants to accelerate his flight training so he can get hired within two to three months, rather than two to three years. He has to raid his retirement savings to achieve this. Should he? Linda and her husband have their eyes on early retirement, but they aren’t sure what their post-retirement lifestyle will cost. How can they budget for unknown expenses that include travel? Joseph contributes 15 percent of his income to both a Roth 457b and Roth IRA. He wants to retire before age 59.5. Given his early retirement goal, should he focus solely on his Roth 457b? Henry wants to know how rebalancing and dollar cost averaging interact with each other. Should he rebalance his all-equities portfolio? If so, what approach should he take? Joe maxes out his 401k and IRA each year. He can make after-tax 401k contributions, or fund his Vanguard taxable brokerage account. Which should he prioritize? As usual, my friend and former financial advisor, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me on the show to answer these five listener questions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode241 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#240: Are you investing, speculating, or gambling? What are the three drivers of asset performance? Are you aware of who’s getting a cut from your investments? Do you even know who’s on the other side of the trade? David Stein is the author of Money for the Rest of Us, a book that answers these questions. He’s the former Chief Investment Strategist & Chief Portfolio Strategist at Fund Evaluation Group, a $70 billion investment firm. If you’re thinking of adding a new investment to your portfolio, David’s investment philosophy and framework can help you avoid expensive mistakes. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode240 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#239: Lo is in a good spot with her career, but she’s struggling with a ton of student loan debt, and consequently, credit card debt. What should she do to manage it? Anonymous wants to know how to set up a backdoor Roth IRA. Eric and his wife own a property in Savannah, GA that brings in more money as an Airbnb than a traditional rental. They want to invest in more properties and are wondering if this model is the best path to take. James wants to own a vacation rental in the Vermont mountains that he can use when it’s vacant. What features or qualities would make a profitable vacation rental? What red flags should be on his radar? Ayesha is looking at buying a rental property that has a partial HUD claim on it. What kind of complications should she anticipate? Or should she let this property go completely? Shelbi and her husband own a rental property that they purchased for $178,000 that’s now valued at $300,000. They’re looking at a multitude of options - sell it, move into it, or keep it. What’s best given their FIRE goal? For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/239 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#238: “If I had more willpower, I’d achieve my financial goals.” “I’m doomed to fail with money.” “I’m horrible for not keeping to a budget.” These are common thoughts, but they’re erroneous. You can’t willpower your way through money management, you’re not doomed to fail, and you’re not horrible for blowing your budget. You’re human, and humans make emotional decisions. Those emotional decisions don’t have to mean a financial death sentence, though. Jeff Kreisler, co-author of Dollars and Sense and Editor-in-Chief of PeopleScience.com, tells us how we can avoid common money mistakes and rewrite our financial future. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/238 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#237: Katie wants to know how to purchase a business that’s already cash-flow positive. What indicators can she look for? Rob will retire from the military with an inflation-adjusted pension. Does he need a bond allocation in his investment portfolio? Brian conquered a large sum of credit card debt, but still has student loan debt and a mortgage. Should he pay off his student loans, refinance them, or refinance his mortgage? Jeff is curious about the pros and cons of investment apps. When should you use them? Another Kati (without an e!) wants to live a healthy and wealthy life before she’s 70. Where should she allocate her savings so she can retire early? We answer these five questions in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode237 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#236: Kristy Shen and Bryce Leung achieved financial independence four years ago at age 31 and 32. They saved $1 million and live on $40,000 per year while traveling the world. Kristy and Bryce don’t worry about running out of money, they created new identities after quitting their jobs, and their community has quadrupled in size. Here’s how they achieved this lifestyle. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode236 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#235: Anna has made the leap to self-employment … but what’s next? She lives in the Bay Area and she’s trying to choose between five business ideas; she needs to make enough money to stay in her high-cost area. Doug recently won $9,000 from an online poker side gig and is wondering how best to use the funds: pay off high-interest student loan debt, or keep it to increase his poker earning potential? Alex and his partner want to househack a single-family property with a mother-in-law suit. What should they consider as far as zoning goes? Darrell is on track to retire in two years at age 55 and wants to know what he should do with his primary residence. Should he rent it out? Or should he sell it and use the profit to invest in rental properties? Or use the profit to buy his retirement home? Mara is curious about 1031 exchanges. She has equity in a rental property that she’d like to harvest, but she wants more information before making the move. Michael and his wife are struggling with competing goals. They want to invest in real estate, but they also want to move into an apartment closer to work to reduce their long commutes. Should they sell their home and invest the equity into a rental property, or should they take a HELOC on their home instead? For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode235 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#234: We review 26 quick, easy actions that improve your financial life, plus 10 new added bonus ideas that came directly from our community. We issue a challenge for you to tackle one action per week for the first 26 weeks (six months) of the year, so you’ll build stronger financial health by summertime. Download the free book that accompanies this episode at http://affordanything.com/2020kickoff and join us in the 2020 One Tweak a Week challenge! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#233: Deepak is considering downsizing his family’s home, but wants to know if the savings are worth the transaction costs he’ll have to pay. Anonymous and her husband hold $900,000 worth of privately-owned company stock. How should they plan for handling this money? Shelby is 25 years old and works for a company that awarded her restricted stock units. What should she do with these? Additionally, she traded in a 2013 Prius for a 2018 Subaru, for which she now owes $19,000. Should she sell it for a used vehicle or stick it out? Katelyn is interested in learning more about annuities. What should she know in order to make an informed decision? Max FI and his wife want to retire in 12 years. How should they invest to achieve this? Anonymous’s former employer offered a Roth and Traditional 401k, and his new employer only offers a Traditional option. How should he rollover his former Roth 401k? For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode233 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#232: Anthony ONeal is the bestselling author of Debt-Free Degree, a book that teaches parents how to help their children graduate from college without student loans. He’s part of the Dave Ramsey Solutions team, which teaches people how to pay off and avoid debt, and he's the co-author of Graduate Survival Guide, along with Rachel Cruze. Anthony joins us on this episode to share tips and hacks to help you save on tuition and find money for college. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode232 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#231: Avie needs to decide between two options: paying off a rental property, or funding a retirement account. Which should she choose? Lisa wants to know: when should you fund an HSA account? Sofia’s parents have lived with her for the past few years, but Sofia’s job is relocating her out-of-state. How can she transition her home to a rental for her parents? Jim is a saver and his wife is a spender. How can he interest her in frugality? Candice wants to know my thoughts about online real estate investment crowdfunding platforms. Good idea or bad idea? Kristen has a mortgage on her primary residence and a rental property. They have similar interest rates. Which should she pay off first? I tackle these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/epidode231  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#230: Dr. Susan David, a psychologist on the faculty at Harvard Medical School, joins us to talk about emotional agility. Dr. David has researched emotional agility for around 20 years. A few years ago, she summarized her work on this concept for the Harvard Business Review. Her article became one of the most popular articles of the year, and the publishers heralded it as the Management Idea of the Year. Dr. David gave a TED talk on emotional agility, which went viral, gaining more than a million views. She then published a book called Emotional Agility which became a #1 Wall Street Journal Best Seller. The concept of emotional agility won the Thinkers50 Breakthrough Idea Award. She’s provided consulting around this concept with clients that include the United Nations, the World Economic Forum, the NASDAQ, Google, and Microsoft. She joins us today to explain how to define emotional agility, how to develop it in your life, and how it applies to any goal that you want to pursue - whether that’s financial independence, early retirement, career advancement, or greater success in your health and your relationships. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode230 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#229: Normally, we’re a once-a-week podcast, with episodes airing every Monday. But on the first Friday of every month, we have a First Friday bonus episode! Helen discovered that her mother fraudulently opened credit card accounts in her name. Eek! How can she protect herself? What will happen to these accounts once her mother passes away? Amelia and her husband cannot fire their financial advisor. How can they minimize the damage and maximize the benefit they receive from him in the meantime? Anonymous asks if she should live off an inheritance and max out her 401k contributions during her first year of working full-time. She wants to reduce her taxable income. Is this a good idea? A different anonymous caller read a USA Today article claiming that “index funds are in a bubble.” How true is this? How can index funds be in a bubble? Shawn is self-employed. He invests in a Solo 401k that features both a Roth and Traditional component. How should he manage this account? Another anonymous listener is thinking about downshifting to part-time work. He holds around $278,000 in home equity. How can he capitalize on this? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode229 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#228: In November 2005, when Noah Kagan was 24, he was hired as Employee #30 at Facebook. His stock options would have been worth $170 million if he’d cashed out in 2014, he says. But he didn’t see a dime. In June 2006, merely 9 months after he started working at Facebook, Noah got fired. Instead of making $170 million, he made zero. He fell into a deep depression for a year. Then he rescued himself by becoming a serial entrepreneur. He tried his hand at a lot of things -- including developing Facebook games, selling discount cards, creating a payment processor in the gaming space -- but he’s best known for his two most successful companies. In 2010 he started a company, AppSumo, which offers discounts on small business software. By 2012, AppSumo was grossing $4 million per year in revenue, with annual net profits of $500,000. Yet Noah wasn’t fulfilled. He pivoted. In 2015 he started a sister company, Sumo.com, which develops marketing tools for websites and online businesses. In today’s episode, Noah and I discuss reflections on business, money and life. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode228 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#227: Lien is taking a year off of work to live the van life with her husband. She wants to know how she can make the most of this sabbatical to figure out how to turn her less-than-inspiring career into a lifestyle that she loves. Lien called in again to say that she wants to start a new business and a family when she returns from her gap year. Her former job offered excellent health benefits and maternity leave, but she doesn’t really want to go back. What should she do? Eddie wants to build his real estate portfolio. How should he approach downpayments - put down more to net more profit, or put down less to acquire more properties? Wilson is wondering if it’s a good idea to partner with a friend on real estate ventures. What are the downsides? Wilson also wants to know about real estate business expenses, and the pros and cons of short-term rentals vs. long-term rentals. Sean has an inconsistent employment history and is struggling to find a lender that will give him a mortgage. He wants to know if there are any other ways he can get a mortgage for a 4-plex? An anonymous listener is thinking about taking the leap into real estate investing and wants to know how to overcome the fear they have about it. Also, should they put all of their savings towards real estate? Anonymous is also wondering: how do you calculate net worth when you’re married? For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode227 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#226: Feeling time-crunched? Today’s episode is for you. Today’s episode features productivity expert John Zeratsky, who shares specific, action-packed time management strategies, with a focus on email management. If the term inbox zero sounds laughable, these strategies are up your alley. John’s interest in productivity began one winter morning in 2008, when he realized that the past few months had been an eerie blur. He realized that time was slipping away. He knew he needed to figure out a better way to manage his time - and his life. He started deep-diving into time management strategies and eventually co-authored a book, Make Time. If you want to learn how to redesign your daily schedule, you’ll enjoy this episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode226 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#225: Lauren is 26 and earns $48,000 per year after taxes. She saves $12,000 annually in retirement accounts, and an additional $18,000 per year for a downpayment on a home. She wants to buy a home in the next five years. Where should she keep her savings in the meantime? Sawyer has a five-year financial independence plan. She owns two high-end condos in a NYC suburb. She lives in one unit and rents the other, but she’s bothered by the fact that she’s forgoing collecting rent on her home unit. Should she move? Katie’s husband is going to grad school and they want to pull money out of a Vanguard account to fund his tuition. Should they do this? Cassie is in the process of finalizing a divorce. She and her daughter will receive between $80,000 - $116,000. Should they use the funds to buy a home with a 20 percent down payment or pay off their $30,000 debt? Andy is curious: should you re-adjust the 4 percent withdrawal rule if your investment portfolio grows? Joe wants to become self-employed but is concerned about health insurance. What are some affordable options? Laura is ready to retire. She’s also engaged, and her fiance wants to keep working. Should they file taxes jointly or separately? Doug is interested in learning more about equity sharing programs. Are these safe investments? Tania wants to know: can you open and fund a Roth IRA if your only source of income is alimony? Brian took out a 401k loan to buy a car. He regrets his decision. Should he take out a personal loan to pay back the 401k loan? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode225 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#224: Scott Young, author of Wall Street Journal best-selling book Ultralearning, talks about the 9 principles of Ultralearning, which can help you learn new skills, reinvent yourself, stay relevant, and adapt to whatever life throws at you. If you think you know the best way to learn something, think again. This book will challenge your assumptions. Whether you want to develop hard skills to become more valuable at your job, soft skills for your journey to self-improvement, or you want to honor your love for learning, these 9 principles will help you become more effective at developing new skills. If you enjoyed my interviews with James Clear or Cal Newport, you’ll enjoy this one. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode224  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#223: Elizabeth is curious to know: what does a good net worth breakdown look like? Is it appropriate to have a lot of your net worth tied up in real estate? Marie wants to start her own business, but she’s living paycheck-to-paycheck. Is incurring debt her only option to make this dream a reality? Bria wants to take a second mini-retirement and has a good chunk of money saved up. She wants to come back to the workforce with a cash cushion. What should she do with her money while traveling? Connor is facing a dilemma. Is he correct in not prioritizing 401k contributions given that his employer doesn’t offer a match, combined with his goal for financial independence? Is his strategy of using his savings for real estate investing better? Caroline is wondering: should she aggressively pay off her home and her rental properties, or use her excess savings to fund a brokerage account? Anonymous is relocating from Southern California to Florida. She wants to know if she should rent an apartment and buy a rental property, or buy a primary residence with the $150,000 she has saved. Today’s episode is full of exploring and weighing tradeoffs. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode223 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#222: Michael Robinson and his wife, Ellen, achieved financial independence at age 33. They ‘retired’ (they still enjoy working) three years later at age 36 on two five-figure incomes. Today, Michael and Ellen are raising their two children to be bilingual by slow traveling throughout Latin America. Michael and Ellen blog about their FIRE adventures at uncommondream.com. They believe that “the Uncommon Dream is the dream pursued – the dream met with planning, action, and sacrifice. With just a dream and those three tools, you can accomplish almost anything.” Today, Michael joins us on the show to talk about the seven ways that he and Ellen escaped the rat race and achieved FI at 33. If you enjoy hearing stories and case studies from people in this community who have reached FI, then you’ll love this interview. For the full show notes, go here: https://affordanything.com/episode222 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#221: Vanessa is curious about Fidelity and Vanguard. She asks: what are your thoughts on the no-fee Fidelity index funds? What are your opinions on Vanguard’s financial advisors? Andy wants to know: should my wife and I continue maxing out our traditional 401k and backdoor Roth IRA, or should we start contributing to the Roth 401k my employer offers? Kyle is wondering - how can he minimize his taxes when he earns $450,000/year? Rob is self-employed and has been maxing out a Roth IRA, but recently discovered that he can open a self-employed IRA. Should he move his Roth IRA money over, or just open a new account and fund it from scratch? Christina is torn. Her and her husband have been saving to buy a house, but because they live in New York, their savings won’t go very far. Is it a good idea for them to continue renting, despite their dreams? Mercedes is wondering how REITs compare to stocks and owning actual real estate. Additionally, she’d like to know more about Forex trading. Craig has an employee stock purchase plan (ESPP). Since these tend to be risky, he’s wondering: is he better off moving the $25,000 that he puts towards the ESPP into mutual funds? Or is an ESPP a good way to diversify his funds? Myself and former financial planner, Joe Saul-Sehy, answer these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode221 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#220: In a hectic world, stillness is the key to a calm, enjoyable life. That idea comes from Ryan Holiday, author of Stillness is The Key. Stillness is finding flow, staying present, and being impervious to the pressures of the outside world. It doesn’t mean removing yourself from society and sitting in a forest; to the contrary, many CEOs and world leaders have practiced remarkable stillness during times of crisis. Bestselling author Ryan Holiday discusses actionable tips on how to practice the art of stillness, as well as its applications to the pursuit of financial independence or any massive goal. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode220 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#219: Stella is working toward FIRE and wants to know: how can she create passive income in her retirement years? Is a portfolio with stocks and bonds enough, or should she invest in real estate? Travis and his wife are also on the FIRE path, and are comparing their investment options. Travis is concerned about the inefficiency of reinvesting returns in real estate. How can you factor this into your decision when buying a property? Stephanie and her husband are also interested in FIRE (hooray!) and they have $20,000 to invest. How can they best use this money to help them FIRE sooner? Cade, a 24-year-old listener, wants to FIRE by age 30 (we’re on a roll!). He’s saving $4,000/month and wants to know how to invest these savings. Anonymous and their partner are taking a mini-retirement and have questions surrounding the logistics of healthcare. What options should they consider? On a different note, Amanda works in academia. After listening to Episode 12, she’s looking for tips on managing long-term, complex collaborative projects now that she’s in a leadership position. Steve’s question brings us to the topic of building an online business and social media following. Should he have one brand for all of his interests, or divide these interests into separate channels? I tackle these questions in today’s episode of the show. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode219 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#218: Kristen Berman is co-founder of Irrational Labs, a behavioral product design company, along with Dan Ariely. She has a fascinating job that involves looking into why people behave the way they do with their money, and discovering the easiest solution to help them create more positive financial behavior. In short, she’s a proponent of redesigning the current financial system to make saving automatic and easy, and that’s part of what we discuss in this episode. If creating better financial habits has been a challenge for you, or if you have trouble framing spending as a positive thing, rather than a loss, then Kristen has awesome advice for you. Here are some key takeaways from the interview: 1. Habits are overrated - one-time decisions are more effective. 2. Simplify decision-making by giving yourself a rule-of-thumb to follow. 3. Pre-commit to your financial goals. 4. Measure process versus outcome. 5. Use accountability partners to reach your goals. 6. The Three Bs - Behavior, Barriers, and Benefits. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode218 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#217: It’s September! If you’ve been listening to the show for the past few months, then you know that I’m on what I’ve dubbed my September Sabbatical, in which I’m taking a break from podcast production and traveling the globe. In light of that, we’re digging through the archives and airing some of my favorite interviews on the show, in between airing interviews I’ve done on other podcasts. Earlier this year, Cody and Justin from The FI Show interviewed me and asked some excellent questions about my journey to financial independence, entrepreneurship and passion, and minding the gap between your income and expenses. We talk about the importance of side hustling and how to create a well-paying job from your skills. We touch on real estate and why I chose this strategy to reach FI. We also discuss the bone I have to pick with the financial independence movement. Finally, we chat about what financial independence is really about, because it’s not about sipping margaritas on a beach. It’s about having the freedom to use your time in whatever way you want. I hope you enjoy it as much as I did! Thank you to Cody and Justin for giving us permission to air this interview. P.S. - Starting with the next episode, we’ll return to our usual routine of brand new interviews and Ask Paula episodes. :) For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode217 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#216: It’s September! If you’ve been listening to the show for the past few months, then you know that I’m on what I’ve dubbed my September Sabbatical, in which I’m taking a break from podcast production and traveling the globe. In light of that, we’re digging through the archives and airing some of my favorite interviews on the show, in between airing interviews I’ve done on other podcasts.  Welcome to another episode from our archives! This one was recorded in March 2018, and Dr. Wade Pfau had a ton of insight into the four percent rule that so many of us are concerned with. First, here’s a brief history of how the four percent rule came to be.  In 1994, William Bengen decided to look at 30-year timespans throughout U.S. History, beginning with the year 1926.  He worked under the assumption that a retiree held 50 percent stocks (in the form of S&P 500 Index), and 50 percent bonds (intermediate-term government bonds).  He looked at two things: the worst-case scenario, and how much an investor could sustainably withdraw from their portfolio under that worst-case scenario.  The year 1966 ended up being one of the worst to retire during, and an investor could withdraw 4.15 percent during the first year, and 4.15 percent, adjusted for inflation, every subsequent year.  That is how the 4 percent rule came to be.  Dr. Wade Pfau, a Professor of Retirement Income at The American College of Financial Services, argues that the 4 percent rule may not be the end-all-be-all we think it is. He voices his hesitations and explains how you can determine how much you can afford to spend in retirement on this episode.  Enjoy! P.S. - We’ll return to our regular podcast production schedule in October!  For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/216  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#215: We are really digging into the archives with today's episode. This originally aired back in 2016! Besides being another fun and fascinating interview, this is one of our most popular episodes. Which isn't surprising, given the topic we're exploring. :-) Financial independence means many things to many different people, which might be why we find it challenging to settle on a definition that everyone can agree on. Regardless of what your personal definition is, Joshua Sheats, a financial planner and host of the well-known Radical Personal Finance podcast, says that financial independence can be separated into seven stages. We explore these seven stages of FI in this episode, and we also talk about how to enjoy the journey no matter what stage you're at. Enjoy! For details, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/stages-financial-independence-joshua-sheats/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#214: It’s September! If you’ve been listening to the show for the past few months, then you know that I’m on what I’ve dubbed my September Sabbatical, in which I’m taking a break from podcast production and traveling the globe. In light of that, we’re digging through the archives and airing some of my favorite interviews on the show, in between airing interviews I’ve done on other podcasts. I’m super excited to share an interview I did with Brad and Jonathan of ChooseFI back in December 2018. It was fun to have the tables turned, and Brad and Jonathan left no stone unturned in their interview with me. If you ever wanted to know my origin story, including where my love for travel comes from, where my desire for freedom came from, and how I combined both, then give this interview a listen. We talk about everything from: How travel wasn’t a big part of my life until college How I prefer to travel Why the idea of mini-retirements is so important Making the transition from freelancing to having my own business and giving up that business in favor of focusing on Afford Anything Dealing with imposter syndrome Overcoming and working with a scarcity mindset What financial independence means to me The importance of self-care Brad and Jonathan are two of the most thorough interviewers I’ve ever recorded with, and this interview was a lot of fun. If you want to learn more about them, I returned the favor by interviewing them on this show on this episode https://www.choosefi.com/105-you-can-afford-anything-but-not-everything-paula-pant Thanks to Brad and Jonathan and ChooseFI for giving us permission to air this interview! P.S. - We’ll return to our regular podcast production schedule in October! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode214 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#213: It’s September! If you’ve been listening to the show for the past few months, then you know that I’m on what I’ve dubbed my September Sabbatical, in which I’m taking a break from podcast production and traveling the globe. In light of that, we’re digging through the archives and airing some of my favorite interviews on the show, in between airing interviews I’ve done on other podcasts. If you missed the last episode, you might want to listen to it before diving into this one, as Andrew and I go into the finer points of investing here. Seriously. This is one of the most in-the-weeds shows I’ve done to date. If you’re playing catch up: Andrew Hallam is a teacher who became a millionaire in his 30s and reached FIRE in his 40s. His starting salary was $28,000 - net. If you want to know how he did it, and what his first three rules of building wealth are, then listen to episode 212. Otherwise, tune into this episode, where we review his six other rules that can turn middle-class people into millionaires: Understand your inner psychology. Conquer the enemy in the mirror. Learn how to build a balanced, responsible portfolio. Create an indexed account, no matter where you live. Don’t resign yourself to taking this journey alone. Inoculate yourself against slick sales rhetoric. If it sounds too good to be true, it probably is.a While these rules sound simple on the surface, Andrew and I go way beyond that, talking about hedge funds, human psychology, and casinos. This was a favorite among listeners back in 2017 and it’s one of the most enjoyable interviews I did. I hope you enjoy! P.S. - We’ll return to our regular podcast production schedule in October! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode213  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#212: It’s September!! If you’ve been listening to the show for the past few months, then you know that I’m on what I’ve dubbed my September Sabbatical, in which I’m taking a break from podcast production and traveling the globe. In light of that, we’re digging through the archives and airing some of my favorite interviews on the show, in between airing interviews I’ve done on other podcasts. First up is a two-part interview with Andrew Hallam, a teacher who became a millionaire in his 30s and reached FI in his 40s. How? Beyond investing small sums (we’re talking less than $100 per month) throughout college, he also saved half of his starting salary of $28,000. This episode is for anyone who thinks it’s impossible to reach FIRE on a low salary. I originally interviewed Andrew in January 2017, and we could not stop talking. Which is why our three-hour interview was divided into two parts. In this first part, Andrew shares his story - how he became a millionaire, and why he wanted to achieve FIRE in the first place. He also shares three principles from his book, Millionaire Teacher: Nine Rules of Wealth You Should Have Learned in School: Rule 1: Spend like you want to grow rich. (Don’t waste money on junk.) Rule 2: Use the greatest financial ally you have. (Time.) Rule 3: Small percentages pack big punches. (Avoid high-fee funds.) As for the other six, they’re coming up in Part 2. :) Enjoy! P.S. - We’ll return to our regular podcast production schedule in October!   For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode212 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#211: Hey there! I’m writing this from Croatia, where I’m beginning five weeks of travel that I’m calling my September Sabbatical. From now through September 23rd, I’ll be exploring the globe and enjoying a one-month break. Today, I’m kicking things off with a community-based episode. Here’s the backstory behind today’s show: There’s an event called CampFI, which is a 3-4 day gathering for people who are interested in financial independence. CampFI holds around half a dozen events per year in various locations; I spoke at one in Colorado Springs this past July. While I was there, two other podcasters and I decided to interview the participants to find out their “why of FI.” What motivates them to build financial independence? These interviews and stories from the community are today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode211 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#210: We live in a fascinating era: huge sections of society are more prosperous, advanced and safe than at any other point in human history, yet depression and anxiety are at record highs. It’s a paradox of progress: the richer the nation, the more likely its citizens are to suffer from mental health issues and report feeling crushing isolation and unhappiness. What gives? At the individual level, pursuing financial independence and early retirement (FIRE) often fills people with enthusiasm, purpose and meaning. Yet once people reach FIRE, they often report feeling purposeless or rudderless. It’s a paradox of hope: nothing kills a dream like achieving it. And in the absence of anything else for which to hope, a person becomes, by definition, hopeless. Ouch. When we’ve taken care of the bottom of the Maslow Pyramid, how do we find hope and meaning? How can we create purpose in a vast world? This week, I invited one of my favorite writers, megabestselling author Mark Manson, to join me on the Afford Anything podcast to discuss these critical issues. Mark Manson is the author of The Subtle Art of Not Giving A F*ck, which sold six million copies and became the #1 bestseller in 13 countries. His latest book, Everything is F*cked: A Book About Hope, lays a framework for finding hope and happiness in a confusing world. For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode210 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#209: Anonymous wants to retire early and often. They’re going overseas, where they’ll make their annual salary within six months. Where should they put their extra income? Anonymous also wants to know: how can they find a financial advisor they can actually trust? Another anonymous listener wants to know - is it possible to spend more while minimizing taxes in early retirement? JuanCarlos asks: is $20,000 too little to invest with a financial advisor? Angela is wondering how to create a Roth IRA account for a teenager. Rose is thinking about switching from mutual funds to index funds because it means encountering less fees, but her and her husband are in their 60s. Does this make sense? Ari has $700,000 to invest in a taxable brokerage account. He wants to know if a 90 percent total stock market index and 10 percent bonds is a good asset allocation. Dave and his wife want to use their defined benefit plans as their primary income stream in retirement, and supplement with Roth and 457 incomes. Where else should they be saving? Myself and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy answer these questions on today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode209 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#208: Well, this could get awkward. Your parents and grandparents are aging. (Duh.) You want to have a few important financial conversations with them. It’s time to get the answers to questions like: “So … are you ready for retirement?” “You’ve been retired for 10 years … how’s that going? How are your finances looking?” “Do you have a will or legal trust? What’s your estate plan situation?” “Do you have an advance health care directive?” “To whom have you given your power of attorney?” “What types of accounts do you have, and how can I -- or someone whom you designate --  access the passwords if and when the appropriate time comes?” These financial conversations are important, but awkward. Most people would rather discuss the news, the weather, or the Kardashians.  How do you introduce these conversations to your family? What specific topics should you cover? What documents and other information should you gather? How do you manage these conversations when siblings, half-siblings and step-siblings are involved? What about step-parents? What if your parent lives outside of the U.S. and the laws are different; how should you plan? In today’s podcast episode, award-winning personal finance journalist Cameron Huddleston discusses these critical issues.  Huddleston has spent nearly two decades writing about money for Kiplinger Personal Finance, the Chicago Tribune, Fortune, USA Today, MSN and more. She’s the author of Mom and Dad, We Need to Talk: How to Have Essential Conversations with Your Parents About Their Finances.  She joins us to discuss how to navigate these tricky family conversations. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/208 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#207: Matt and his fiance earn $7,500 per month combined. They save more than half of their income. He’d like to take a different job that will decrease his income by $2,000 per month, but improve his quality of life. Should he? Suja wants to take out a loan for business growth. What red flags should she watch for? Anonymous and her husband are thinking about buying half-million-dollar home, purchasing a second car, and having a baby. They’ve saved an emergency fund and a 20 percent downpayment. Are they ready? Trayci wants to quit her 9-to-5 and start working as a 1099 self-employed lifestyle. How should she manage this transition? Daria is curious about the economics of a podcast. What do the income and expenses look like? Jared wants to retire early and then sell off his rental properties, but he’s worried about the depreciation recapture tax rate. How should he plan? Ali wants to set up a long-term giving plan, but most of the advice out there is geared towards wealthy donors. How should middle-class workers set up their charitable giving? Financial planner Sophia Bera (hailed by Investment News as one of the Top 40 Under 40) joins me on today’s episode to answer these seven questions. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode207  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#206: We live in a society that values career specialization. You’re not a “doctor” -- you’re a pediatrician, an anesthesiologist, an oncologist. You’re not a “lawyer” -- you practice family law, or bankruptcy, or criminal law. You’re not an “engineer” -- you’re an electrical engineer who specializes in solar technologies, or a civil engineer who specializes in the application of artificial intelligence in highway traffic design. Specialization is beneficial and necessary, but specializing too early in life or too narrowly can also have drawbacks. According to today’s podcast guest, New York Times bestselling author David Epstein, overspecialization can stifle innovation if we’re all digging in parallel trenches. Sampling a broad range of subjects prior to specializing (e.g. at the undergraduate level, or as a hobby) allows people to make connections between far-flung domains and ideas. If you’re an athlete, spend your childhood playing a variety of sports before you commit to the one you’d like to develop. If you’re a musician, try learning different instruments before you pick your primary focus. If you’re bound for a graduate degree in a STEM field, consider a multidisciplinary undergraduate that pulls from chemistry, physics, biology and perhaps even art. Specialization can come later. We hear stories of people who specialized early in life. Tiger Woods won his first golf competition at age two, beating everyone in the age-10-and-under category. Many world chess champions started training in early childhood. The notion is that early specialization provides a headstart; if you haven’t started training at chess or golf by age 12, it might be too late. But chess and golf are limited in their scope. They’re contained games with fixed, predictable rules. In the wider world, in which challenges and assumptions fluctuate and problems are ill-defined, being a generalist is a lifehack. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode206 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#205: Is it ever a good idea to use your 401(k) as an emergency fund? What's the best way to break up with your financial advisor so that you can move all of your funds to Vanguard? Should you put all of your Roth IRA money into index funds, or is there a better option for your money? A listener has a job offer working less hours for more money, but without a retirement plan. Is this a good move? When running a small business as a sole proprietor, are there tax advantages to incorporating or forming an LLC? If so, what should you consider? What's the best way to maximize the earnings on a large amount of savings while keeping the savings liquid? Can a robo-advisor help with this? Myself and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy tackle these six questions in today's episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode205 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#204: You make decisions on a daily basis about your career, family, friendships, health and investments; these choices shape your life. But how much have you thought about how to think? There are common threads and collective wisdom across disciplines. These common threads create mental models, which are frameworks for understanding the world. Mental models allow us to apply insights from a variety of unrelated fields, using reasoning by analogy to make better choices about our lives. For example: Critical mass is a concept from physics that can be applied to our understanding of microeconomics or entrepreneurship. The availability heuristic and filter bubble are concepts that we can use to check in with ourselves whenever we’re assessing risk in our businesses, careers or personal safety. Loss aversion and information aversion are notions that, when articulated, allow us to understand why we hesitate to learn more about investing during recessions. Mental models can make us better thinkers. Warren Buffett’s business partner, Charlie Munger, says he relies on mental models to evaluate businesses and make investing choices. What we know is that we’ll never be right. But mental models can help us become less wrong. On today’s episode, Gabriel Weinberg and Lauren McCann join us to discuss Super Thinking, their book about how to use mental models to improve the skill of thinking. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode204  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#203: Many people in their 50’s or 60’s warn us about catastrophic or ‘black swan’ events. But what’s the likelihood that this will actually happen? How can you use the 4 percent withdrawal rule for early retirement planning, given that your portfolio will be split among accounts with different tax treatments? How do you adjust your retirement plan for future taxes? Should a couple in their 30’s switch from term life to whole life insurance? Should a couple in their 50’s with adult children bother buying life insurance in the first place? Is it okay to keep all your assets at one investment brokerage, like Vanguard or Fidelity? And can you deduct rental losses if your income is over $150,000? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these questions in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode203 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#202: In 2006, Matt Kepnes worked at a hospital in Boston, and he felt miserable. He dreaded fighting traffic, spending his days under his offices’ fluorescent lighting, drinking stale coffee. He decided to take one year off -- a “gap year” -- thinking that after his sabbatical, he’d resume another 40 years of punching the clock. He worked 60-hour weeks in order to save money for his sabbatical year. He saved $30,000, then handed his boss a resignation letter. Matt traveled for 18 months, returned to Boston, and realized he had lost his willingness to punch the clock. He couldn’t sit still in an office any longer. He re-packed his bags, bought a one-way flight to who-knows-where, and reinvented himself as a travel writer known as Nomadic Matt. He lives on a budget of $18,250 per year, or $50 per day. In the last decade, his travel information website, NomadicMatt.com, has become one of the most popular travel blogs in the world, drawing millions of visitors. His writing has been featured in The New York Times, CNN, National Geographic Travel, and the BBC. He’s a New York Times bestselling author, and he’s traveled to more than 100 countries. In today’s episode, Matt and I discuss the art of slow travel. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode202 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#201: Ross and his wife are both in the Navy. They bought a home while they were stationed in Hawaii. Then the Navy sent them to Virginia, where they currently live; they’ve purchased a home there, too. They kept the Hawaii home as a rental property, and they’d like to move back into it when they retire. Which home should they repay first? Mike is 33, debt-free except for his mortgage, and earns more than $200,000 per year. He saves half of his income. What should he do with his savings? Pay off his mortgage? Invest? Josh has a nervous habit of checking his investment account balances daily. How can he break this habit? Amanda and her husband live in a duplex. They have $115,000 in equity in their home, and another $115,000 remaining on the mortgage. They’d like to move. Should they hold the duplex as a rental? Or should they sell and use the proceeds to buy a cheaper home, with a goal of being mortgage-free? Christy wants to know how to compete with other aggressive real estate investors who are bidding on homes. I answer these five questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode201 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#200: Nine years ago, I had no idea that personal finance blogs existed. Then, as I was flipping through an issue of Kiplinger magazine, I came across an article about a woman who paid off $70,000 in debt in 16 months. Her name was Jaime, she lived in Maine, and she earned 3x her husband’s income. He made $30,000 per year; she made $100,000. They wanted to have a baby, and she wanted to stay at home for the first year, but their debt load made this impossible. She aggressively went into debt-crushing-mode, working 70 hour weeks while 7 months pregnant in order to tackle their debt. She started a blog (and later a podcast), Eventual Millionaire, to track her journey and interview millionaires. This article made me aware of the existence of personal finance blogs. I immediately thought, “I want one.” The following year, I started my own site, Afford Anything. Like Eventual Millionaire, it later became a podcast, as well. Today, we’re celebrating Episode 200 of the Afford Anything podcast. And so it feels fitting that the special guest for Episode 200 should be the woman whose story inspired the creation of this platform, Jaime Masters.   For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode200  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#199: Ashley is paying affordable rent for a home she enjoys, but she feels certain that the real estate market in her local market will stay strong. She’s thinking about buying a home with 3 to 5 percent down, but she doesn’t have much in savings. Should she wait for a year to save more? Or should she take advantage of a rising market and relatively low interest rates? Ian and his girlfriend live together in Washington D.C. and have a combined 40 percent savings rate. He’d like to buy a rental property, but his girlfriend has $18,000 in student loans and is about to re-enroll in school. Should they buy an investment home, or use their cash to repay her loans and cash flow her new academic program? Annette is about to travel to Spain with her family. How can she plan an affordable and high-value international trip? William is concerned about losing his job. What if he can’t pay his bills, especially his new mortgage? How can he protect himself? Anonymous is a renter, and she often encounters surprise fees and charges when she arrives at the lease signing. Can she negotiate with her landlord? I answer these five questions in today’s episode, and I also feature a short interview with special guest J. Money, my former podcast co-host from the early days!! Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode199  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#198: Money flows. When you receive money, you’re in the path of this flow. Money flows from someone else to you, and eventually, it’ll flow from you to someone else, either in the form of a purchase or an investment. A healthy relationship with money is to feel gratitude when money flows towards you, and to release your money without attachment or resentment when it flows away from you. Today's guest, Ken Honda, is known as the “Zen Millionaire” of Japan. He’s sold more than seven million books in Japan about the intersection between wealth and happiness. In today’s podcast episode, we discuss four core principles for developing a healthy emotional relationship with money. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode198  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#197: Should Bret invest in a Traditional IRA or a Roth IRA? If Amanda gets married, how will her child support be affected? What about her student loan forgiveness? Joe is investing in bonds, which average a rate of return that’s equal to the interest rate on his mortgage. Should he switch to all-equities and redirect his bond investments into mortgage payoff, instead? Taunia has a car loan, a 401k loan, a home improvement loan, a primary mortgage, and a second mortgage. She also has an emergency fund that only covers two months of expenses, and she’s trying to save for college for her two children. What should she prioritize? Mickey has a six-month emergency fund. Should he leave it in a savings account or invest in bond ladders? David made $10,000 from a side hustle last year. Can he open a Solo 401k or SEP-IRA for his side hustle business? If so, which one should he choose? Should Andy invest in a Target Retirement Date fund, or should he split his money between a U.S. index fund and an international index fund? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these seven questions in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode197  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#196: When Wendy Mays was in her early 20’s, she earned $12 an hour working as the office manager of a pest control company. She wanted higher income, so she enrolled in college at age 22. By the time she finished her undergraduate degree, she was 26, married, with a child. Her husband worked low-paying jobs to make ends meet. They struggled to pay the bills. Wendy decided to enroll in law school, so that she could bring in more money. She graduated around age 30, and became the primary breadwinner for the household. She opened her own law practice. The couple starting bringing in a combined household income of around $200,000 annually. They bought a large house, with a swimming pool. Sounds like the American Dream, right? Except it was all financed. By age 38, Wendy and her husband accrued nearly $800,000 in debt. Around $480,000 came in the form of mortgage debt. Another $20,000 comprised of vehicle loans. The other $300,000 came in the form of student loans. They lived paycheck-to-paycheck. They decided to expand their family through adoption. Rather quickly, Wendy and her husband had six children. They realized they needed to repay their debt in order to give their family a more stable home life. At age 38, Wendy and her husband committed to repaying their debt, building their retirement accounts, and getting themselves onto a smart financial track. How did they re-start their financial life at age 38, with six children and $800,000 in debt? Find out in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode196  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#195: Alex makes $168,000 per year, combined between her full-time job and her side hustle. Her company pays for breakfast, lunch and dinner during the work week, plus a cell phone subsidy, health, dental and vision insurance, a gym membership, and commuting costs. She also househacks, so her living expenses are only $400 per month. What should she do with her ample savings? Christine is 38 and earns $70,000 per year running her own business. She holds $70,000 in investment accounts, has another $16,000 in savings, bought a condo with 20 percent down, and has no debt. What can she do to fast-track her path to financial independence? Amy is unsure whether she should pay off her mortgage, downsize to a smaller home, or invest. Katherine is 23 and househacking into a duplex. How much should she set aside for cash reserves? Miriam started a podcast and wants to know how to morph a passion into a lucrative income stream. Nick wonders if the FIRE movement should plan an annual gathering … you know, like a FIRE Festival. (But not like the Fyre Festival.) I tackle these six questions in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode195  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#194: Fear shows up in our lives in countless ways. Sometimes, fear takes the form of procrastination. We're afraid of botching something, or we don't like the feeling of anxiety that a project gives us, so we avoid it, dodge it, and indefinitely put it off. Other times, fear takes the form of perfectionism through endless iterating and tweaking. We want to keep tinkering with a project, to get it "just right." We applaud ourselves for our attention to detail. Fear takes the form of making excuses and rationalizations for why we can't pursue a goal or dream. We tell ourselves that some outside factor is to blame. Fear takes the form of throwing ourselves pity parties and locking ourselves into a negative self-talk spiral. We get easily discouraged. Fear takes the form of thinking others can't be trusted, and pushing people away. Fear has many faces. Today's podcast guest, Ruth Soukup, surveyed 4,000 people to find out how fear manifests in their lives. She joins us on this episode to discuss the seven fear archetypes that she discovered. Those archetypes are: The People Pleaser: This is the fear of disapproval and fear of not being liked, expressed in the form of weak boundaries and putting others needs first to a self-harming extent. The Procrastinator: This is the fear of making a mistakes. This shows up as over-planning to the point of "analysis paralysis," of spending all your time researching and none of your time taking action. Perfectionism is an overlapping quality, as well. The Rule Follower: This is a fear of authority. This person is afraid of breaking the rules or doing something in a way in which it's not 'supposed' to be done. The Outcast: This is the fear of rejection, which often -- ironically -- causes this person to reject others first so that they cannot get rejected. They're highly self-motivated and driven to succeed and feel the need to prove themselves, but they have trouble collaborating and working in groups. The Self-Doubter: This is the fear of inadequacy, of not being good enough, which causes the self-doubter to forgo opportunities, play it safe, and not take risks. They can also be highly critical of others. The Excuse Maker: This is the fear of taking responsibility or being blamed, which shows up in the form of always having a justification as to why this person can't pursue a goal, or why an outcome isn't their fault. The Pessimist: This is the fear of pain or adversity, often held by people who have been through an immense amount of pain or trauma. The pessimist gets locked into patterns of negative self-talk and self-pity, and believes that they have it worst than most. They can be sensitive to criticism, feel emotion intensely, and has trouble moving beyond the challenges from their past. In today's episode, Ruth and I discuss these seven fear archetypes and cover specific action plans that people can take if they recognize these tendencies within themselves. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode194  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#193: Lori is behind on retirement savings, as a result of being a full-time student for more than a decade. She makes good money and lives frugally, but she’s aware that she’s behind for her age. What should she do? Sierra wonders whether she should apply her savings towards paying off her mortgage or building investments. Jenessa plans to retire at age 35, and she’s wondering if the 4 percent withdrawal rule applies for such a long time horizon. Her friend swears that it’s designed to cover a 30-year retirement, not a 60+ year retirement. Is that correct? Jacqui is 24 and recently married. She’d like to open a 529 College Savings Plan for her future children, which she doesn’t plan on having for another 8 to 10 years. Should she do this? David is on-track to reach financial independence at age 50. He would like to start adding bonds to his taxable brokerage accounts. How should he manage this? Mikayla lives in Atlanta. Her employer gives her a stipend to use public transportation. This money can only be used for that purpose. She’s thinking of getting rid of her car so that she can start using public transit, and applying the cost-savings of getting rid of her vehicle into a downpayment fund for a future home. Should she do this? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these six questions on today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode193  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#192: “Don’t buy lattes.” This classic snippet of personal finance advice isn’t specifically anti-Starbucks. “Lattes” are a metaphor for the tiny expenses that leak money from our pockets, often without us realizing how much we’re spending. Your “latte” could be a pile of subscriptions: HBONow, YouTube Red, Spotify Premium, Netflix, Hulu Plus, the CostCo membership that you haven’t used in two years, and -- for that matter -- the gym membership that you also haven’t used in two years. (Ahem.) Your “latte” could be buying bottled water and snacks at the airport, or absentmindedly shopping online when you’re bored, or ordering restaurant take-out or delivery too often. Your “latte” might be spending too much on trinkets and souvenirs during your vacations, when photographs would capture the memory. David Bach is the New York Times bestselling author who created the phrase “don’t buy lattes.” He joins us on today’s podcast episode to discuss The Latte Factor. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode192  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#191: Should Russell rent a cheap apartment, or should he take out a loan for an RV in order to save money on rent? Carl is working two jobs that each pay $12 per hour. He has $5,000 in student loans. What can he do to improve his situation? Caroline is about to finish paying off her student loans, and in the next few years she wants to buy a home. Where should she park her savings in the meantime? Philip is saving for financial independence, but he’s not sure what to do with his time once he quits his job. How can he discover what ignites him? Amanda is receiving an inheritance, a New York City 4-plex valued at $500,000. How should she handle this? And an anonymous caller wants to know what the step-by-step path to wealth building would look like. I answered all of his questions in today’s episode, plus I feature a short follow-up interview with Kim, the firefighter whom we met in Episode 139. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode191  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#190: More than 20 years ago, affluence researchers Dr. Thomas Stanley and Dr. William Danko surveyed a vast number of millionaire households in the United States. What they discovered was groundbreaking at the time. The average U.S. millionaire, they found, lives a frugal lifestyle. They are disproportionately clustered in modest, middle-class neighborhoods. They drive used cars. They don’t spend money on jewelry, watches, boats or other high-ticket items. They’re self-made, meaning they did not inherit their wealth; they’re first-generation millionaires. In 1996, the researchers published their findings in a book called The Millionaire Next Door: The Surprising Secrets of America’s Wealthy. The book became a mega-bestseller and, to this day, remains a top personal finance classic. Fast-forward to 2012. Dr. Thomas Stanley’s daughter, Sarah, followed in her father’s footsteps. She’s grown up to become a researcher, earning a Ph.D. in applied psychology and exploring the world of behavioral finance. She became the Director of Research for the Affluent Market Institute, the research company her father founded, and she launched her own research firm, DataPoints. In 2012, Dr. Sarah Stanley Fallaw and Dr. Thomas Stanley decided to update their research on millionaire households in anticipation of the 20th anniversary of the publication of The Millionaire Next Door. They wanted to see what attributes are different, 20 years later, and what qualities remain the same. They crafted another large-scale survey of millionaires. Yet before they could complete the project, tragedy intervened. In 2015, Dr. Thomas Stanley was killed in a car accident. He was hit by a drunk driver. His daughter resolved to finish the research that the two of them started together. She sent out the survey they created, gathered and analyzed the results, and published a sequel, The Next Millionaire Next Door, co-authored with her late father. The book is Dr. Thomas Stanley’s final, posthumously-published book. The book was released in October 2018, twenty-two years after the original. On today’s podcast episode, Dr. Sarah Stanley Fallaw joins us to describe what’s different about millionaires, more than two decades later … … and what’s remained the same. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode190 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#189: Julie, age 27, calculated her expected net worth based on the formula taught in the classic personal finance book The Millionaire Next Door. She’s concerned. Her current net worth is significantly lower than the number that the formula revealed. Is she on-track? Anonymous wants to save for a downpayment on a home. Should she reduce her 401k contributions in order to amass these savings? Should she store some of that money in a Roth IRA? Samantha is more than halfway finished with paying off her debt. In order to make this happen, she took on a second job. How much will she owe in taxes? Maxime works at a job in which his 401k only offers expensive choices. Should he put his money in a taxable brokerage account, instead? Leslie’s parents are going to retire in five years, but they’ve only saved $65,000. What should they do? How can she help? Claire is creating an estate plan. What should she be thinking about? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these six questions in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode189  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#188: In May 1915, a renowned 58-year-old sea captain, Captain William Thomas Turner, made a series of questionable decisions. He was the captain of the Lusitania, a ship with 1,959 passengers, sailing from Manhattan to London. The first World War was taking place around them, and Captain Turner knew he needed to move swiftly to evade German submarines. His ship approached England; land was in sight. They had almost made it. Yet for reasons that will always remain a mystery, around 1 pm on May 7th, Captain Turner slowed the speed of the vessel to around 18 knots, slower than the 21 knots that they needed to outpace the threat of submarines. Around 45 minutes later, he executed what's called a "four-point bearing," which forced him to pilot the ship in a straight line rather than a zigzag course, which would be better for outmaneuvering torpedoes. At 2:10, the ship was ripped apart by a torpedo. Nearly 1,200 people were killed. Since that fateful day, historians have pondered why he made those two decisions, simple choices which may have permanently altered the lives of thousands. Today's podcast guest, Daniel Pink, has an unusual theory. He believes Captain Turner may have made those sloppy choices because it was the afternoon. Daniel Pink is the author of When: The Scientific Secrets of Perfect Timing. In his book, he makes the case that the time-of-day in which we take actions -- early morning, mid-afternoon, or nighttime -- makes a bigger impact than we realize. Our energy and attention unfold in waves, with a rise, then a drop, then a resurgence. The secret to perfect timing isn't simply a matter of managing daily routines, however. Daniel Pink also shows how this pattern emerges over the span of a natural human life, with the choices we make in our sunset years more prone to editing, to curating, than the choices we make in our younger years when time feels abundant. Senior citizens may have smaller circles of friends, he says, not due to loneliness but rather because they're editing their circles down to the few people who matter most. He discusses how midlife is a fascinating point in which our brains signal that we've squandered half of our time. These midpoints can act as either a slump or a propellant. He talks about how we appreciate things more if we believe that they're ending. In one study, researchers gave five Hershey Kisses to subjects; they asked the subjects to rate their taste and enjoyment. When the researchers handed out the fifth Hershey Kiss, they told half of the subjects "here is your fifth chocolate," and they told the other half of the subjects, "here is your final chocolate." The ones who were told that they were receiving the final chocolate rated their enjoyment of it more highly. How much does timing affect our lives? How do we manage our days, and our decades, with a stronger awareness of the way that chronology impacts our mood, energy and priorities? Daniel Pink answers these questions in his book, When: The Scientific Secrets of Perfect Timing. He talks about it on today's show. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/188  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#187: Sarah needs $36,000 per year in rental income to reach FIRE (Financial Independence, Retire Early). She owns several rentals. When can she comfortably consider herself FIRE? AyV wants to rent out his primary residence. Should he renovate? Anonymous lives in a high-cost-of-living city, but she found a small city nearby with Class B and C+ multifamily properties. These properties need a little work. How can she estimate repair costs? Carly bought a property that underperformed the one percent rule. It’s appreciated in value. Should she sell? Erin is trying to decide if she should buy a $270,000 personal residence in northern Virginia, or a $50,000 rental property in Huntsville, Alabama. Nancy wants to buy rental properties from overseas, but she’s having a tough time finding real estate agents who take her seriously as a buyer. What should she do? I answer these six questions in today’s final Ask Paula - Real Estate episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/187  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#186: Mike and Lauren have run a cleaning company, started and sold a biodiesel company, repaired and resold motorcycles, opened a coffeeshop, owned a DVD rental box, sold e-cigarettes, bought a storage warehouse, launched a YouTube channel with nearly 150,000 subscribers, moved to Manhattan, moved back to Florida, backpacked across Europe and gave birth to two children in Costa Rica. Whew. I’m exhausted by just writing their list of entrepreneurial experiments. Their willingness to take risks has paid off … big time. Mike and Lauren reached financial independence at age 30 and 29, respectively. Today, they join us on the Afford Anything podcast to discuss how they did it. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/186  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#185: Hello from Austin, Texas! I’m living in an Airbnb here for the next 5 weeks. Listen to the end of today’s episode to find out why … and discover how these next 5 weeks, for me, exemplify the “why” of financial independence. In the meantime, though, the show must go on! Here are the questions that we’re answering in today’s episode. An anonymous listener named Seeking FIRE wants to know how she can talk about financial independence with people who ridicule the topic. What do you say to those who laugh at the very idea? Russell owns a landscaping company and is also a part-time student. He’d like to earn more money on the side, but his schedule is overbooked. What can he do? Nick and his family are moving to the Washington D.C. area for approximately two to six years. They own two rental properties free-and-clear, and would like to buy a personal residence when they move. How should he save for the downpayment? Gerardo lives in Mexico and wants to retire on his investment portfolio, using the 4 percent withdrawal rule. How should he invest, given currency fluctuations and other international factors? Anonymous left her job and wants to know if she should roll over her 401k from her old employer. We tackle these five questions in today’s episode. We also answer a comment from a listener who says that individual stock-picking and active management doesn’t get the credit it deserves. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode185  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#184: In 2003, Beyonce Knowles-Carter felt shy about performing sultry lyrics and dance routines on stage. She needed a tactic to overcome her nerves and stage fright. So she created an alter ego, Sasha Fierce, to bring out her more assertive side. Beyonce is one of many top performers -- along with other top artists, athletes, executives, speakers, investors, bankers, lawyers, negotiators, and more -- who use alter egos as a tactic to overcome their insecurities and become better versions of themselves. Today's podcast guest, Todd Herman, is an expert at the practice of creating alter egos to improve your performance in any arena of life. He says that crafting an alter ego can help you become a better worker, leader, manager, investor, and even a better parent. Todd joins us on today's podcast to describe the "why" and "how" of creating an alter ego at work, at home, and in social settings. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode184  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#183: Should a newlywed couple with two cash flowing rental properties sell one to pay off $92,000 of student loan debt? What percentage of your portfolio should you have in rental properties? What's the smartest way to approach rental property investing, particularly if you get anxiety thinking about tenant requests? How much should high interest rates impact your decision to buy a rental? I answer these four questions on today's episode, plus, I have a big announcement regarding the future of real estate Ask Paula episodes, so check it out. :)   For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode183  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#182: Millions of smart, educated and successful people make dumb mistakes with their money ... and they don't realize it. I'm not talking about obvious dumb mistakes, like spending 85 percent of your income on a fleet of Ultra-Luxe-Fancymobiles for your 16-car garage. That's clearly a bad idea. Instead, I'm talking about hidden dumb mistakes that you may not realize until it's too late. Perhaps you don't have enough insurance, or you hold the wrong types of policies for your age and life situation. Maybe you don't have an estate plan, or you haven't updated your estate plan after your childbirth or divorce or remarriage. What if you're taking financial advice from the wrong people, or buying products that you don't understand? Are you rushing to buy a home too soon? Did you take out too much debt for college? Today's podcast guest, Emmy-nominated CBS News business analyst Jill Schlesinger, describes 13 dumb mistakes that smart people make with their money. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode182  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#181: Imagine that you’re going to take a 6-month to 9-month mini-retirement. How should you plan? What should you do? Sure, you’ll need to have enough savings to cover your expenses. You might want to find some part-time work. You may need to sell off a few investment. And of course, you’ll need to think about health insurance. But what else should you consider? And how will your first taste of voluntary unemployment impact your mental and emotional health? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I discuss this in today’s podcast episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode181  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#180: Nearly two decades ago, Stacy Berman, a personal trainer, launched a fitness bootcamp in New York City. She called it Stacy’s Bootcamp. She invited her clients to join her for 5:30 am outdoor workout classes in Central Park. At first, only three or four people showed up. Then the group grew to 10 people. Then 20 people. Then demand grew beyond a capacity she could reasonably accommodate. She hired personal trainers as independent contractors who led additional classes. She limited class size to 20 people who paid $30 to $37 per class, depending on the package they purchased. Her business expanded to Manhattan’s Battery Park and Brooklyn’s Prospect Park. After six years, Stacy’s Bootcamp grossed more than $1 million. The company had zero employees; the other teachers were contractors. Stacy is one of the many entrepreneurs profiled by Elaine Pofeldt, author of the book The Million Dollar, One Person Business. In today's episode, we talk about solopreneurs who make a million without any employees. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode180  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#179: Should a couple in New Orleans sell their single-family home and use the sale proceeds to househack into a duplex? What do you think about turnkey investments? What tax consequences will someone face if they transfer their property to their parents? How do you handle tough situations related to the way some home renovation contractors treat women? What’s the latest update on your real estate course? I answer these five questions on today’s podcast. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode179  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#178: Tanja Hester retired at age 38. She had a negative net worth until her late 20's, thanks to a combination of student loans, buying expensive cocktails and clothes, living far beyond her means, and not paying attention to her money. If you were to have met the 27-year-old version of Tanja, you wouldn't guess that she'd be a likely candidate for retiring early. Yet a decade later, she's saved 40x of her annual cost of living. How? Tanja worked as a political consultant in Los Angeles, and during her career, ascended to important high-ranking roles. Every promotion came with more grueling hours, accompanied by a raise. Tanja maintained her same standard of living, banking every raise. This simple strategy allowed her to rapidly grow her net worth. She didn't obsess about penny-pinching. She didn't clip 50 cent coupons for shampoo and soap. Instead, she focused her efforts on getting that next promotion, that next raise, and when it arrived, she saved and invested every additional cent. Today, at age 39, Tanja has published her first book, Work Optional, about saving enough to retire and live a lifestyle in which paid work is an option rather than a necessity. She joins us on this week's podcast to talk about the lessons she outlines in Work Optional. Here are 5 takeaways from this conversation. #1: We're taught that "you are what you contribute to the economy." Most of us learn, either explicitly or implicitly, that our self-worth is directly correlated with our economic efforts. This is an idea that we need to unpack and process as we face retirement, a mini-retirement, or any career transition. #2: Research shows that we perceive all change as loss, even if the change is positive. Retirement is a loss of identity. It's one of the most stressful and anxiety-producing life events. #3: Retirement and wealth will not create happiness. Money won't magically fix your life, health, relationships, outlook, or anything else. It's a tool that can help, but it's not a silver bullet. #4: A morning routine is grounding. It's an effective way to start your day feeling centered and calm. I'd recommend this for everyone, regardless of whether you're retired or not. #5: The easiest way to save is to keep living at the same level you're currently at, while earning more. Enjoy the podcast episode! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode178  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#177: Imagine that your job is extremely well-paying, but you don’t enjoy it. You’d like to switch employers, even though this will probably require a paycut. But before you make the switch, you want to accomplish two goals: buy a home and catch up on retirement savings. Should you pursue both goals? Or should you defer the home purchase, given the potential future paycut? If you decide to pursue both goals, which one should come first? This is one of the five questions that former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer in this week’s podcast episode. We also answer a question from a listener who’s self-employed and wants to contribute more to his retirement accounts. We talk to another listener who’s living on $600 monthly paychecks while maxing out his Mega Backdoor Roth contributions. We talk to a 22-year-old with an $80,000 salary who’s debating between paying off her student loans vs. investing. And we answer a question from a listener who’s wondering what she should do with 401k accounts from previous employers. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode177  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#176: Cal Newport created a philosophy called digital minimalism, which is idea of reducing your digital life down to only the most important core essentials. Remove the apps from your phone, then slowly re-introduce only the ones that are the most useful and beneficial. Take control of your smartphone, rather than letting it control you.   Digital minimalism is a philosophy of technology use. This philosophy pulls from the concepts of minimalism, essentialism, the slow movement, and the 80/20 principle, applying these ideas towards your digital life. Cal discusses the digital minimalist philosophy on today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode176  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#175: Larry Swedroe is one of the most respected investment thinkers and writers of our time. He's published 8 books on investing, including one of the first books to explain the science of investing to a layperson audience. He recently wrote an ultra-comprehensive guide to retirement planning. He joins us on the show today to discuss the nuances of investing and retirement planning. We talk about the stock market (is it going to fall soon? Are we heading for a recession?), we talk about risk (including three dimensions of risk that all investors should consider), and we talk about what traditional retirees vs. early retirees should know. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode175  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#174: Should a 48-year-old New Yorker who’s retiring next year buy more rental properties? Should a Michigan-based first-time homebuyer use an FHA loan to buy a duplex for $135,000 that rents for $1,800 per month? Should a 40-year-old music professor who owns a duplex transfer his property into an LLC? Should a New Jersey condo owner sell her unit as For Sale by Owner? And should a woman who’s anxious about owning her own rental properties dive into real estate crowdfunding deals instead? I answer these five rental property questions in today’s podcast episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode174 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#173: Paulette Perhach is a journalist who has been published in The New York Times, Slate, ELLE, Marie Claire, and Cosmo. But we’re not going to talk about that today. We’re going to talk about the fact that she’s made every decision by putting her life first, and then forcing her career to follow. She’s hiked through jungles and watched eclipses and volunteered with the Peace Corps. She’s been on crazy adventures in far-flung places. She endured unimaginable pain and it’s because of those challenges -- not despite them, but because of them -- that she knows her one precious, wild life is too short to spend in a cubicle. Many people who pursue financial independence are looking for a fully-funded lifestyle change. But Paulette made an unfunded change. She lives her life, and then figures out how the money follows. What can we learn from her resourcefulness? Find out in this episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode173  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#172: Should a 25-year-old homeowner with healthy savings and no debt (other than his mortgage) upgrade his car? Should he make this choice if his current car is fine, and upgrading puts him into new debt? Should a couple without access to an employer-sponsored retirement plan put their savings into a taxable account, or should they save for a downpayment on a rental property? The market is fluctuating like mad; if someone has a lump-sum of cash, should they invest it now or should they slowly meter it in? Should someone without an emergency fund enroll in an HSA-qualified health insurance plan? Or should they stick with a plan that has a smaller deductible? How should a husband-and-wife team that’s self-employed and running a company together handle their health insurance? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these five questions on today’s podcast. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode172  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#171: Chris Hogan surveyed 10,000 millionaires in the United States. Here's what he discovered: - 89 percent of millionaires have a net worth between $1 million to $5 million dollars - 62 percent graduated from public state schools - 9 percent didn't graduate from college - Close to 50 percent had a B average or less in school - 55 percent give to charities and churches on a regular, monthly basis - 73 percent never had a penny of credit card debt - 18 percent are self-employed - 62 percent earned a household income of less than $100,000 annually - 80 percent exercise at least three times a week. On average, their homes are 2,600 square feet, and they've lived there for an average of 17 years. Two-thirds have a paid-off mortgage. They paid off their home on average in 11 years. Their net worth breaks down as one-third their home, and two-thirds their investments. They became millionaires at the average age of 49. They spend, on average, $35 on a pair of jeans.   What can we learn from these everyday millionaires? Find out in today's episode! For more, visit https://affordanything.com/episode171  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#170: When should you NOT use the one percent rule for rental property investing? In today’s episode, I encourage two callers to violate the One Percent Rule for real estate that they already own. WHAAATTTT? Why would I say that? Especially given that I’ve gained a bit of a reputation as The World’s Most Staunch Advocate of the One Percent Rule? (Long title, I know, but someone’s gotta wear it.) And if you’re not going to use the One Percent Rule, how should you make decisions about your real estate investments instead? Find out in this podcast episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode170  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#169: Happy New Years! To kickoff 2019, we've created a free book called One Tweak a Week, outlining 26 easy, actionable ways that you can improve your financial life. Today's podcast episode covers these 26 tweaks, so you can listen in audio format, in addition to reading the book. If you put these into action for the first six months of 2019, you'll be in a more stronger position in June than you started in January. Each tweak takes less than one hour (some are as quick as five minutes), and taken together, these tweaks can accumulate into a serious impact. Improve your money management and get closer to financial independence with our free book, One Tweak a Week. You can download it here: https://affordanything.com/2019  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#168: You can do anything, but not everything ... and definitely not everything at the same time. How can you optimize your time and energy? How do you choose what's worthwhile and what's a waste of time? How can you eliminate small decisions so that your mind is free to focus on the few choices that make a massive 10x impact? How can you spend less time struggling with your Inbox, and more time on long-term projects that can boost your income? When inspiration strikes or new opportunities present themselves, how can you decide whether or not this new project is worth your time? What's the difference between being efficient vs. being effective? How can you eliminate distractions? Can you train yourself to pay attention to important tasks, rather than getting distracted by Facebook, email, television and other time-wasters? When is it okay to relax? And what are the keys to a great morning routine? In today's episode, productivity expert Mike Vardy describes his answers to these questions. Here are five of the nine takeaways from today's episode: 1) Eliminate decisions. Don't waste your time and energy deciding what to work on; create a system that makes this decision for you in advance, and review that system periodically. Your decisions, therefore, are focused on the system, not the daily tasks inside of it. 2) Create boundaries, so that you know your limits, and also don't be afraid to break them. Boundaries are a guidepost, not a strict law. 3) Rather than setting New Years Resolutions, choose three words that will be the "theme" of your year. These words will be the values that guide your decisions throughout the year, helping you identify what projects to undertake and which ones to defer or decline. 4) Time-management tactics are really meant to be a compass. The purpose of "productivity hacks" is not tactical task-management; it's strategic decision-making. 5) Productivity is not about getting things done. It's about aligning your attention with your intentions. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode168  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#167: Angelisa is a college senior with $30,000 in student loans. She has a part-time job, from which she’s saved $2,500. Should she keep saving money, or should she get a headstart on paying down her student loans while she’s in school? Mackenzie is also a college senior with some student loans. She recently received a settlement from a car accident. Should she invest this money? If so, how? Franchesca is 35 and is carrying $212,000 in debt, mostly student loans. Could she reach financial independence, even with a late start? Erica wants to make environmentally-friendly investments. How should she approach this? Caroline is 42 and has started making after-tax (non-Roth) 401k contributions. Is this a good idea? Schaffer is curious about podcasting. How did I get started? I answer these six questions on today’s podcast episode, alongside former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/167  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#166: Michelle Singletary learned everything she knows about money from her grandmother. Well, okay, I shouldn't say "everything" that she knows. After all, Michelle also has an MBA from Johns Hopkins University. She writes about personal finance for the Washington Post. Her nationally-syndicated personal finance column, The Color of Money, is published in more than 100 newspapers nationwide. She's written three financial books.   Michelle has been learning, thinking, writing, researching and speaking about money management for decades. Yet the most important education she received, she says, came from the lessons her grandmother taught her.  Today, Michelle joins us on the Afford Anything podcast to talk about what she learned about financial independence, and her views on the FIRE movement. For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode166  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#165: Should Kim, an entrepreneur, invest in index funds or rental properties? Should Nick, an MBA student, househack into a more-expensive home with stronger cash flow, or a cheaper home with more budgetary wiggle room? Should Kelly, who is getting married soon, sell her current home and use the proceeds to buy multiple rentals? Or should she use her current home as a rental property? Should Trayci and her sister invest in rental properties or bare land? I answer these four questions in today’s episode. We’re a weekly show, but on the first Friday of the month, we air a bonus episode. This is our December 2018 First Friday Bonus Episode. Enjoy! More resources and be found at https://affordanything.com/episode165  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#164: As an entrepreneur, Bob Lotich loves growing and expanding. But after a particularly stressful year, he realized he had burned out. He woke up one Monday morning and, for the first time since he’d started self-employment, he realized he didn’t want to go to work. This was a new and uncomfortable feeling. He decided to take a mini-retirement. He had taken long breaks before. In the past, Bob had taken a full month off of work. This time, he wanted to a more ambitious break. He wanted to take a quarter off. He went to his whiteboard. He wrote the goal “take a sabbatical,” intending for this to last for three months. But then he paused. He wondered if he spelled the word “sabbatical” correctly. He Googled the word, then started reading about the concept. Bob learned that a sabbatical is historically a one-year break. Hmmm. That’s when he changed direction. Bob Lotich shares the reasons he decided to take a full year off work. For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode164  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#163: Does my employer match count against my 401k contribution limits? Should I invest in a Traditional or Roth TSP? Should I invest more aggressively in stocks right now, or should I hold cash and bonds until the next downturn? Should I get a mortgage or keep renting until I can buy a home in cash? Do you think index investing will dramatically change in the coming decades? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these four questions in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode163 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#162: How will artificial intelligence, AI, impact jobs? Former Harvard president and leading economist Larry Summers predicts that one-third of men will be out of work by 2050. Finance guru Suze Orman says not to be surprised if we see 25 percent unemployment by 2030. And major research institutions predict anywhere from 14 percent to 50 percent unemployment. But could this really be possible? Or is everyone panicking about what will essentially be a shift in the types of jobs that people hold — reminiscent of our shift from farm to factory, and from factory to office — but not an actual net job loss? To answer these questions, we talk to Darrell West, author of The Future of Work, about artificial intelligence, robots, and the future of jobs.   For more information, visit the full show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode162  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#161: Matt is interested in achieving financial independence, and he wants to encourage his friends to pursue the same goal. What podcast episodes provide a light, digestible introduction to the world of financial independence and retiring early? Daniel wonders why everyone pursuing financial independence seems to have a blog or podcast about this topic. Is the purpose of FIRE to sit around writing and talking about how you’re FIRE? If so, then what’s the point? Tom is an entrepreneur with an LLC in California. Should he buy a rental property through that LLC? Anonymous from California wants to know how I decide whether to use a property manager vs. self-manage my rental properties. She also wants to know how to estimate the cost of repairs and maintenance. And how should the tax benefits of rental properties play a role in choosing a property? Brett owns a rental property in Las Vegas, which used to be his primary residence. He’s getting a strong cap rate but a marginal return on equity. Should he hold the property in the hopes that it will rise in value? Or should he sell the property? Anonymous is an Indian citizen who lives in California on an H1-B visa. There’s a chance that his visa won’t be renewed, which means he’ll need to move back to India. What should he do with his rental properties? Can he manage his properties from another country? If so, should he purchase more? I answer these six questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode161 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#160: When Jonathan Mendonsa was 18, he researched which college degrees lead to the highest income. Pharmacy was near the top of the list of high-paying degrees, so Jonathan decided to become a pharmacist. He wasn't motivated by passion or calling. His decision was purely tactical. He wanted to make money. He spent four years in college, followed by another four years of graduate school. By age 28, he held a Doctorate in Pharmacy and an astounding $168,000 in debt. This debt burden might have been bearable if Jonathan loved his chosen profession. For people who love their fields, tuition is the price of being able to enjoy a lifetime of work they love. Unfortunately, that wasn't Jonathan's story. He never held a passion for pharmacy; he viewed it purely as a means to an end. Perhaps it wasn't surprising, then, that shortly after becoming a pharmacist, he realized that this wasn't what he wanted to do with his life. He wanted to change careers. He wanted to pursue more meaningful, fun, interesting work. He spent the next four years repaying his student debt. And finally, at age 32, he brought his net worth up to zero. _____ Brad Barrett wasn't thinking about income when he chose his profession. He had received acceptance letters to some Ivy League schools, but he wanted to graduate from college debt-free, so he enrolled at the University of Richmond, which gave him a partial scholarship. While studying there, Brad encountered an accounting professor who challenged him and his classmates in the best possible ways.  Brad felt inspired to major in accounting. His decision didn't come from a rigorous analysis of lifetime income potential. He wasn't scrutinizing labor statistics spreadsheets. He was simply following a route that he found fascinating. After he received his undergraduate degree, Brad decided not to enroll in any further education. Instead, he started working for one of the Big Five accounting firms, with a starting salary in the low $40,000's. He and his future wife both lived at home with their parents for the first few years of their professional life, which allowed each of them to save dramatic amounts. Brad saved more than 90 percent of his after-tax income.  Perhaps it's not surprising that the couple, who now have two children, are financially independent. ____ Both Jonathan and Brad are college-educated professionals in their thirties. They both live in Richmond, Virginia. They're both married with children (Jonathan has a son; Brad has two daughters). Yet their stories could not be more different. What can we learn about careers, work, income, spending, and financial independence from their life experiences? Find out in today's podcast interview with Jonathan and Brad, the co-hosts of the ChooseFI podcast. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#159: Should a 36-year-old father of three invest primarily in Traditional or Roth retirement accounts? Should Rose, a grandmother of four, open a Vanguard account for each of her grandchildren? Should Nancy, who lives overseas and is the sole breadwinner in her family, invest in a Traditional or Roth TSP? Should Scott’s wife rollover her 403(b) from her former employer into an IRA? Should Patrick, age 35, cancel his life insurance plan? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer these five questions in today’s episode. Our first caller is Mr. “Three Kids and Still Hoping for FI,” who asks: Should I be trying to grab as many Roth dollars as I can before I can’t contribute anymore? Or should I just pour dollars into my traditional 401(k) and have my Roth conversion ladder and/or SEPP-72(t) ready? Rose asks: I have about $1,200 for two of the kids. Can you please suggest the best fund I can start with? Can you also suggest options for birthday gifts? I like giving money, and the kids don’t need anything materialistic. Stocks, perhaps? One stock at a time? Government bonds? I’d like it to be something I can give to them inside a card instead of cash. Nancy asks: I’m 33 years old, married, and have an 8-month old. I work for the Federal government and we have a TSP. We’re living abroad and my spouse isn’t working. I’d like to retire within the next 20 years. We’re conflicted about whether we should invest most of our money into a Roth or not. We keep getting conflicting information about whether we should take the tax deferment now, or whether we should pay the taxes now and not worry about it when we retire. We don’t have much debt, and we have international properties as well as two properties in the Washington DC area. We’d like to know how best to manage the tax issue. Scott asks: My wife recently left a job at a hospital where she had a 403(b) and a Health System Defined Contribution Plan. What can I do with that money? Can I roll it over into something else? Second, what do we do with the 403(b)? My first instinct is to roll it over into an IRA, where I have more control, but my wife and I (with our current income) cannot contribute to a Roth IRA so we’re making use of the Backdoor Roth conversion. It’s my understanding that rolling money from a 403(b) into an IRA will affect our ability to execute a Backdoor Roth conversion. Am I understanding that correctly? Patrick asks: I’m about 35 years old and recently married. My wife and I have a combined gross income of about $100,000. I have some concerns about our MassMutual life insurance retirement accounts. I think MassMutual is a good product, but I think we are over-invested. We’re both putting away a premium of about $500 a month (about $1,000 combined) into our MassMutual. The payout that we’re expected to receive at the end is about $350,000 for me, and about $400,000 for my wife. I’m concerned that our premiums are too high and we could be using that money in better, more effective places. I tried to reduce my MassMutual payment a few months ago, and the cut in benefit was pretty drastic and not proportionate … it didn’t seem very fair to me. Any advice? ________ We answer these five questions in today’s podcast episode. Enjoy! By the way -- TRIVIA TIME!! At roughly the 36-minute mark of today’s episode, Joe and I talk about the late Senator William Roth, the namesake of the Roth IRA and Roth 401k. His birthday is July 22, 1921, which means his half-birthday is January 22. Which means we can celebrate his half-birthday soon!! Tune into the episode to hear our only-half-joking conversation about this. :-)  #AllTheCheesyBiscuits Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#158: Clark Howard loves the FIRE movement. That's because he's one of us. Clark began investing in real estate at age 22, started a travel agency at age 25, and retired at age 31. He sold his travel agency, moved to the beach and relaxed for four years; then he started a second career as the host of The Clark Howard Show, a popular radio show that's syndicated nationwide. Today, he's a personal finance celebrity. His website receives more than 50 million views per year. He has more than 1.1 million followers on Facebook. Clark is a consumer advocate and personal finance voice who walks the talk. He doesn't accept sponsorships that conflict with his values. He loves frugality and efficiency. Last week, he was traveling in New York on a company expense account, yet he still rode the subway, because he didn't like the idea of wasting money on a taxi ... *even if it wasn't his own money.* He's a philanthropist who leads with a service-first framework. During Hurricane Katrina, he volunteered with a team that handled medical evacuations. After September 11th, he joined the Georgia State Defense Force, which is an unpaid, unarmed volunteer component of the state Department of Defense. He sponsored the construction of 74 houses through Habitat for Humanity. He's provided toys for more than 150,000 foster children at Christmas. He's a multimillionaire and he flies in coach. When the now-infamous Suze Orman episode came out, Clark immediately issued a response on his own syndicated radio show. He came out in strong support of the FIRE movement. He said that he couldn't imagine how anyone could criticize the notion of saving half of your income. When I heard his remarks, I invited him on this show to elaborate. What does he think about the FIRE movement? Why does he like it? How would he respond to the objections? For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode158 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#157: We're back with another Ask Paula - Real Estate Edition of the show! In this episode, we cover down payments, cash flow, investing in condo hotels, building a rental on the side of your own house, selling your properties, and whether it's better to buy actual properties or REITs. Erin asks: Would you ever put 30% down (or more) in order to make a rental property cash flow positive? Avy asks: In 4-5 years, I'd like to have a rental property for diversification and passive income. Is it better to stick with the plan to buy rentals, or should I go into REITs? Additionally, if I want to invest in rentals, where should I look? Rod asks: Could you tell me if investing in condo hotels as a rental property is a good idea? I'm 10 years away from retirement, and I was thinking of buying one in Las Vegas, since I plan to move there when I retire. Being a traditional landlord doesn't appeal to me - I don't want to deal with the hassle of bad tenants or repairs when I'm retired. I'm hoping a condo hotel might be a way for me to get income from a rental property without all the hassle. What are the pros and cons I should consider? Tom asks: I want to build a small two-bedroom house on the side of my personal residence (located in Texas) to use as a rental. What advice can you offer to help me execute this plan? Sandra asks: I live in California, and 5 years ago I purchased 3 properties free-and-clear in Memphis, TN. While they’ve been working great for me, I think they have much more potential, but I’m no longer interested in managing them, or my property managers. It’s too much for me as I changed careers; I’m now going in a much different direction. All I want is to cash out and invest that money into my new business, as that’s more fulfilling to me. I know to sell them cash is the first choice but investors are in the game of low-balling - way too low. Selling retail is an option, but it’ll take longer, and I don’t know if the market is in my favor. Seller financing drags things out, and lease options are not great for me, so I’m interested in your feedback. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#156: James Clear wanted to start flossing, but he never managed to follow through. Despite his best intentions, his dental floss sat unused in a bathroom drawer. Fortunately, James had learned a thing or two about human behavior and habit formation. As a self-improvement writer, he'd spent hours pouring over scientific data about behavior changes. He decided to apply a few of these concepts to his own quest. First, he placed the floss on the bathroom counter, rather than tucking it inside a drawer. He made the floss visible. Second, he realized he didn't enjoy the tactile sensation of wrapping floss around his fingers, so he replaced it with floss picks. He made the floss more enjoyable. Finally, he decided to floss immediately after brushing his teeth. He used a technique called "habit stacking," in which a new habit is more likely to stick if it's tied, or triggered, by an existing habit like toothbrushing. Thanks to these techniques, James built a flossing habit. He shares these tactics and more in today's podcast episode. James Clear is one of the most well-respected and widely-known thinkers and writers in the world of habit formation and behavior change. His website, jamesclear.com, gets more than one million visitors every month. In this week's episode, we deep-dive into how to create impressive habits and how to break the terrible habits that hold you back If you'd like to start new habits like exercising, saving more, investing, meditating, journaling, practicing yoga or flossing, but despite your best intentions you can't seem to make the habit stick, then this week's podcast episode is for you. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#155: How can a schoolteacher dad and stay-at-home mom send their four kids to college? Where should a 23-year-old keep the savings that she’s accumulating to buy a home by the time she’s 27 or 28? What should we know about retirement planning if we have a pension? And should I rollover my 401k from my old employer? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these four questions in this week’s episode. Here are the details. Miguel asks: When I hear friends and coworkers talking about college tuition for their kids, all I can think about is how in the world am I going to send my four kids to college? I think I have a plan - I’d love to hear your opinion. From what I hear, college can be between $20-50k per year. I currently own two houses - one is a rental and one is our personal residence. We’re working on paying those mortgages down in about 7 years. I want my kids to get their basic courses from a community college to save some money, but for the rest I really think that taking a loan will be the best option. Usually these loans don’t have to be paid until they graduate, so I feel like that will give me some more time to become more financially stable. If I get to pay those mortgages in the time that I’m thinking, I’d like to buy a couple more rentals. I’m currently halfway to max out my contribution for my 403(b) plan. I’m a teacher, I’m making about 91k per year and my wife stays home. I would love to hear your opinion on my plan. I feel like if I had that kind of cash - $20-$50k a year - I would rather invest it and help my kids down the road. Anna asks: I am 23 and I’m saving to buy a primary residence in 4-5 years. In the meantime, I’m wondering where to invest my money so that it will grow but won’t be too susceptible to market fluctuations since I’ll be needing the cash relatively quickly. Andy asks: You’ve written before that if we contribute 10% of our salary towards retirement and our employer matches 5% automatically, we are saving 15% for our retirement. My question is, does the same principle apply to pensions? For instance, if I’m contributing 5% of my salary towards my pension and my employer is contributing 9 to 10%, making it around a 15% contribution overall, should that then count as a 15% retirement savings? Drew asks: I have a question about a 401(k) rollover. I recently switched employers and so far I’m very happy with the transition. With my new compensation, I’m now able to more than double my 401(k) contributions, and I’m on track to max out my new HSA while still maintaining the same take-home pay from my old job. My old employer had a 401(k) through Merrill Lynch and I was able to do a mix of contributions to both Roth and Traditional. My new 401(k) through Charles Schwab has this option. According to the documentation I’ve received from Merrill Lynch, I have four options at my disposal: 1. Keep assets where they are 2. Roll them into some kind of IRA 3. Transfer them into a new 401(k) 4. Take a cash distribution
 With this in mind, here are my questions: • Aside from the four options presented to me, are there any other options I should consider? • Are there any time constraints I should consider for this kind of roll over? • What would you recommend I do with these funds? I’ve heard you repeatedly mention the benefit of having all of my assets under one dashboard, so I am leaning towards transferring the assets into my new 401(k). I currently do not have an IRA, and I’ve been meaning to get one set up for a while. This seems like a great opportunity to get one up and running as an alternative strategy. 
 Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#154: Want to retire early? You'll need at least $5 million, more likely $10 million, says famous financial personality Suze Orman. I should know. She said that to me, directly, on my podcast. I asked Suze for her opinion about a frugal, flexible person who wants to retire early with a $2 million portfolio. She warned that retiring would be a massive mistake. "Two million dollars is nothing," Suze said. "It's nothing. It's pennies in today's world, to tell you the truth." Wait, what? "Listen," she said. "If you have $20 [million], $40 [million], $50 [million] or $100 million dollars, be like me, okay. If you have that kind of money ... and you want to retire, fine." "But if you only have a few hundred thousand dollars, or a million, or $2 million, I'm here to tell you ... if a catastrophe happens ... what are you going to do? You are going to burn up alive." But what's wrong with retiring early on $2 million? Assuming it's invested 50/50 in equities and bonds and harvested at a 4 percent withdrawal rate, a portfolio of $2 million could create annual investment income of $80,000. Surely that's enough, right? *Riiiight?* Nope. Suze says that's not enough. "I think that in the long run, $80,000, especially after taxes and as you get older, is not going to be enough. You may think it's going to be enough, but it's just not," she told me on the Afford Anything podcast. "You can do it if you want to. I personally think it is the biggest mistake, financially speaking, you will ever, ever make in your lifetime." I asked her if a $3 million portfolio at a more conservative 3 percent withdrawal rate would be okay for an early retirement. She said no. "Think about it logically," she said. Supporting a disabled family member who needs full-time care could cost $250,000 per year, she said. Ordinary cost-of-living would cost another $100,000 per year. This means you'll need $350,000 per year after taxes to cover your costs, which is $500,000 per year before taxes, which at a 5 percent withdrawal rate means that you'd need a portfolio of $10 million. If you don't have at least $5 million or $10 million, don't retire early, Suze said. "Here's what the FIRE people, you are not thinking about, so I'm going to give it to you straight here now," she said. She described the possibility of getting sideswiped by massive taxes and catastrophic emergencies. What if your home gets destroyed by an earthquake or flood and insurance denies your claim? What if you're in a tragic car accident and you need full-time care? What if the U.S. experiences 25 percent unemployment, which means you won't be able to find another job if you wanted one? What if your investment income gets consumed by massive future tax hikes? "When you get older things happen," Suze said. "You're hit by a car, you fall down on the ice, you get sick, you get cancer. Things happen." "Alright, you can do it if you want to," she said. "I'm just telling you, you will get burned if you play with fire." For more, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode154 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#153: A few weeks ago, Suze Orman's team reached out to me and asked if I'd be interested in chatting with Suze on my podcast. "Um, duh," I replied. Sure Orman is one of the most famous voices in the world of personal finance. From 2002 to 2015, she hosted The Suze Orman Show on CNBC. She's the author of 10 mega-bestselling books, she wrote a financial column for O, The Oprah Magazine, and she's made multiple appearances on The Oprah Winfrey Show. I turned to Twitter and Facebook and asked this community, "What would you like me to ask Suze?" One question stood out far ahead of all others in popularity: What does Suze Orman think about the FIRE movement? I opened with that question. And Suze's response shocked me. "I hate it," she replied. "I hate it. I hate it. I hate it. And let me tell you why." That's a direct quote. (Really.) She spent the next 30 minutes explaining why she thinks pursuing FIRE could be the biggest mistake of a person's life. Well, then. Why does Suze Orman hate the FIRE movement? Find out in today's episode, and join the discussion and help spread the FIRE by sharing your thoughts on today's episode in the show notes, on Facebook, and on Instagram. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#152: Dr. Brian Portnoy is an expert in making decisions. He holds a Ph.D. from the University of Chicago, he's a Chartered Financial Analyst, and he's the Director of Investment Education at Virtus Investment Partners. Dr. Portnoy joins me on the podcast to discuss how to make smarter decisions -- not only about investments, but also generally in life. How do we sharpen our decision-making skills? How do we improve our critical thinking processes? Here are some of the takeaways from our conversation. 1. Beware of resulting. Great results can come from poorly-planned decisions. And wise decisions can lead to good results on occasion. Don't judge a decision based on its results; judge a decision based on the soundness of the thinking process through which you made that choice. 2. Manage your expectations. Your happiness with an outcome will depend on the gap between your expectations and reality. If you can't control reality (at least, not completely), then manage your expectations. It's the happiness variable that's most under your authority. 3. Don't make hasty evaluations. When you go to a restaurant, you order a (vegan?) cheeseburger, and based on the taste of that burger, you can immediately evaluate your decision. You can't do that with investments. When you make an investment decision, there's a huge time-gap between when you make the choice and when you see the results of that choice. This time-gap may last for decades. And this means that your decisions are tough to evaluate. Don't judge an investment decision on one-year or two-year results, as tempting as that may be. Judge your decisions based on the soundness of the thinking, not the short-term ramifications. 4. Automate. It's the best way to save you from yourself. 5. Define risk. Some people think that "risk" is synonymous with volatility. Others think that "risk" refers to the loss of capital. Know what "risk" means to you. Personally, I define it as probability x magnitude. Today's guest, Brian, points out that magnitude can happen in a multitude of dimensions and verticals. 6. Diversification, risk management, and behavior. When in doubt, pay attention to these three factors. In order to better manage your investing choices, manage these qualities. You cannot control broad market outcomes, but you can control your exposure, risk, and choices. 7. You're the average of the 5 people you spend the most time with. Surround yourself with frugal, ambitious, reasonable, wise, intelligent, kind, adventurous people -- and you will become stronger in those qualities. You are in charge of the community with whom you surround yourself. Even if you can't change your physical neighborhood, you can form an online or digital community of people who support your goals and reflect your philosophy. 8. Keep a decision-making journal. What gets measured, gets improved. If you want to improve your decision-making skills, keep a journal of the way in which you make decisions, e.g. your thinking process. Then in the future, when you have the benefit of hindsight, you can look back on your decision-making process. Remember, don't judge your choices based on outcome; judge your choices based on the soundness of the decision-making process itself. Dr. Portnoy dives into detail about how to make better decisions in today's episode. Enjoy!   For more, visit the website at https://affordanything.com/episode152 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#151: We’re back with another “Ask Paula” episode of the show! As usual, my friend and former financial advisor, Joe Saul-Sehy joins me in answering your questions! Let’s dive right in. Hailey: I just graduated from college with a major in Computer Science and minor in graphic design. The whole time - it was rough. I come from a family that didn’t have a lot to give me going into this journey of getting a college degree. So I did it basically on my own - they gave me things here and there - but college is expensive. I wound up getting scholarships and taking on student loans to get through. It was a lot of hard work. Some days, I wanted to quit. I felt like I was never ever going to see the benefits of what I was doing. Well, I am now at a point in my life where I was able to secure a job (I started a week after graduation) making $80k a year. Obviously, this is great - this is what you’re supposed to do when you graduate with a Comp Sci degree. But for some reason, I don’t know if it’s guilt or shame, but I feel bad watching my friends and family struggle, while I don’t have those struggles anymore. I find myself asking if I deserve this - to have a nice apartment, to have nice things. Inherently I know I deserve it because I worked so hard, but I don’t know … My question  is - do you have any advice for me to help me understand what it is I’m feeling? How I can feel better about it? Chris: I’m 45 and my plan is to retire early - not super early - at 57. To keep numbers straight, I’m hoping to have a million dollars in a 401(k) and a million dollars in a taxable account with stocks. My thought was to - at 57 since I won’t have any income - to convert the 401(k) over to an IRA and then start converting that to a Roth at the max, keeping me in the 12% tax bracket, which is roughly $77,000, potentially more, and live off of the stock which will be at 15% tax and that shouldn’t go against my AGI because it’s an asset. Then at 67 I would start taking full retirement Social Security. Hopefully by age 70 I’d have very little to none in the 401(k) and most of that money would be in the Roth. Thoughts? Am I overthinking this?   Rose: My goal is FI in about 5 years. After maxing out my 401(k), I make automatic monthly contributions to a robo-advised fund, specifically a Schwab intelligent portfolio. I like that it rebalances and has tax loss harvesting because I’m in a high tax bracket. To me, it feels somewhat safer than putting everything into VTSAX because it’s diversified, but I don’t fully understand all of the different funds that I’m invested in through the robo advisor. Should I keep putting money into the robo advisor, or should I switch to VTSAX? Does your answer change at all with ongoing economic uncertainty and the benefits of being balanced across stocks and bonds?   Juan: I’m 24 and I live in NYC. I just graduated from engineering school and found a full-time position earning $75k/year before taxes. There’s a possibility of overtime so I might be able to make another $5-10k a year. I have $15k saved in cold hard cash; I have $6k in a Robinhood account which is doing well; and I have $5k in a Wealthfront account. I am planning on maxing out my Roth IRA ($5,500 a year starting now) and I have $2k there already. I also plan on participating in the employer’s contribution for the 401(k) traditional - which is maybe a 4% match. I don’t know where exactly I should put the money that I’m going to save to get the most out of it (mostly to beat inflation). $75k after taxes is probably around $55k and I plan on saving around 50% of that, or $30k a year for the next 3-5 years. I live by myself but my expenses are not high. I am very good with budgeting and everything is on track. I just want to get your suggestions/advice on where to put my money or what to do with it starting now. I am going to open an online savings account where I can get at least 2%. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#150: Chad Carson's friends called him a "nerdjock." When former college football linebacker Chad Carson graduated from Clemson University, he decided to start a business. But he didn't have any money. He was a 235-pound athlete who attended college on a football scholarship. He graduated debt-free with $1,000 in savings from various odd jobs. He wanted to become an entrepreneur, and he knew he was starting from zero. As Chad viewed it, starting from zero meant he had nothing to lose. He started jogging around local neighborhoods near the university. Whenever he noticed a property in disrepair, he'd ask if it was for sale. If he noticed a 'For Sale by Owner' sign in the yard, for example, he'd dial the number. If he noticed a home with an overgrown lawn and no curtains in the windows, he'd leave a note on the door, or he'd knock on the neighbor's doors to get the owner's phone number. By doing this, Chad started a real estate wholesaling business. He'd find off-market properties, enter into a sales contract with the owner, and then 'flip' the contract to an investor. He earned around $5,000 for each deal. The benefit to a wholesaling business, Chad discovered, is that he could get a foothold inside the real estate industry without much access to capital. He was a recent college graduate without any official employment, so most banks weren't interested in offering him loans. Wholesaling gave him a start in the industry. But after awhile, he wanted to chase bigger deals. He and a business partner decided to start flipping houses themselves. They earned profits of around $20,000 to $30,000 for each deal. While this was great, Chad wanted to transition into something that would provide a steady, stable income stream. He was running an active business; he wasn't accumulating a portfolio of passive investments. He and his business partner stopped flipping homes and began accumulating buy-and-hold rental properties. Today they have 90 units between the two of them. A few years ago, Chad realized that the passive income from his investments made him financially independent. He and his wife decided to enjoy their newfound freedom by moving to Ecuador with their two children, ages 3 and 5. They spent 17 months living in Ecuador, learning Spanish and enjoying a slower pace of life. They recently returned to the U.S. and are considering moving to either Spain or Germany -- or maybe Colorado? -- for their next adventure. In today's episode, Chad and I discuss real estate, financial independence, and international travel with children. Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#149: Welcome to the September 2018 First Friday bonus episode! We recorded this episode at Camp FI, which stands for Camp Financial Independence. It's a gathering of people who are pursuing financial independence; we spend a few days eating, drinking, and having late-night poolside conversations about money. There are several Camp FI's throughout the year; I recorded this bonus episode at the Camp FI at Joshua Tree National Park in Southern California in early August.    I invited several of the people at Camp FI to come to the microphone and share one thing: “Tell me a story about something you did that scared you."   Justin shared a story about getting invited by a corporate sponsor to take part in a mountainous 75-mile cycling ride, despite the fact that he wasn't trained or ready. Tim told the story of the first time he met his future father-in-law, and, to phrase it mildly, the meeting didn't go well. GingerFI shared a story about something she ate while traveling that ... well, I won't give away the ending, but let's just say that it's something she'll never forget.    Anna described moving from New Zealand to the U.S. to attend school, while Johanna talked about getting laid off from work and deciding to use her newfound joblessness as an opportunity to road trip from Maryland to Los Angeles. Jennifer described the resilience she discovered after surviving a disability, layoff and divorce. Wakefield talked about investing in real estate before he felt ready, and Vickie shared a childhood story of overcoming the intimidation she felt when she wanted to meet someone.    Listen to hear the stories they shared, and the life lessons they learned along the way.   Enjoy!   For more information, visit the show notes at http://podcast.affordanything.com/episode149 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#148: Welcome to a special episode of Ask Paula! Today I’m answering questions about real estate investing, and I’ve brought a special guest on the show to join me. His name is Lucas Hall, and he’s a landlord with 5 properties in three locations (D.C., Virginia and Colorado). He’s also the founder of Landlordology and head of investor relations with Cozy. We met about five or six years ago through blogging about rental properties, and I invited him on the show today to answer questions alongside me. Anonymous asks: If you have significant equity in a home due to market appreciation, what’s the best way to leverage the value of this equity? Should you sell? Refinance? Something else? Here’s a quick snapshot of the answer: You have three options: sell, cash-out refinance, or take out a HELOC. If you’re unhappy with the property, sell it. There’s no reason to hang onto an undesirable or underperforming property. If you choose to sell, use a 1031 exchange to defer taxes on the capital gains and use the proceeds to purchase another property. Be aware, however, that the rules regarding a 1031 exchange are onerous, and there’s a chance that you might either miss the cutoff or you may be forced into trading one mediocre property for another. That said, wanting to tap equity is not a sufficient reason to sell. If you’re happy with the property, keep it and either use a cash-out refi or HELOC to tap the equity. On today’s episode, Lucas and I discuss the pro’s and con’s of both of these strategies, and explain which one is our favorite. (Lucas prefers the HELOC and I prefer the cash-out refi; on the episode you’ll hear each of us explain why.) Richard from Massachusetts asks: I’ve been listening to this podcast regularly, and thanks to this podcast I’ve opened a Roth IRA. I’ve saved $54,000 and I’m interested in investing in a Class B or Class C neighborhood in an out-of-state location. How can I find out if a neighborhood is Class B/C without visiting it? Catherine asks: I’m 27 and need investing advice. I make $75,000 per year and I have $60,000 in retirement savings. I max out an HSA. I have $12,000 in an emergency fund. I live in Los Angeles and I’d like to invest in real estate, but I don’t want to travel to another state. I’ve been thinking about Roofstock; what are your thoughts? Anonymous in Atlanta asks: My wife and I have $500,000 in savings, in addition to our 401k. We keep $130,000 of this in the market. We had an advisor that was charging a 1.6% fee, and we recently fired him. What should we do with the remainder of the cash in our savings accounts? Should we put this in Vanguard funds? I’d also like to get into real estate, but many homes in Atlanta don’t meet the one percent rule. Should we look at foreclosure auctions? Should we look further outside the city? We’re in our early 30’s and would like to retire in around 15 years. We answer these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#147: Which of the following two attitudes describes you? "I'm crunched for time." -- or -- "I have all the time in the world." I'm guessing your answer is the first, rather than the second. But what if you could feel like your time is expansive and abundant, without drastic changes to your schedule? Most of us want to feel "off the clock," enjoying an existence in which we can linger, without feeling pressure from the demands and stresses on our schedules. According to Laura Vanderkam, even the busiest, most-scheduled people can achieve this feeling. We can live off-the-clock. Laura is a time management expert, but her latest book isn't about *management* in the traditional sense of the word. Rather, it focuses on *time perception* -- getting into the headspace of believing time is abundant, regardless of the demands imposed upon it. The brain stores memories efficiently, which means it vividly recalls novel experiences -- such as the one-week trip to Belize -- while compressing repetitive experiences, like a commute, into a single memory. For that reason, time feels like it passes more quickly when we encounter situations that are routine and familiar, and slows when we experience new situations. That's how a one-week conference feels long, but a routine week at the office flies by. Of course, we can't eschew familiarity; there are many benefits to adopting a routine. But we can slow time by savoring our everyday experiences. The more we engage mindfully in everyday activities -- from savoring each bite of food to noticing the flowers during our commute to work -- the more we're likely to feel relaxed about our time. We create happy memories, rather than compressing our experiences in our minds. Treating our hours with intention can also lengthen our experience of time. We plan and structure our workdays, deciding how to spend our hours between 8 am and 6 pm. But often, we aren't deliberate about how we'll craft the hours from 6 pm to 11 pm, and therefore can feel like we rarely see family, even if we're with them for three to four hours each evening. Deliberately crafting hours doesn't mean jam-packing our schedule in 30-minute increments. Scheduling a two-hour block of time to linger over a long dinner can blend intentionality with the art of savoring. In fact, Laura notes, those who are the most disciplined about their time are also more likely to feel that they enjoy plenty of free time. Structure creates freedom. Today on the podcast, Laura and I talk about how to make time feel abundant. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode147 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#146: My friend and former financial advisor, Joe Saul-Sehy, joins me to answer a multitude of questions on retirement savings and investing, so let's dive in. Elyse has two questions: 
#1: Through her job, Elyse has a 401(a) hybrid. Right now, she contributes 0.5% as her employer will contribute 2.5% only when she contributes 4%. Should she contribute the full 4%, or keep her contribution as low as possible, save it, and invest it on her own (which is what she's been doing)? #2: Elyse also has $18,600 invested in a mutual fund through her bank. Everything that she has read says to invest in index funds. So, should she pull her money out of the mutual fund and into Vanguard to avoid high fees? Anonymous also has a few questions:
 She has a 9-year job history with the state and local government, during which she has been enrolled in the Florida pension plan. Her new job offers a 457 Plan and/or a 403(b) Plan to supplement the pension earning. Her first question is: is a 403(b) better than a 457 Plan? Or should she enroll in both? Second, in her most recent job, she had a 457 deferred compensation Vanguard account which has $22,000 in it. Should she roll the Vanguard account over into one of the above plans, or leave it alone? Lastly, she has a 3-month old and wants to put a lump sum of $10,000 toward an account she can make contributions to, but she isn't sure which account would be best. Florida has a pre-paid program, but are there better options? Rachel has a question on retirement accounts as well!: 
Rachel recently left a government job where she had a TSP. In addition to that, she also has two IRAs - a small traditional IRA and slightly larger Roth IRA. She's actively contributing to the Roth IRA. When she left her job, she started an S-corp, and as she looks forward to business picking up, she wants to know how to best organize her retirement savings moving forward to make it easier to manage. She's also interested in tax optimization. What actions do we recommend she take? Stephen, a new listener, asks: 
If we're following the 4% rule route, does it make sense to fund an HSA, Roth IRA, Traditional IRA, or 401(k) at work? Or should we put all of the money in a Vanguard fund? Essentially, if you're planning to retire in 10 years or less, which is more beneficial: splitting up your money, or focusing on one account? P.S. If you have a question you want me to answer on an upcoming Ask Paula episode, leave it here! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#145: When Rand Fishkin was 25 years old, he carried $500,000 in credit card debt. Less than a decade later, Rand was the Founder and CEO of a company that grossed $35 million in annual revenue. In this podcast episode, Rand shares the story of hitting his financial rock-bottom and making the ultimate comeback. _______ The saga began in 2001, when then-22-year-old Rand dropped out of his senior year of college to grow a business with his mom. His mom Gillian owned a small marketing company that helped local businesses with tasks like placing ads in Yellow Pages. (If you don't know what that is, ask someone over 30.) Rand had an early entrepreneurial streak, and had spent the late 1990's and early 2000's working part-time for his mom's business. By his senior year, he was ready to dive in full-time. Gillian and Rand both realized the internet was more than a passing fad. Households were switching from dial-up modems to broadband connections. Clients were more interested in websites than Yellow Pages ads. The mother-son duo decided to start designing websites for local businesses. From 2001 to 2004, they hired contractors, rented office space, hosted booths at conferences, and purchased advertising. They paid for most of this with personal credit cards in Rand's name. By 2004, they'd accumulated $150,000 in credit card debt. Then they defaulted. They couldn't make the minimum payments anymore. The interest and late fees grew this balance to an astronomical $500,000. They decided not to declare bankruptcy. Instead, they took a two-pronged approach: Rand's mom spent the next three years negotiating with creditors, getting big chunks of the interest and late fees waived in exchange for making payments on the principle balance. Meanwhile, Rand focused on growing the business. Several of his clients needed help with a specific aspect of internet marketing called search engine optimization, or SEO. Rand began researching SEO tactics and started a blog to share his findings. This blog attracted new clients, and soon Rand developed a reputation as an SEO expert. He created a company called SEOMoz, later rebranded as Moz, to offer consulting services for businesses. After a few years, his company started developing and selling subscriptions to SEO software tools, as well. By the time Rand stepped down from his role as CEO, the company had raised multiple rounds of funding and was collecting $35 million in annual revenue. But there's a difference between a company's earnings and the personal income of its founders. Today, Rand and his wife still have a liquid net worth that's less than one million. How did Rand transition from carrying $500,000 in debt to becoming the founder and CEO of a successful eight-figure company? Why isn't he a millionaire yet? And what lessons about entrepreneurship and finance can he share with the world? Find out in this podcast episode. ___ P.S. Rand's wife, Geraldine DeRuiter, is a hilarious travel writer and an alumni guest of this podcast. You can listen to her interview in Episode 77. http://podcast.affordanything.com/9-years-nonstop-travel-geraldine-deruiter-everywhereist/ P.P.S. If you'd like to learn more about starting a blog, check out this free tutorial. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#144: Today I’m answering your real estate questions! First up, Rich asks: What are your thoughts on real estate crowdfunding versus investing in a traditional REIT and non-retirement account? He doesn’t want to give up the time it takes to manage a rental property. He wants to spend more time with family and friends, and his eventual goal is to generate enough passive income to transition into becoming a social worker. Rob asks: As a real estate investor who also invests in index funds, how do I decide what percentage of my net worth to allocate towards the stock market versus real estate? Anonymous asks: How do you maximize value in real estate? Is real estate worth the sum of its parts? Should you strip out some of that before you sell a property to maximize its value? Laura asks: How did you develop your real estate course? How do you market a course? I answer these questions on today’s episode of the podcast. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode144 For more details, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode144 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#143: Emma Pattee became a millionaire at age 26. But she hates it when I describe her like that. Here are other ways that Emma would prefer to be known: She's thoughtful. She's hilarious. She's kind. Emma is the child of hippies. She grew up in a tent in Oregon, at least for a portion of her childhood. She has a BFA in writing from Emerson College. She bought her first house at age 21. At the time, Emma was juggling a demanding full-time job with her ambitions of becoming a writer. This balancing act felt too tough. She felt motivated to quit her job as quickly as possible, so that she could devote her time to writing. She moved in with her boyfriend's parents, saved 70 percent of her income, and contemplated what to do next. She decided to "buy a small house in a not-so-nice neighborhood, and live for free by renting out enough rooms to cover my mortgage and make a little money on the side." But then she developed an addiction to real estate. She kept buying houses and converting them into rental properties. She DIY'ed some projects and hired contractors for other projects. She improved the homes and raised the rents. She reinvested the cash flow into buying more houses. She borrowed against the equity and bought even more houses. And that's how Emma, by age 26, became a millionaire. Her seven-figure net worth -- and more importantly, the cash flow that accompanied it -- allowed Emma to reach financial independence. She could stop trading her time for a paycheck. Emma quit her job at age 26 and dove into the world of self-employment, starting a lucrative one-woman enterprise as a professional ghostwriter. She writes books and articles, for which her clients receive authorship credit. In exchange for this effort, Emma makes a substantial amount of money. So who is Emma Pattee? She's a financially independent millionaire real estate investor who started a lucrative self-employment business as a writer. (Sound familiar?) Among the many words in that sentence, the most important word, to Emma, is the word "writer." That's why she started down this path. She wasn't trying to become wealthy. She wanted to become a self-funded artist. She wanted, simply, to write. __ Emma is a close friend. She was my guest of honor, my Plus One, when I delivered my keynote speech at the World Domination Summit last month. She's my travel buddy and real estate investing companion; we visited Alabama last year to check out potential investments in Birmingham and Montgomery. She and I have talked about meeting occasionally for writing retreats. In today's episode, Emma and I sit down at her dining room table, plug in a microphone, and hit "record." In the 30-minute conversation that follows, we talk about how and why we reached financial independence -- and what comes next. Enjoy. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#142: How can a family of four shift from earning two incomes to one, while still pursuing financial independence? How would a 55-year-old couple with $2 million saved know if they're ready to retire? Can parents use leftover money in their 529 plan to help their daughter with her college loans? If you start a job with an employer who doesn't offer high-deductible, HSA-compatible health insurance plans, could you use a plan from your old boss? And where should a father keep his daughter's Bat Mitzvah money? My friend and former financial advisor Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these five questions in today's episode. Here's a close-up look at each situation. Tyler asks: My wife and I both work 9-to-5 jobs. She's an elementary school teacher, and I work in sales. We've recently welcomed our first child into the world, and we're expecting our second. We'd like to transition to a one-income household, at least until the children are between three to five. We've maxed out my Roth IRA and 401k, funded a pension through my wife's work, funded a small Roth IRA for her, and started a 529 for our son. We have no credit card debt, but we have a mortgage, a car loan, and a student loan from my wife's graduate work. We're thinking about gradually phasing out her income, by reducing her "income" in 25 percent increments over time, and using that money to repay our debts. We hope to have the car loan and student loan paid off by the time our second child is born. What other recommendations would you offer as we transition into a single-income household? Heidi asks: We saved money in a 529 plan for our daughter's college education. We took out some loans for her freshman and sophomore years, thinking that we'd spend the rest of the 529 money during her junior and senior year. Then a wonderful thing happened: my daughter received $40,000 in scholarship money, covering her junior and senior years. Now my daughter has $13,000 in student loans from her first two years, and also $13,000 sitting in her 529 fund. Can we use the money in the 529 plan to repay her student loans? Or are our hands tied? Andrew asks: My 13-year-old daughter just had her Bat Mitzvah, and now holds $5,000 in a Schwab custodial account. Where should I put this money to preserve the capital, but also allow it to grow? She'll probably want to use a portion of this within the next five years. It's currently in a Schwab money market account, but I'm thinking about putting it in VFTSX, the Vanguard Social Index Fund. Anonymous asks: My husband just started a new job, and his employer doesn't offer HSA-compatible plans. His new employer only offers plans with low deductibles. I know that this isn't idea. Could he enroll in plan from his old job, so that he can still contribute to an HSA? Laura asks: Am I ready to retire? I'm 55 and my husband and I have $2 million, but we recognize that the market is volatile. How do we maintain our $2 million principal when we're no longer making contributions? My second question is about real estate. If the returns from both index funds and rental properties comes to around 8 percent, then why would you bother with the additional hassle of real estate? Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#141: "I'll get around to rolling over my 401k ... next week." "Eventually I'll switch to a cheaper insurance plan." "I really should move my portfolio into lower-fee funds." "Yeah, yeah, I know I should create an estate plan. I'll do it later." ____ We know how to improve our financial lives. We know what steps we ought to take. I'm betting that everyone reading this can name at least one action, big or small, that you could take to improve your net worth. But we don't follow through. Why not? Why do we procrastinate? Why do we ignore the important, in favor of the urgent or the more-pleasant? Why do we act against our self-interests? Why is there a gap between our intentions and our actions? More importantly, how can we bridge this gap? How can we align our knowledge and intention with our behavior? Dr. Stephen Wendel is a behavioral economist and the head of behavioral science at Morningstar, an independent investment research firm. He joins us on the Afford Anything podcast to answer these questions. Here are a few tactics he shares: #1: Automate Set up systems that save you from yourself. #2: Create mental accounts Give every dollar a job. Earmark dollars for specific purposes, so that you don't view your money as commingled in a giant bucket that you can raid. Once you start thinking of piles of money as "my emergency fund" or "my kid's college fund," you'll be less likely to spend it on champagne and luxury hotels. #3: Imagine vivid scenes Our minds are predisposed to prioritize the vivid over the subtle, which is one reason why we suffer from "present bias" -- the tendency to only think about the present, often at the expense of the future. (For example, "I feel like sitting on the couch right now" takes priority over "If I workout, I'll feel better in the future.") In order to combat this, create vivid scenes in your mind that imagine the future in great detail. #4: Create artificial hindsight Imagine a future version of yourself, and from that perspective, look back in hindsight at yourself today. What will Future You regret doing, or regret not having done? This technique is called "prospective hindsight," and it allows you to anticipate the thoughts and emotions of your future self. #5: Simplify If you find yourself drowning in a sea of complex financial decisions, you might lose confidence in your ability to make choices, and therefore not take any action whatsoever. Reduce complexity by making moves that are 'good enough,' rather than perfect. Simplify in order to take action. Dr. Wendel shares more tactics and insights in this episode. Tune in for a deep-dive! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#140: Should you buy a rental property that mandates HOA payments? How do you adjust for cap rate over the years, as the property's rent increases with inflation? Should you buy an $88,500 house that rents for $1,250 a month? And can you dive into detail about how you work with contractors and property managers? I answer these four questions in today's Ask Paula episode, themed around real estate investing. Daria asks: My husband and I live in Charlotte, North Carolina. I've been looking at local properties and I notice that a lot of these properties, Class C+ or higher, come with HOAs. For example, I've found properties that cost $80,000, rent for $1,000 per month, and have HOA fees of around $150. What do you think about HOA fees in general, and how do these affect factors like cap rate? I'd love to hear your thoughts. Sabrina asks: How does the cap rate on a property change over time, as the rent increases with inflation and other operating costs shift around? Jasmin asks: I'm looking at a rental property that costs $88,500 and needs $2,000 in initial repairs and other fees. My gross rent would be $1,250 per month, with estimated 8 percent vacancy. I estimate $555 monthly in expenses ($6,660 annually), including setting aside one percent of the purchase price for repairs and maintenance and another one percent of the purchase price for capital expenditures. What do you think of this deal? Rob asks: Can you please explain how you work with your contractors and property managers? On your blog, you describe texting with your contractor, but shouldn't the manager handle that? I'd appreciate any insight into how you handle these relationships. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#139: Five years ago, at age 29, Kim E. started her first professional, salaried full-time job, working as a firefighter for the City of Austin, Texas. She received a starting salary of $42,000. Today, five years later, she has saved: - one year's salary ($40,000) in an emergency fund - one year's salary ($42,000) in a workplace retirement fund - more than half a year's salary ($27,500) in a Roth IRA She also paid off her student loans ($10,000), paid off her car loan (roughly around $16,000-ish), and contributed to an H.S.A. account ($6,000, half of which came from an employer match.) Oh yeah, and she also bought and renovated a rental property. Translation? Kim has saved (or repaid debt of) $141,500 within five years, as a firefighter with a starting salary of $42,000, excluding the additional money she's invested into her rental. **She's saved more than 3x her starting salary, within her first five years on the job.** And she's done this while earning a middle-class public service salary in an expensive city. Wowza. How is Kim saving half of her firefighter salary? And before she became a firefighter, what other frugal tactics did she develop? How did she put herself through four years of college with less than $10,000 in debt? How did she travel before college, when she used to earn $10 per hour? Where does her resourcefulness and motivation come from? And what wisdom can she share with others? Find out in today's episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#138: There’s a famous quote that’s attributed to Henry Ford. The quote says, “If I had asked people what they wanted, they would have said faster horses.”⠀ ⠀ There’s no proof that Henry Ford actually said this. But whether or not that quote is historically accurate, the point remains. If Elon Musk had asked people what they wanted, they would have said a car with better gas mileage.⠀ ⠀ But Elon never bothered asking. Because he knows you cannot change history from the middle of the bell curve. And he knows that design by consensus, by definition, leads to average results.⠀ ⠀ He may ask for input on the details. But he will never ask the crowd to guide his vision.⠀ ⠀ True innovation comes from vision. We see this in technology. We see this an art, music, writing. But often, we fail to see this in ourselves. We allow the crowd to dictate who we are: what our dreams are, what our goals are, what our fears are. We crowdsource our vision and live a life of “should.”⠀ ⠀ Authenticity is the art of not giving a sh*t about should.⠀ ⠀ This sounds fine on the surface, when we’re pontificating about our lives. But it’s much scarier in the real world, when you face the reality that people will judge you. They will criticize you. They will tell you that you’re wrong. ⠀ ⠀ The more you try to step away from should, the more shoulds they throw at you. You should be married. You should have kids. You should have a job.⠀ ⠀ The thing is, they may be talking about you, but it’s not really about you. Your decisions are triggering to them, and they’re reacting to that.⠀ ⠀ Authenticity means accepting that if other people get triggered, that’s not your responsibility. You may be the catalyst, but you’re not responsible for their emotions.⠀ ⠀ And in that regard, authenticity is also the art of setting boundaries.⠀ ⠀ That doesn’t mean you exclude people from your life. But it does mean that you set healthy emotional boundaries, such that their thoughts and feelings do not become internalized as your own.⠀ ⠀ _____ This is a snippet from a speech I delivered at the World Domination Summit in Portland, Oregon last week. I'm sharing the speech for this July 2018 First Friday bonus episode. We broadcast one podcast episode per week, and on the first Friday of each month, we roll out a special bonus episode. Today's episode is July's special bonus episode, and I've divided it into two sections: during the first half, I share the speech that I delivered, and during the second half, I discuss how and why I wrote this speech -- and the key takeaway that I hope people learn from it. Enjoy! _______________________________________ For more ways to interact or listen to the show, go to http://affordanything.com/episode138 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#137: Today's episode is an annuity sandwich: we answer one question about family and relationships, three questions about annuities, and one question about time management. My friend and former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer questions in what, I hope, is the most entertaining episode about annuities you'll hear. Here are the five questions that we'll tackle today. Anonymous asks: I didn't grow up with much money, and my father recently went into bankruptcy. I've worked hard to become financially stable. Unfortunately, my parents expect a handout. How do you handle parents and other family members who look for handouts when they see you're doing well? Zoey asks: I'd like to retire in the next 10-15 years. I'd like to understand the difference between an investment with a lump-sum payout vs. an annuity fund. What are the benefits and drawbacks of these options? How do annuities work? What are their benefits? How do I know what's right for me? Charlene asks: Let's say you're looking at your retirement portfolio, and you realize you're behind. You still have 10-15 years left. You have 10 percent of your portfolio in an annuity. Should you move this money into a stock fund? Or should you keep the annuity? Magy asks: My husband and I are both 32, and save 25% of their income for retirement. He has a 401(k) and maxes out a Roth IRA. I'm a teacher and make a pension contribution. I also max out my Roth IRA and contribute a small amount to a 403(b). My 403(b), however, has a variable annuity with no surrender charge, with a 1.5 percent account fee. Should I keep putting money in this 403(b)? I also have a side hustle; would it be better for me to open a retirement account through my side business? Also, since we're already saving 25% towards retirement, I'm curious if we should invest more for other goals. We're putting 3 percent of our income in non-retirement investment accounts and 1.5 percent of our income in our sons' 529 plans. How should we divide our savings between retirement vs. other long-term goals? Laura asks: You've often written about the importance of an emergency fund and cash reserves. Do you have any ideas in thinking about this way with regard to your time or focus? If you're spending at capacity -- whether you're spending money, time or focus -- you have no space for either emergencies or opportunities. How do you conceptualize this? How do you balance busy-ness with the importance of creating free time and space? We answer these five questions in today's episode. Enjoy! ______ Resources Mentioned: - Afford Anything podcast episode with Laura Vanderkam - Laura Vanderkam's book, 168 Hours - David Allen's book, Getting Things Done - Austin Kleon's book, Steal Like an Artist - RoseMarie Garner interview on the FinCon podcast - Afford Anything blog post, "I tracked my time in 15 min increments"   Visit the website at https://affordanything.com/episode137 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#136: Rich Carey is a military millionaire. He's spent his career in the U.S. Air Force; he's currently stationed in Seoul, South Korea. He was stationed in Germany before this. He'll retire after this. Most of his fellow servicemembers, upon taking a military retirement, start a second career. But Rich doesn't need to. He's financially independent, thanks to his 20 rental properties. He bought most of these properties while stationed overseas. He's renovated them from afar. And he's bought everything with cash. To say his story is impressive is an understatement. Every week, I get emails and messages from readers who say things like: *"I'd like to buy a rental property, but everything in my city is expensive!"* *"I'd like to buy a rental property, but I'm not handy. I can't do any of the work myself."* *"I'd like to buy a rental property, but I only make a middle-class income."* *"I'd like to buy a rental property, but we're a one-income household."* *"I'd like to buy a rental property, but we have two kids, and they're expensive."* Rich's story illustrates how someone with a middle-class income can invest in rental properties from out-of-state. He earns a military salary. He lives in Korea. He's the sole breadwinner in his family. He supports a wife and two children. He's definitely not taking 2 a.m. toilet-fixing phone calls. In fact, he hasn't even seen several of his properties. As you'll hear in the interview, my friend Emma and I visited Montgomery, Alabama about a year ago. Rich's properties are located there. During our visit, I sent Rich an email, saying "Hey, I'm in Montgomery!," and he replied with, "Cool, I just bought another house there! You're welcome to drive by and see it from the outside." This means I've seen houses that he hasn't. *His* houses. ____ How did Rich start investing in rental properties? How did he grow a portfolio of 20 rentals? How could he build this free-and-clear, without taking out any loans? And how does he manage this from Germany and Korea? Find out in this interview. ______________________________ For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode136 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#135: Time to talk about houses! I answer your questions about rental property investing in this week's episode. Our first question comes from James, age 25. He lives in Florida, where he bought a $130,000, 3-bedroom, 2-bath condominium in the Class B range as his primary residence. He'd like to buy a second home and rent out his current home. He has $4,000 in cash and is eligible to take out $5,000 as a home equity line of credit. He makes $41,000 per year, after taxes. He'd like to buy one property a year. What funding options can he look into? If he had good credit, can he bypass the downpayment wall? What general advice would I offer to someone in his situation? Here's a short summary of what I tell James: 1. Keep a personal emergency fund. 2. Keep cash reserves for your rental. If your condo rents for $1,300 per month, you'll want at least 3 months' gross rent in reserves, or $3,900. 3. Look into FHA loans, which require only 3.5 percent down. 4. Wait until the HELOC can get you at least $10,000 to $15,000. Ideally you'll also want a little extra on the side for  closing costs and other unexpected costs. 5. Think of 'one house a year' as general guideline rather than diehard order. The more properties you purchase, the faster you can buy properties, because you can reinvest the cash flow from your existing properties. Your growth will be slowest in beginning and gets faster as you move along.   The next question comes from Berlinda. She works in a job she loves, with a great company, chill manager and fantastic team. She's signed a two-year contract, and she's six months into that term. She lives in metropolitan Chicago, but her boyfriend lives in New York. She's concerned that if she moves there, she might not find a job that she loves quite as much. She bought a duplex, and now owns a total of three rental units. She needs to upgrade these units. She projects that she'll need 14 rental units before she can live on the income. How can she scale her rental properties to the point at which she can live on their income? The third question comes from Katie from Mississippi. She started reading the Afford Anything blog in 2015, after she bought her first rental property. She now owns two rentals. She bought the first for $77,000 (purchase + initial repairs) and it rents for $975, and the other for $80,000 (purchase + initial repairs) and it rents for $900. After the PITI mortgage, they collect $603 per month, or $7,236 per year. Their operating expenses have consumed this amount, and in some years their operating costs exceed their income. What's going wrong? The final question comes from Ben. He and a business partner owns a multi-unit rental property, which they purchased two years ago. His business partner lives in one of the three units; the total income is $2200 from two of the three units (plus the partner lives in one unit for free). Their mortgage is $1475, plus $120 for insurance. Ben would like to get out of the deal, but he's not sure how. He'd like to refinance the property to get his name off the mortgage, either by selling his share to his business partner or by finding another partner to replace him within the deal. What should be do? ____ I answer these four questions in today's episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode135 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#134: We often peek inside the world of business to look for lessons about how to simplify, optimize and innovate. But what can we learn when we examine world-class people who are hacking the system in any field -- including sports, politics and music? What can we learn when we're radically curious about everything? And how can we apply this knowledge to helping us lead more deliberate, curated lives? Today, we tap Shane Snow's brain for answers. Shane Snow is a co-founder of Contently, a company that matches freelancers with publishers. But we're not going to talk about that today. We're going to explore bigger themes. Because Shane isn't just a tech entrepreneur. He's also an award-winning journalist, which is another way of saying that he's an inquisitive person who lives in the world of storytelling and big ideas. His first book, SmartCuts, explores how people avoid climbing the normative career ladder. It showcases people across a variety of industries who hack the ladder, often by making unconventional lateral moves. And that is exactly the kind of thinking that appeals to anyone building financial independence, and trying to design a meaningful, autonomous and unconventional living. His latest book, Dream Teams, explores what it takes for a group of people to come together to create something amazing. How can the whole be greater than the sum of its parts. And he looks across industries, at everything from hockey teams to businesses and beyond, to find the universal threads inside these stories. A few accolades before we begin: GQ Magazine described Shane's work as "insanely addicting," and The New York Times refers to Shane as a "wunderkind." (I had to Google that term -- apparently, it refers to someone who achieves great success at a young age.) He has also, somehow, appeared on Gossip Girl and beat Super Mario 3. Let's find out what Shane has to say about innovation, curiosity, teamwork, and hacking the system. Oh yes, and kangaroos. For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode134 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#133: Andy from Michigan loved the episode with charity:water founder Scott Harrison. After the episode, he and his 6-year-old daughter started watching videos about charity:water, and now they're both inspired to give. Andy's question is on the topic of giving. His is to reach financial independence within 5 to 10 years. He and his wife are debt-free, including mortgage-free, and their retirement accounts are well-fueled. Now they're working on building passive income. In the meantime, though, they'd like to add a bigger charitable slice to their budget. He's not an overly religious guy, but he feels a calling to make more charitable donations than he does. What advice could we offer about how to boost his giving? JR's wife, before they got married, purchased two timeshares at a 17.9 percent interest rate. When the couple met, and she confessed, they immediately paid off the debt. They're now paying $160 per month in timeshare fees. JR is trying to figure out how to get rid of their timeshare, but he can't find any good options. How can he get rid of this? Angela's husband is turning 50, and she is 43. They're on-track to have $1 million in investments within 7 years. They have two rental properties plus a primary residence, all of which will be paid off in around 7 years, as well. They're active and healthy, but they know this can change quickly. What type of long-term care insurance do they need? Joelle works in the public sector. She has a 457(b) retirement account. How does this differ from a 401(k)? She plans to career-change in the next few years, and she's considering whether to keep her funds inside of her 457(b) or rollover her funds into an IRA. What are the pro's and con's of both? Ines from Portugal wants to start a podcast about financial independence, early retirement and real estate investing, specifically for people who live in Europe. The issues that affect people in Europe are different than those that impact people in the U.S., and she sees a need within the marketplace. What advice would I offer to anyone who wants to start a podcast in this niche? For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode133 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#132: BONUS EPISODE!! On the first Friday of the month for the remainder of the year, I'm rolling out an additional bonus episode. As you know, this podcast airs weekly on Mondays. I'm thinking about maybe -- MAYBE -- expanding the podcast to twice-a-week. Maybe. But before I make such a big commitment, I figured I'd test the waters by producing *one* extra episode per month. I'll release this on the first Friday of every month for the rest of 2018. Today's episode is the June 2018 First Friday Bonus Episode, in which I answer three questions from the Afford Anything community. Enjoy! ____ Cameron accepted a job in the Middle East, where he earns 60 percent more than he could make at a comparable job in the U.S. He also gets free health care and 30 vacation days annually, which gives him time to travel with his wife and four kids. And thanks to his income and benefits, he and his family are on-track to reach financial independence in six years. The problem? He's just not that into his job. He'd like to pursue something more interesting ... he's just not sure what. And since he doesn't know what's next, he's worried that he might be running *away* from something rather than running *into* something else. Should he tough out the next six years? Or should he quit, even if that will delay his journey to financial independence? __ Hailey is 22, and she bought her first home last year. She bought a condo for $103,000 with a 3 percent downpayment and a 30-year, fixed-rate mortgage at 4.5 percent. Her condo was in mediocre shape at the time, so she's spent the past year renovating the space -- such as replacing the flooring and getting rid of the popcorn ceilings. Her neighbor recently sold his condo for $120,000, so Hailey is reasonably sure that -- between the comparable sale and the improvements that she's made -- her condo could appraise for at least that much. She'd like to get an appraisal, so that she can get rid of her $60 monthly PMI payment. But an appraisal costs between $660 to $850, and she's only planning to live in the condo for another year. She thinks she'll keep the condo for around three more years. Should she get an appraisal? Are there any red flags or drawbacks to doing this? ________ Danica called to say "congratulations!" on the 10-year anniversary of quitting my job. She's curious: how did I reach financial independence? I answer these three questions in today's First Friday Bonus Episode. Enjoy! For links to resources mentioned in this episode, visit http://affordanything.com/episode132  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#131: Scott Rieckens and his wife Taylor enjoyed a classic Southern California lifestyle. They lived near a gorgeous beach in sunny San Diego. They frequently dined at sushi restaurants. They drove a BMW. But after the birth of their daughter, everything changed. Taylor, an intelligent, career-driven, independent woman, suddenly didn't want to spend any time away from her new baby girl. And Scott had no idea what to do. Their luxury lifestyle depended on dual incomes. At first, he tried to come up with a million-dollar idea. If he could just create a wildly successful business, he thought, he could fix this problem. He started binge-listening to podcasts, trying to figure out how to pull in seven figures, fast. Then he discovered the financial independence movement. And suddenly everything made a lot more sense. Scott realized that if they gave up their consumption habits -- if they moved to an area with a lower cost-of-living, drove less expensive vehicles, or maybe even lived in an RV for awhile -- they could enjoy the life they wanted. They could trade luxury labels for time-freedom. He crunched a few numbers and realized that they could reduce their spending by 70 percent. But it would require HUGE changes, including an out-of-state move. He wondered how to suggest this idea to his wife. ______ What did Scott say? How did Taylor come on-board? And (spoiler alert!) ... how did they get so enthusiastic about financial independence that they decided to create a documentary about their journey into this lifestyle? Find out in today's episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#130: Anna and Dave want to get married … eventually. But they want to buy a rental property together first. How should they approach this from a paperwork/legal structure standpoint? Note: They’re thinking about having one partner purchase the home, with the other partner acting as a lender (with proper paperwork in place). Would this be a wise approach? Fred lives in Saskatchewan, Canada and owns two duplexes. He’s thinking of buying rental properties in the U.S., and he has 4 questions: What requirements or criteria do you establish ahead of time? For example, do you look for a minimum cap rate? Or a specific type of property? When you’re looking out-of-state, what steps do you take to identify a community? How about the type of property? What market research do you undertake? How would you caution an international investor who wants to start investing in U.S. properties? Jordana wants to build financial independence. She’s thinking about selling off stocks and index funds in order to buy her first rental property. Is this a good idea? Cheryl lives in Texas, where property taxes are astronomical. How should she factor this into her rental property decisions? Rachel is worried about bed begs. (Yuck!) Have I dealt with these in any of my rental properties? How do I protect against pests, termites and roaches? I tackle these five questions in today’s episode, which is dedicated to rental property investing. Enjoy! P.S. Need software to manage your rental properties? Collect applications, screen tenants, and collect rent online with Cozy.co/Paula. (And P.P.S. — If you’re not interested in rental investing, don’t worry! Check out last week’s episode about debt payoff with Laura Adams, or the previous week’s episode, in which Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer a smattering of general personal finance questions. Have fun!) For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode130 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#129: Laura Adams grew up in an upper-middle-class family in South Carolina, and her parents supported her through college. She attended her top-choice school, met her husband while they were still students, and enjoyed a charmed life. When she graduated, she continued to live at a lifestyle to which she felt accustomed. She rented a beautiful apartment. She took vacations. When she felt lonely, she comforted herself with shopping sprees. Unfortunately, her spending habits weren't aligned with her meager post-collegiate, entry-level income. Laura quickly found herself buried under thousands of dollars of credit card debt. She began feeling anxious about the debt. Fortunately, Laura channeled that anxiety into action. She cut back on discretionary spending. She watched her monthly mortgage payments fall. She focused on ways to earn more. Every time she'd free a small chunk of money -- a hundred here, a hundred there -- she made an extra payment on her credit card balance. Eventually, Laura wiped out her debts. She decided to become a "serious student" of finance. She returned to school for an MBA, where she noticed that many of her classmates were intelligent, hardworking students who were superb at managing corporate balance sheets, but terrible at managing their own personal finances. She decided to spend her life solving this problem. In 2006, she began writing about personal finance; in 2007, she started a personal finance podcast; by 2008, she was invited to join the Quick and Dirty Tips Network as the host of the Money Girl Podcast. Her podcast on personal finance has been downloaded more than 40 million times. Laura has also authored several books on money management and appeared on more than 1,000 media interviews on NBC, FOX, Bloomberg and more. How did Laura transition from wearing "financial blinders" to a renowned financial expert? What advice would she give to anyone who's trying to overcome the "ostrich," head-in-the-sand mindset around their money? What important money issues are we not talking about enough? Find out in today's episode. For resources mentioned in today's episode, go to http://affordanything.com/episode129 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#128: Antonia, 27, wants to retire in 15 years. She's trying to figure out whether to contribute to pre-tax or after-tax retirement accounts. Most financial advice for 20-somethings that she's encountered says to contribute to after-tax (Roth) retirement accounts. These articles assume that a 27-year-old will continue earning money for the next 30+ years, presumably escalating into higher tax brackets along the way. By paying taxes upfront, these articles say, you'll enjoy 30+ years of compounding gains, which you'll be able to withdraw tax-exempt. But what if, like Antonia, you're only 15 years from retirement? Should you stick with Roth tax treatment? Or is there wisdom in making retirement contributions with pre-tax money? _____ Marisa is young, high-income, and highly risk-tolerant. She'd like to know: what asset allocation would I suggest for a young, risk-tolerant person? And is rebalancing her portfolio necessary, or just a distraction? _____ Dylan owns his home outright. When he sells it, he'll collect about $100,000 after fees. He also has an additional $100,000 saved in cash. He'd like to buy a home free-and-clear. What's the best way to approach this? Should he take out a home equity line of credit? A bridge loan? Something else? _____ Pal lives in the San Francisco Bay Area. He recently bought his first rental property, and he's interested in building passive income and reach financial independence. He's curious about credit card piggybacking, a side hustle by which a person with a high credit score adds another person with a low credit score as an authorized user to their card. It seems like a legitimate way to earn extra money. Why aren't more people talking about this? Is there a problem he's overlooking? _____ Anonymous, 24, says she knows next-to-nothing about investing. She has $6,500 in her Roth IRA, invested in a Washington Mutual Class A mutual fund, which is an actively-managed mutual fund with a front load. Should she keep her money there? Or should she move it? Her second question is about her 401k. She contributes 5 percent of her paycheck into a Roth 401k account, from which she invests in a Target Date retirement fund. Her employer doesn't match any contributions. Her total contributions to both accounts (her Roth 401k and Roth IRA) equal $5,500 per year. Should she stop contributing to her Roth 401k, so that she can focus her contributions on her Roth IRA? ____ Jeff and his wife are both 64. When he reads about retirement, the information is ambiguous about Social Security. Let's say that he has $1 million saved towards retirement, which generates $40,000 annually at the 4 percent rule of thumb. Let's also say that he is eligible for Social Security income of $40,000 per year. Doesn't this mean he could retire on $80,000 per year? If so, then why do "4 percent rule" projections only talk about the portfolio portion? ____ Former financial advisor Joe Saul-Sehy and I discuss these questions on today's episode. Enjoy!   For links to resources mentioned in this episode, go to http://affordanything.com/episode128 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#127: Most people know what they “should” do — save for the future. Spend less than they earn. Why do so few people follow through? The answer may have less to do with tactics, and more to do with a person’s deep-seated beliefs, fears and anxieties around money. Your income, debt, and spending habits aren't merely a function of your actions. They're a reflection of your deep-seated inner psychology around money. Dr. Brad Klontz, a clinical psychologist and financial planner, joins me on today's show to discuss four "money scripts" that may be harming us. These scripts include: Money avoidance -- We believe money corrupts or that staying poor is noble, so we self-sabotage our success. Yet at the same time, we also desperately (at the conscious level) want more money in our lives, and feel trapped between these conflicting ideas. Money worship -- We believe money will solve our problems. And even though we know that the research says that, after a tipping point, it won't, we don't internalize that idea. Money status -- We believe our net worth is our self-worth, and we overly identify with our investment and bank balances. We may display conspicuous consumption or place a high priority on making the "right" friends. Money vigilance -- We watch our money carefully, but we may also feel anxious about running out. We may also downplay the amount of money that we have, if we're outperforming our friends, because we feel guilt and imposter syndrome. In addition to these four "money scripts," we also grapple with innate cognitive biases around how we manage money. Let’s take a look at loss avoidance, for example, which is a common cognitive bias. Humans are hardwired to fear losing money, far more than we fear missing opportunities for growth. As a result, we might hold onto an investment for longer than we should. Or we might become preoccupied with penny-pinching, at the expense of earning more. In this episode, Dr. Klontz and I discuss shame, guilt, and how to implement behavioral changes. We talk about how to contextualize our beliefs based on our family history, and how to recognize whether or not our beliefs are limiting or dysfunctional. Dr. Klontz shares his story about graduating with $100,000 in student loan debt, and feeling anxious about whether or not he could repay this loan. He decided to sell his car, poured the proceeds into tech stocks, and watched this investment disappear. That’s when he started questioning why someone like himself, someone of relative intelligence, would do something so ill-thought-out. And this sparked his lifelong passion in financial psychology. How can you develop a healthy relationship with money? Find out in today's episode. For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode127 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#126: It's time to answer real estate investing questions! Tom asks: "We're thinking about buying a duplex on a beach in a popular vacation destination in Florida. If the property stays 85 percent occupied as a short-term (VRBO) rental at current rates, the income from one unit of the duplex could cover the costs of a 30-year mortgage. "But if a recession hits, Florida real estate might tank. The rental rates or occupancy could drop. And we'd be stuck paying the mortgage out-of-pocket, which means we might not be able to retire. Should we take this risk?" Rachel asks: "Would you consider purchasing a beach house? Also, would you consider buying out-of-state?" Alfredo asks: "I own a couple of rental properties. I have to admit, my personal and business funds are completely co-mingled. I'm trying to separate these expenses, but it's a mess. If I hired professional help, how much might I pay?" Anonymous from the Northeast asks: "I'm gathering friends to invest. We live in the northeast, where home prices are expensive. I'd like to invest out-of-town. They'd like to invest locally. What talking points can you give me to convince them to invest out-of-state?" Mitzi asks: "Could you please explain the 1 percent rule-of-thumb around buying a rental property?" I answer these 5 questions in this episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode126 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#125: Morgan Housel has spent thousands of hours reading about investing. As a former columnist for the Wall Street Journal and The Motley Fool, he's spent more than a decade reading, interviewing, thinking and writing about how to manage money. And he's come to a simple conclusion: less is more. Doing nothing is often the best course of action. Patience, humility and long-term thinking give individual investors a massive competitive edge over major institutions. The classic strategy of dollar-cost averaging into index funds is a smart approach. And ultimately, success is based more on emotions than Excel. This week, Morgan joins me on the podcast to discuss how to gain a competitive edge as an investor. For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode125 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#124: Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer five questions about investing, retirement, insurance, travel and selling an expensive car. Eliana is 25 and makes $63,000 per year, plus a little extra from freelance work. She holds $95,000 in cash, $67,000 in retirement investments, and no debt. She doesn't necessarily hold early retirement as a goal, but she'd like the option to access her funds before she's 59-and-a-half. She asks two questions: First, she's been spreading her money between a Roth IRA, pre-tax 403b, and taxable brokerage account to spread her risk. Should she not contribute so much to the taxable account? She's also paying $88 per month for a $25,000 life insurance policy for her mother, who is 57 years old. She likes the peace-of-mind that comes with knowing it'll be there to cover funeral expenses, if needed. But she recognizes that there's a huge opportunity cost that comes from paying for such an expensive plan. Should she drop it? Rudy's employer offers two options: a pension or a retirement plan that essentially functions as an annuity. He would need to contribute 3 percent of his income, regardless of which option he chooses. Which one should he pick? Nicole lives in Canada. She has a Registered Retirement Savings Plan (RRSP), to which she contributes monthly. She's been with her employer for almost 10 years, but she's about to switch into a new field. She'll have about $45,000 in a pension plan from the employer that she's leaving. What should she do with this money? Julie is a frugal single mom of two. Four months ago, she purchased a brand-new vehicle for $39,000 and instantly regretted it. She'd like to sell it, but she could only recoup around $33,000 of value. She'd lose $6,000 from a car she's owned for 4 months. Should she take the hit? Or should she hang onto her car, since the damage has already been done? Finally, an anonymous caller wants to know more about long-term travel. How do you acquire visas that will let you stay in a country for many months? How do you find health insurance with overseas coverage? And what should you do with your snail mail? We tackle these questions in today's episode. Enjoy! ________ Resources Mentioned: Julie's question: Articles on selling a car, private party: https://www.edmunds.com/sell-car/10-steps-to-selling-your-car.html https://www.edmunds.com/sell-car/sell-your-car-safely.html https://www.edmunds.com/sell-car/how-to-close-a-used-car-sale.html Articles on buying a car, private party: https://www.edmunds.com/car-buying/buying-a-car-sight-unseen.html https://www.edmunds.com/car-buying/10-steps-to-buying-a-used-car.html Travel question: Overseas health insurance: - https://www.imglobal.com/travel-medical-insurance - https://www.gninsurance.com/international-travel-health-insurance-plans - https://www.geobluetravelinsurance.com/product_overview.cfm How to handle mail while overseas: https://www.earthclassmail.com Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#123: In the 1970's, a woman named Vicki Robin teamed up with a man named Joe Dominguez. They came from different backgrounds: she was an Ivy League graduate with a comfortable upbringing; he was raised in Spanish Harlem on "welfare cheese." But they shared one common thread: a commitment to financial independence, not just as a money management strategy, but as a philosophy on life. Vicki and Joe became partners in both work and life. They united over a definition of "FI" that expanded beyond paying your bills through your savings and investments. They saw FI as a lifestyle that exists in three dimensions: 1: Financial Intelligence -- Your ability to think about money in an objective, unbiased and non-emotional manner. 2: Financial Integrity -- Your ability to earn and spend in a manner that's consistent with your values, and to stay aware of the impact of your earning/spending choices on yourself, your family and your planet. 3: Financial Independence -- Your ability to break the shackles of paycheck dependence, and ALSO your ability to declare independence from limiting beliefs, fears, and the perception that money will solve your problems. In 1992, Vicki and Joe co-authored a book called Your Money or Your Life, outlining the FI philosophy. Their book became a mega-bestseller, selling more than one million copies. It landed on the New York Times bestseller list and spent more than 5 years on the BusinessWeek bestseller list. Oprah Winfrey said: "This is a wonderful book. It can really change your life." Vicki and Joe devoted the next five years to spreading the message of FI. They appeared on hundreds of TV and radio shows, including Oprah, Good Morning America, and NPR. They were written about in the New York Times, the Wall Street Journal, People Magazine, and Newsweek. Joe passed away in 1997, and Vicki continued spreading the FI message for another five years, before her cancer diagnosis caused her to take a step back. Today, Vicki is 72, healthy, and still spreading the FI message. And she'd like to discuss a fourth dimension to FI: 4: Financial Interdepedence -- Your ability to live within a flow of giving and receiving. Interdependence comes from our relationship with our communities, our nation, and the natural world. In today's podcast episode, Vicki discusses how we can move from financial independence to financial interdependence. Enjoy! For more, go to http://affordanything.com/session123 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#122: Tony lives in Chicago, where the returns on rental properties are so-so. He's thinking about investing in Indianapolis, where he consistently finds rental properties with cap rates that are greater than 8 percent. Should he invest locally, so that he can get a primary residence mortgage and keep a closer eye on the space? Or should he invest out-of-state, where the returns are stronger? Dan lives in California. He's curious: where should he look for rental properties? And when should he buy? Dan holds $150,000 in a savings account and carries a mortgage and car loan with less-than-2-percent interest rates. Should he continue saving, or is he ready to take the plunge? Isaiah and his friends want to buy a plot of land and build two yurts, complete with internal bathrooms and kitchenettes. They estimate this will cost $120,000 and they can Airbnb the yurts for $100 per night. They'd like this to be a hybrid between an investment and a personal vacation spot. Should they do it? Evelyn lives in Brooklyn, where she's an Airbnb host within her primary residence. She'd like to sell her home and she expects to clear $1 million in equity. What should she do with this windfall? She holds $100,000 in a SEP-IRA and $10,000 in credit card debt, and she can't qualify for another mortgage. I tackle these questions on today's episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode122 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#121: After Liz Thames graduated from college, she couldn't find a job. "Nowhere would hire me," Thames says. "I had what I thought was this nice resume, and I sent out over 50 applications. Nowhere called me back." She took a temporary job at a document-scanning agency, then joined Americorps to serve as a full-time volunteer in a low-income neighborhood in Brooklyn. She lived on a stipend of $10,000 annually, plus food stamps and a transit pass. She saved $2,000 from her $10,000 stipend, while paying rent in New York. To say that Thames is a natural saver is an understatement. Her frugality stayed intact throughout her twenties. She got married, earned a free masters degree and advanced into higher-paying roles. But she and her husband, who was equally frugal, continued saving as much as possible -- at times pushing their savings rate to as high as 70 percent of their income. When they were 30, they decided to shoot for financial independence. They shared a dream of moving to a rural farm, where they could raise children and spend everyday outdoors. By age 32, they achieved financial independence. Their investment portfolio is robust enough that they could draw down, in perpetuity, for the rest of their lives. They rented out their home in Cambridge, quit their office jobs, and moved to a 66-acre farm in Vermont. These days, they live on a combination of their rental income and 'side hustle' income from their blog, Frugalwoods. They have two children. Today, Liz joins me on the Afford Anything podcast to share the story of how she and her husband achieved financial independence by age 32. Resources Mentioned: Book: Meet the Frugalwoods Website: Frugalwoods.com   For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode121 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#120: Roger Whitney, age 51, calls himself The Retirement Answer Man. As a financial planner, investment analyst and podcast host, he focuses on helping Baby Boomers craft a traditional (past-age-60) retirement. Today, he joins me to answer two questions that come in from our community. Our first question is from Emily, who says: “I’m trying to help my mom decide if she should retire.” “My dad was a CPA and then a CFO, making great money, until 16 years ago when he was diagnosed with early-onset Alzheimers. My mom never took care of their finances before, or knew anything them … she took a few years to get everything in order, but during that time, they burnt through their retirement savings.” Their house sold in fall 2009, for just enough money to cover their mortgage balance and keep another $75,000 to invest. Today, Emily’s mom is 64 and wants to retire. She’d like to use her small investment balance to buy a home outright, in cash, so she won’t have to worry about rent or mortgage in retirement. Emily’s recommendation is that her mom waits until she’s 65 so she gets Medicare. But what if market correction happens? Will they regret not cashing out the investment at the peak? Our second question is from Yvonne, who asks: I’m 52, and I’m going to retire at age 53-and-a-half. (Hooray!!) I’ve been getting notices from Social Security, telling me that “if I keep working” until age 62, or 65, my payment will be such-and-such amount. The key words, of course, are “if I keep working.” How will an early retirement affect my Social Security benefits? ___ After taking these two calls, Roger and I chat about his new book, Rock Retirement. We’re also GIVING AWAY 10 FREE COPIES of Rock Retirement. To enter the contest, go to http://Instagram.com/paulapant, follow the account, find the photo of the book cover, and like and comment on that photo. We’ll pick 10 lucky winners who will receive a free copy of the book in the mail. The contest entry deadline is Sunday, March 18th, 2018 at 5 pm Pacific. Winners will be notified by direct message (DM) on Instagram. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#119: Once upon a time, in southern California in 1994, there lived a man named William Bengen. He read many claims, widespread at the time, that said that since the markets return at least 7-9 percent compounding rates on average, retirees could withdraw and spend 7 percent of their portfolio. William had a hunch that this was misguided. He decided to prove it. He looked at 30-year timespans in U.S. history, starting from 1926. The first timespan ranged from 1926 to 1955. The second timespan ranged from 1927 to 1956. And so forth. He assumed that the retiree held 50 percent stocks, in the form of an S&P 500 Index, and 50 percent bonds, in the form of intermediate-term government bonds. Then he asked two questions: First, what was the worst-case scenario? Retiring in 1966. The 16-year timespan from 1966 to 1982 was extra-rough, and experiencing this sequence of returns at the start of retirement made for one sad, sad puppy. Second, how much could an investor sustainably withdraw from her portfolio during that worst-case scenario? The answer was 4.15 percent in the first year, and 4.15 percent, adjusted for inflation, every subsequent year. And thus, the 4 percent rule-of-thumb was born. And we all retired happily ever after. ____ Or did we? This week's episode features an interview with Dr. Wade Pfau, who offers counterintuitive ideas about retirement income. Dr. Pfau is a Professor of Retirement Income at The American College of Financial Services. He holds a Ph.D. in economics from Princeton. He's a chartered financial analyst. He won two awards for "most outstanding contribution" from the Journal of Financial Planning. He won another award for "best paper in retirement planning" from the Academy of Financial Services. This guy knows his stuff. And he's ... *cautious* ... about the 4 percent rule of thumb. What are his concerns? What can we expect? And how much money can we spend in retirement -- whether we enjoy a traditional or early retirement? Find out in today's episode. ____ For resources mentioned, visit https://affordanything.com/episode119 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#118: Questions -- I get questions! Today, I’m tackling four queries about real estate investing that come from the audience. Here are the details: Sam says: I work full-time and I’m not handy, so I definitely need a property manager. I’ve found an amazing property management company, but they only serve a small, specific neighborhood. Should I buy a property in this neighborhood so that I can use this fantastic property management company? Terri asks: I’ve heard that if you’re above a certain income level, you’re unable to carry-over losses from your income property. My accountant says it doesn’t make sense to buy a rental property if you can’t carry-over losses. Is this true? Anonymous asks: I’d like to buy my first rental property when I’m in graduate school. I’ll live in one room and rent out the other. What should I consider? Noelle says: We’d like to sell our home, and use the proceeds to pay cash for a foreclosure in the South. How do we find a foreclosure or short sale? We cover these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! _____ Resources Mentioned: Amazon - nolo every landlord's tax deduction guide https://www.nar.realtor/rofindrealtor.nsf/pages/fs_sfrspec?OpenDocument Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#117: My friend and financial expert Farnoosh Torabi joins me to answer a relationship & money question from a listener named Janice.⠀⠀ ⠀⠀ Janice is engaged, and she calls to ask: Should she get married?⠀⠀ ⠀⠀ She earns double what her fiancé makes. She has no debt except her mortgage. Her retirement accounts are well-funded. He makes half of her salary. He’s carrying $20,000 in credit card and student loan debt. He has two children from a previous marriage and pays 25 percent of his income to child support. He has zero retirement savings other than his state-funded teachers pension. They’ve been together for 8 years and engaged for three. But she’s unsure about whether or not she should walk down the aisle. Should they get married? Is this a smart financial decision?⠀⠀ ⠀⠀ Farnoosh and I both tackle this question together — and we disagree on some points, which makes this conversation better!! Farnoosh is the bestselling author of When She Makes More, a book that takes an in-depth look at households in which the woman earns more than the man. She hosted a primetime show on CNBC, makes regular appearances on The Today Show and Good Morning America, and writes a monthly financial column for O, The Oprah Magazine. She’s a former reporter for Money Magazine. She's the perfect guest for a conversation about relationships, marriage, money, debt, family.⠀ Enjoy!⠀ For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode117 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#116: Stacy and her boyfriend would like to downsize to one vehicle. But they're collectively $14,500 underwater on their car loans. 
 Stacy owes $11,000 on her car, but its trade-in value is $7,200. She's paying a 12.74% interest rate and her payoff date is 2021.  
 Her boyfriend is in worse shape. He owes $18,500 on his vehicle, but its trade-in value is $7,800. He's paying a 21.5% interest rate and his payoff date is 2022. 
 Theoretically, they could sell Stacy's car to a private party, and she could pay off the rest of her loan. But the boyfriend's car is not in great shape, and probably won't survive for the next couple of years. And neither of them have found better refinancing deals. 
 What should Stacy and her boyfriend do? 
 _____ 
 Rachel earns $65,000 per year. She’s 27 years old, contributes 20 percent to her retirement account, and holds $5,000 in savings.  
 She owes $19,000 on a car loan, at a 4 percent interest rate, and $170,000 on student loans, all with different interest rates, but the highest at 7.9 percent. 
 She’s hesitant to consolidate her student loans, because she’s currently on a government plan that gives her flexibility, and she doesn’t want to switch into a plan that requires her to make a fixed monthly payment. 
 She’d like to know if she should use her savings to invest, or repay her loans. 
 _____ 
 Misty is 40 and has no retirement savings. She lives overseas and is able to save about $20,000 per year. She plans on living overseas for a couple more years before returning to the United States. 
 Her employer doesn’t offer any retirement benefits or match, and her health insurance accounts are not HSA eligible. 
 She’d like to contribute to index funds. Is this a good strategy? Does the fact that she lives overseas change her considerations? 
 ____ 
 Nicole is from New York and is living in Abu Dhabi. She’s been living there for three-and-a-half years and makes good money. She’s repaid her student loans and has a lot of cash saved. She’s single. 
 She wants to become financially independent. What should she start doing now? 
 _____ 
 Karen is 32 and lives in Los Angeles. Her take-home pay is $4,300 per month. She supports her parents financially, which costs $1,200 per month; she also lives with them.  
 She paid off $60,000 in student loans in 5 years. She’s has $100k in a high-yield savings account and $100k in 403b. She holds $12k in student loan debt from graduate school. 
 She wants to make 20 percent downpayment on a home with the cash that she’s saved. She’d like to live there, but also have the potential to rent out this home if, at any point, she decides she doesn’t want the burden of a mortgage anymore. She’d like to keep her mortgage to $2,000 per month. 
 Given that the housing market is so high, should she buy a home? Or should she wait for a market crash and keep saving in the meantime? 
 ____ 
 Former financial advisor Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in this episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode116 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#115: Rachel Cruze was born the year her father, Dave Ramsey, filed for bankruptcy. During her childhood, she watched her parents transition from struggling and rebuilding from their bankruptcy, to becoming debt-free multimillionaires. Her dad went on to become the host of The Dave Ramsey Show, a money management radio show and podcast that reaches more than 12 million people per week. It’s central message is to budget carefully and avoid debt. Despite their success, the Ramseys committed to raising money-smart kids. They didn’t want their children to become lazy or entitled. Rachel paid for toys as a child. She partially paid for her car as a teenager. She worked throughout college. Rachel, now in her late 20’s, grew up to become an accomplished speaker and New York Times bestselling author. She and her father co-authored the book Smart Money, Smart Kids, which reached the number one spot on the NYTimes bestseller list. Her latest book, Love Your Life, Not Theirs, is also a mega-bestseller. In this episode, Rachel describes the lessons she learned about saving, spending, budgeting, debt and giving as the daughter of Dave Ramsey. We discuss “Instagram envy” -- the act of comparing your life to someone elses’ -- and how to avoid the traps of consumerism and materialism. Read the full show notes -- and download a FREE gratitude worksheet -- at http://affordanything.com/episode115 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#114: This week, I answer four questions about real estate investing from the audience. Joelle asks: I own a home outright on the West Coast. I’m thinking about taking out $100,000 from my home equity, and using this money to buy a rental property. I found a community out east where I can buy a property outright in cash for $100,000 in a good neighborhood. Should I pay cash for one house (via the home equity loan)? Or should I split this $100,000 into multiple down payments on many homes? Yasin asks: My wife and I are living on one income and investing the other. We save $60,000 per year. We’re looking at duplexes in Minnesota that cost $160,000 to $180,000. Our plan is to purchase a duplex, move into one unit, rent out the other, and aggressively pay off the mortgage in about 1.5 years. We’d move out and repeat this process until we have $7,000 per month in passive income, at which point we’d be financially independent. Should we pursue this plan? Or should are we playing it too safe? Should we buy more properties upfront, rather than waiting for two years between each purchase? Anonymous asks: I own four rental properties, each of which have an average rent of $1,350 per month. I purchased all of my properties within the past 24 months, and each one has been recently renovated. My goal is to own 20 rental properties. I’d like to make sure that I have adequate cash reserves, in case of emergencies. Each of my properties have insurance with a $5,000 deductible. How much money should I keep in cash reserves? What factors should I consider? Kim asks: I own one rental property. I recently moved into a single-family home in Scottsdale, Arizona, with the intention to live here for one year and then make this my second rental property. My mortgage is $1,500 per month, and I could collect rent of $2,250 per month – or more, if I Airbnb it. The neighborhood is booming; the housing here is appreciating at an astronomical rate. However, I’m concerned about the longevity of the plumbing in my current home, which was built in 1960s. I may have an expensive repair on the horizon. Here’s my question: Should I hold onto this property, despite the looming repair bills, and turn this into my second rental property? Or should I live in this home for two years and then sell it, cash out, and repay all my student loan and consumer debt? I hold a $60,000 student loan, $7,000 in vehicle loans, and $5,000 on a credit card. My goal to own many cash-flowing properties. Anonymous asks: A year ago, I relocated to Silicon Valley. I’m thinking about buying a townhouse-condo hybrid. I like the neighborhood and it suits my family’s needs. The property will become a rental in 5-7 years. It’s in a distressed area and could see a lot of potential appreciation. What loan should I consider, given that this property will become a rental within 5-7 years? I’m debating between a 7/1 ARM or a 30-year fixed rate mortgage. Also, should I redirect most of my income to paying off the principal as quickly as possible? There are two schools of thought on this: (1) build equity and use a HELOC to buy another property in 5-7 years, or (2) make only the minimum payments on your mortgage. What do you think? Tune in for the answers! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#113: Natalie Sisson was tired of the corporate world. She wanted freedom, adventure and fulfillment. In 2008, she quit her job and co-founded a tech company -- but soon she discovered that running a company felt a lot like having a day job. Two years later, she quit her own company in order to truly strike out on her own. Since 2010, Natalie has run an online business from her laptop while traveling the globe. She's visited 70 countries, living out of a suitcase while running a lucrative six-figure business. She also owns investment real estate in Portugal and New Zealand. In this interview, Natalie and I discuss: - The four phases of entrepreneurship: The Dreamer, The Hustler, The Superhero and The Freedomist. - Why Natalie transitioned from a steady paycheck to the financially volatile life of an entrepreneur. - How Natalie coped when her bank account dwindled to her last $17. - The major family crisis that reinforced why freedom and flexibility matter more than any job. - How she bought a property in a foreign country. - How she manages an Airbnb rental property from halfway around the world. - Why a minimalist attitude towards possessions is crucial for a traveler and entrepreneur. Enjoy! Visit http://affordanything.com/episode113 for more information Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#112: How can I convince my spouse to invest in low-fee index funds? How should my fiancé and I combine our finances? If I'd like to invest in rental properties, should I also buy stocks? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to tackle these audience questions and more. Thomas asks: My wife is suspicious of Vanguard. She questions how they could stay in business while charging low fees -- isn't there a catch? She's also reluctant about investing the majority of our money in a broad-market index fund like VTSAX. She'd prefer more diversification. Recently, we met with a major brokerage firm that charges a 1.75 percent management fee. How can I get my wife to see the detrimental effects of choosing this high-fee broker? Shy asks: My fiancé and I are getting married soon. We both live with our families at the moment; we'll form a new household after our wedding. Neither of us has ever lived independently before. How should we budget for this, given that we're not sure what expenses to expect? Also, any tips on how to commingle finances? Paris asks: I'd like to invest in rental properties. Should I still make stock market investments? Should I contribute to a 401k? Kristin asks: I've been DIY'ing my household's finances and taxes. So far, our situation has been simple. However, in a few years, my husband is going to retire. When this happens, we'd like to sell our home, perhaps invest in rental properties, and move either out-of-state or out-of-country. Our financial and tax situation is about to become a lot more complicated. I'd like to talk to a financial professional ... but whom should I choose? Should I hire a financial coach? a financial planner? an accountant? an investment advisor? someone else? We tackle these four questions on today's show. Enjoy! ______ Resources Mentioned: Thomas: Calculator - How do expenses impact fund returns? https://www.calcxml.com/do/inv12 Article - How a 1% fee could cost $590,000 in retirement savings https://www.nerdwallet.com/blog/investing/millennial-retirement-fees-one-percent-half-million-savings-impact/ Article - The Impact of Investment Costs https://investor.vanguard.com/investing/how-to-invest/impact-of-costs Shy: Article - The Anti-Budget http://affordanything.com/2013/03/05/anti-budget-or-80-20-budge/ Article - Three Methods for Co-Mingling a Couple's Finances https://www.thebalance.com/three-methods-for-co-mingling-a-couple-s-finances-453849 Kristin: FINRA Broker Check website CFP.net Guidevine (website) XY Planning Network Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#111: Tanja Hester and Mark Bunge used to have demanding but fulfilling careers as political and social cause consultants. While they loved the mission behind their work, they grew tired of the exhausting hours and grueling travel. Their home felt like a weekend crash pad. They had no time or energy to pursue outside passions like skiing, biking and volunteering. Six years ago, they read a book that changed the course of their lives. The book, How to Retire Early, set the couple on the path of financial independence. They moved from pricey Los Angeles to the more affordable North Lake Tahoe. They started automatically saving and investing huge chunks of their paycheck. They crafted detailed spreadsheets, plotting precisely how much they'd need to save before they could comfortably quit their jobs. Today, Tanja and Mark are newly-retired ... at the ages of 38 and 41. How did they progress towards early retirement so quickly? And what lessons would they share with anyone else who wants to escape the 9-to-5 grind? Find out in today's episode.   For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode111 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#110: Happy New Years! We're kicking off this year on a bright and cheerful note -- with a conversation about the impending recession! Yay! The U.S. stock market is at a peak, continuing its 9-year bull run. The markets have been rising since March 2009 without any major corrections or pullbacks. We are living in one of the longest periods of economic expansion in our nation's market history. That's worrisome. Speculators with short memories are popping champagne corks thinking the good times will last forever, while those of us who are students of history know that what goes up must come down. Trying to guess WHEN the next recession will happen is a waste of time. A more efficient use of time is to prepare ourselves such that when it does happen -- whenever that may be -- we are ready. How can we prepare for a recession? That's one of the four topics I cover in today's episode. Specifically, here's what we chat about in this first episode of 2018: Thayne asks: 1) Broadly -- What are the best investments overall if you're going into a recession? 2) Specifically -- What's the most recession-proof type of real estate investment? Aaron from Portland, Oregon asks: In Episode 96, you discussed the benefits of real estate investing -- but you didn't mention the use of leverage, nor did you mention that real estate is an inefficient market. Why not? Anna from the San Francisco Bay Area asks: I've moved out of my condo, which I'm renting out. But the rent only covers the mortgage (PITI) and HOA. Should I sell the condo? If so, I could use $250,000 in equity for an alternate investment, such as buying rental properties out-of-state. Enjoy! _____ Resources Mentioned: How to Calculate Cap Rate and Cash-on-Cash Return -- http://affordanything.com/2012/01/25/income-property   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#109: Happy holidays! I thought it would be nice to wrap up this year with a lighthearted holiday episode about the importance of keeping a positive attitude. Will Bowen, my guest on the final episode of 2017 (wow!), started a campaign to motivate people to complain less. He noticed that many people in his community said they wanted more stuff -- more possessions -- but they complained about what they already had. So he wondered if perhaps people could find happiness not by purchasing more, but rather by complaining less. In this episode, he discusses how we can move towards a complaint-free lifestyle. I thought this would be a cheerful, light interview to round out this year. Enjoy, and happy holidays! - Paula   For more information, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode109 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#108: Former financial advisor Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer audience questions about investing strategies, early retirement, and tax planning. Whitnee calls in with this: I'm 31, and my husband and I save half of our combined income. We've maxed out our H.S.A. accounts and we're getting an employer match in our 401k. We have $80,000 stashed as cash in a checking or low-yield savings account. We're paying nearly $2,000 per month for insurance policies, most of which is a whole life insurance policy. We have a rental property that cash flows $210 per month; we pocket $150 and use the other $60 as an extra principal payment. What should we do differently? How can we learn about investing? What funds should we focus on? Should we sell our rental property and invest the proceeds, or hold onto this? If we hold, should we focus on repaying the mortgage as quickly as possible? Kim asks about the 4 percent withdrawal rule in early retirement. When you're calculating your savings goal, do you need to account for the tax implications of this withdrawal? Any tips on how to optimize this? Susan says: I loved your explanation about how to use a Roth Conversion Ladder to avoid paying stiff early-withdrawal penalties in retirement. (Episode 94). Here's my follow-up question: How long should my money sit inside of a Traditional IRA before I convert it to a Roth IRA? We tackle these three questions on today's episode. Enjoy! _______________________________________ Resources Mentioned: Whitnee's question: Books: Investing Made Simple by Mike Piper Can I Retire? by Mike Piper The Simple Path to Wealth by JL Collins The Little Book of Common Sense Investing by John Bogle The Wealth Barber by David Chilton The Truth About Money by Ric Edelman Websites: Oblivious Investor by Mike Piper FINRA Broker Check Afford Anything article: I Don't Know How to Start Investing and I'm Afraid of Expensive Mistakes Kim's question: Two articles critiquing the 4 percent withdrawal rule: - https://www.americanfunds.com/ria/insights/can-i-retire-at-40.html?cid=sm_tw_50306 - https://www.cnbc.com/2014/11/03/the-4-retirement-rule-is-broken-and-heres-why.html Susan's question: Episode 94 - The Early Retirement Episode Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#107: Scott Harrison spent 10 years as a New York City nightclub promoter, partying until sunrise every morning and ingesting almost every substance imaginable. But when he was 28, he realized his life lacked meaning. "My tombstone might say, 'here's the guy who got thousands of people drunk,'" Harrison said. Feeling lost, he decided to volunteer for a medical charity in Liberia. Harrison spent the next year-and-a-half in West Africa, where he encountered people with diseases he'd never seen before -- such as cholera, typhoid, dysentery, and fatal cases of diarrhea and dehydration. He smelled the yellow-brown parasitic dirty water that millions of people were drinking. He discovered that unsafe, unclean drinking water is the world's leading cause of death. When he returned to New York City, he couldn't bring himself to sell expensive bottled water at nightclubs anymore. Instead, Harrison moved into a tiny closet and launched a nonprofit, Charity: Water. Today, Charity: Water has funded more than 24,000 water projects that have brought safe, clean drinking water to more than 7.3 million people. That's the good news. The bad news? There are still 663 million people without access to clean water. That's around double the population of the U.S. And water-borne diseases kill about 16,000 people each week, almost half of whom are children under age 5. There's still a long way to go. Today, Scott joins me on the podcast to talk about how he started and grew a major charitable organization. - How does a nightclub promoter with zero business experience launch a massive nonprofit organization? - What mistakes did he make? - How did he differentiate his organization from the thousands of other charities out there? - Who did he first hire? - What advice would he offer to anyone who's goal is to create a nonprofit? Learn the answers to these questions and more in this excellent episode with Scott Harrison, the founder of Charity: Water. _____ Resources Mentioned: Charity Water -- Short Film http://charitywater.org/thespringfilm Charity Water - Projects https://www.charitywater.org/projects World Health Organization - Drinking water fact sheet http://www.who.int/mediacentre/factsheets/fs391/en Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#106: How do you search for rental properties out-of-state? Should I offer a lease-option contract to my friends? How can I estimate repair and maintenance costs? And can you deep-dive into bookkeeping and taxes for rental real estate? I tackle these four questions in this episode of Ask Paula - real estate edition.   Saul from Salt Lake City asks: I'm converting the first floor of my home into a two-bedroom, one-bath apartment. My "hacked duplex" will soon be ready for my first tenant. Can you deep-dive into the taxes and accounting? How should I keep records of my expenses, and what should I file?   Terri asks: I'm analyzing real estate deals, but I'm getting stumped about how to estimate the repair, maintenance and capital expenditures. It seems like everyone has a different approach for calculating this. Should I estimate a percentage of the purchase price? A percentage of the rental income? A flat amount per unit? Or something else? How can I estimate costs accurately?   Kirsten from Madison, Wisconsin asks: My husband and I recently moved to Madison, but we've kept our old home in Oshkosh, Wisconsin. The home is worth $120,000, and we have a 15-year note. Our friends would like to purchase that home, but their credit is bad. They'll need two years to improve their credit situation.   We're considering renting to them through a lease-option contract. Our mortgage is $950 per month; we're thinking of charging them $1,100 - $1,200 per month on a rent-to-own lease. Do you think this is a good idea?   Chrissy from North Vancouver, Canada asks: I loved your description in Episode 92 about building a team in a different state. Could you please further flesh out the steps that you use when you're searching for a rental property in a different state? I tackle these four questions in today's episode. Enjoy!     For more, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode106  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#105: A.J. Jacobs is the Editor-at-Large of Esquire Magazine and the New York Times bestselling author of multiple books. His three TED Talks have collectively garnered more than three million views. He describes himself as "a father of three, husband of one, and cousin to millions." And he's probably your cousin. Twice removed. AJ joins me on this episode to chat about motivation, habits, and living life as an experiment. Here are some of the stories we cover: - Why AJ divulged his entire sexual history to actress Scarlett Johansson. - How AJ successfully and frequently changes his behaviors and habits. - AJ's experimental approach to life. - Why the adage "fake it 'til you make it" -- or rather, "fake it 'til you become it" -- is essential for developing habits. - How gratitude at extreme levels can become a mindset game-changer. - How healthy living nearly killed him. - AJ's quest to demonstrate the idea that we're all related -- and throw the world's largest family reunion. Resources Mentioned: A.J.'s Books: It's All Relative My Life as an Experiment A Year of Living Biblically Drop Dead Healthy The Know-It-All A.J.'s TED Talks: My Year of Living Biblically https://www.ted.com/talks/a_j_jacobs_year_of_living_biblically How Healthy Living Nearly Killed Me https://www.ted.com/talks/aj_jacobs_how_healthy_living_nearly_killed_me The World's Largest Family Reunion https://www.ted.com/talks/aj_jacobs_the_world_s_largest_family_reunion_we_re_all_invited   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#104: This week, I answer 4 questions about quitting a depressing job, learning how to ask probing questions, saving for a downpayment, and more. Edward asks: How can I learn from other people around me? I'm 28, and my wife and I have some money that we'd like to invest. We know people who've had both successes and losses in the investing world, but when I ask them questions, they tend to become a little more private and shy away. How can I encourage them to open up, so that we can learn from them? Sara asks: For the last 2 years, my husband and I have lived on one income and used the other to pay off our student loans. We also saved $40,000 to make a downpayment on a house. We need to move to England for 2 years, and we'll buy a house when we return to the U.S. In the meantime, what should we do with the $40,000 downpayment that we've saved? We'd hate to see the money in a savings account, but it doesn’t seem wise to invest in index funds. What should we do? Britney asks: I’m at a job that I hate. I’d like to start a small business and find other part-time work so that I can quit my job. I’m planning to move in with my in-laws, so my cost-of-living will be low. Do you recommend that I start a blog as a side hustle, so that I can pay the bills after I quit my job? A listener in the Midwest asks: I’m a 37-year-old single woman living in the Midwest. I live in a one-bedroom with my 5-year-old son. I bring home $3,800 per month. My rent is $1,150 and my son's preschool is $700 per month. I have $40,000 in retirement savings and a $3,000 emergency fund. I don’t want to be making rent payments in retirement. Should I take $20,000 from my 401k to make a downpayment on a rental property? ____ I answer these questions in today's episode. Enjoy! For more, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode104  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#103: On today’s show, I'm sharing this random smattering of lessons on money and life.⠀ ⠀ 1) Simplify everything.⠀ 2) Risk = Probability x Magnitude.⠀ 3) Curate.⠀ 4) Never delay gratification.⠀ 5) Know your net worth, relative to your lifetime earnings.⠀ 6) Don't half-ass anything. (Whole-ass a few things.)⠀ 7) When you're not at work, don't be at work.⠀ 8) Yes, and.⠀ 9) Money can't make you happy, but a lack of money can make you unhappy.⠀ 10) Every conversation about money is really a conversation about values.⠀ 11) The less you try, the better.⠀ 12) Work with your nature, not against it. ⠀ 13) The thing should be its own reward.⠀ 14) Practice radical self-reliance.⠀ 15) Achieve being through doing.⠀ 16) What is stated, happens.⠀  ⠀ I elaborate on each of these in today’s episode. In addition, I’m also sharing my mini-keynote from FinCon on the importance of authenticity and passion in online business.   Enjoy!   You can subscribe to show updates at podcast.affordanything.com -- just throw your email address into that big box above-the-fold. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#102: This week, I'm back to answering questions posed by listeners of the podcast. An anonymous listener asks: Should we continue to rent out our home, or should we sell it? We bought a home in California but have since moved to New York and have been renting there. After all expenses on the rental are accounted for, we receive $150/mo in profit. We estimate that even with repairs factored in, we'll still be in the positive. However, my husband thinks it's better to sell the property and invest the profits. I think we're better off keeping the house and having someone else pay the mortgage. Who has the better idea? What would you do?   Jessica asks: My husband and I are about to relocate from the mid-west to Colorado Springs, and we anticipate making $80,000 from the sale of our house. Should we take the proceeds from the sale and put it toward our next home? Or should we put that money in index funds instead? For context, we plan on buying either a duplex or triplex, or doing a fix-and-flip like we did with our current home. Terri asks: How can I find a good real estate agent - especially one who is good with short sales and foreclosures? What are the signs of a good real estate agent? Laura asks: My husband and I currently own a three-family home (in which we live on the bottom floor), but in light of getting a new job that requires me to commute an hour each way, we are thinking about either converting the three-family home into three condo units and selling them, or buying another house and keeping the three-family home as a rental. There's another factor to consider, though: the property is located on a peninsula, and with sea levels rising, we don't think it has long-term potential (in terms of equity). What should we do?   For more, visit the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode102  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#101: Robin Dreeke is former head of the FBI’s Counterintelligence Behavioral Analysis Program. His primary role, at the time, was to thwart foreign spies and  recruit American spies. That's not an easy task. To accomplish this, Dreeke needed to gain people's trust -- even when they had no reason to trust him. He spent years developing and testing systems on how to develop trust with others in high-stakes situations. Today, he joins us on this podcast to describe The Code of Trust, a set of practices that he developed during his days as a high-ranking counterintelligence expert.   This system is based on 5 simple principles: Suspend Your Ego Be Nonjudgmental Honor Reason Validate Others Be Generous   Tune in to hear him elaborate on each principal, and discuss how this applies to anyone who wants stronger, more trustworthy relationships at work and home. For more information, including links to resources mentioned in this episode, visit http://affordanything.com/episode101  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#100: Over a year-and-a-half and two million plus downloads later, the Afford Anything podcast has hit another awesome milestone: the 100th episode! To celebrate, I recorded this one live from Ecuador with my good friend Brandon, otherwise known as the Mad FIentist. If you've been a listener since the early days, you may remember Brandon from episode #7. He was the first guest to appear on the podcast, and I'm thrilled to have him back on for round two! In this episode, we focus on life after financial freedom: What projects has Brandon been working on? What are the biggest lessons he's learned from being FI so far? How does he maintain motivation to get things done now that money isn't an issue? What does a typical day look like for Brandon? How Brandon's wife became a FIentist after some initial resistance. Why full-time travel after FI didn't work out for him and more! Enjoy, and thanks for listening! For show notes, go to http://affordanything.com/episode100  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#99: Thirteen years ago, Joshua Dorkin's friends teased him about starting a website that seemed to have no future. "I would get calls from my buddies who would literally call me on my cell phone [and say] 'Hey Josh, we just walked past a penny on the ground. We were thinking about picking it up and mailing it to you." At the time, Dorkin had just launched BiggerPockets, a then-nascent website about real estate investing. "I was working a full-time job making no money as a teacher," Dorkin says, "... and then [I] quit that job, reliable income, to blindly create this platform for other people. And I was helping other people get rich, and I was broke." Dorkin spent the next 8 years working mostly as a one-man operation as he tried to monetize a fledgling website. "We were struggling and scrapping by on every AdSense check that we could collect," Dorkin says. "The business really wasn't making serious money for probably getting close to a decade." The story has a happy ending. Today, BiggerPockets has grown to more than 870,000 members. The podcast has almost 250 episodes and the blog features more than 8,100 articles. In today's episode, I have a heart-to-heart with BiggerPockets founder Joshua Dorkin about the blood, sweat and tears that's required to start a successful online business. What lessons did he learn along the way? What regrets does he hold? And what advice would he share with other aspiring online entrepreneurs? We don't talk about real estate investing in today's episode. Instead, Joshua and I focus on the harsh realities of growing an digital empire. Enjoy!   You can find more information in the show notes at http://podcast.affordanything.com/episode99 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#98: How much money should you invest in a side hustle or side business? How do you know if your side hustle idea is viable? What if you want to start 5 or 6 side businesses? Should you lump these together under a common business umbrella? Or should you separate them out? These are the questions about side hustles -- asked by listeners Adalia and Brionna -- that I answer in today's episode. My friend Joe Saul-Sehy from the Stacking Benjamins podcast joins me to chime in with his views on building side businesses, as well. Joe and I also answer two non-side-business-related questions, as well. Skye asks: -- You talk about saving 50 percent of your income. What exactly does this mean? Steph asks: -- I have $10,000 in credit card debt and $48,000 in student loans at a 5 percent interest rate. I have a $1,000 emergency fund and $32,000 in retirement funds. My dad is willing to give me money to repay my student loans; should I accept this? And if so, should I put this money towards student loans or retirement? We tackle these questions on today's episode. Enjoy! Links and more resources can be found in the show notes at http://podcast.affordanything.com/episode98 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

There are more heroes than villains in this world. We have seen a tremendous outpouring of love and support today. Please support the cause that's calling you, whether it's supporting the victims of the Las Vegas shootings, or disaster relief in Puerto Rico, or ongoing humanitarian crises that don't make headlines. Please support the victims of the Las Vegas massacre at https://www.gofundme.com/dr2ks2-las-vegas-victims-fund Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#97: How can you be awesome at your job? That's the question that today's guest, Pete Mockaitis, and I tackle on the latest Afford Anything podcast episode. Pete hosts one of iTunes' top 10 career podcasts, called -- appropriately -- How to Be Awesome at Your Job. In typical nerd fashion, I launch our interview by asking him: "What is the metric by which 'awesome' is determined?" Here are a few other questions that I hurl his way: How to Get a Raise: Imagine that you enjoy your job; you don't want to quit. But they're not paying you what you're worth. You've asked for a raise, several times, and they've said no. What do you do? Angle for a Promotion? Or Focus on a Side Hustle? Let's assume that you're employed full-time, and your goal is to make more money. What's more effective: [Option 1] Focus on your full-time profession, putting in the extra hours to angle for a promotion? -- OR - [Option 2] Be an average employee and focus your excess time and energy on building a side hustle? Tough it Out, Then Retire Early? Or Not?: You feel ambivalent about your job, but it pays well. Should you pivot to an alternate career path, even if this causes an income drop? Or should you milk the big paycheck for 10 years, save and invest like crazy during that time, and escape into an early retirement?   What nuggets of wisdom does Pete share in today's episode? Here are six takeaways: #1: If you want to be awesome at your job, focus on these six areas: 1. Be present. 2. Be deliberate about how you direct your time, energy and attention. 3. Be thoughtful. 4. Communicate well. 5. Build strong relationships. 6. Manage your career. (We dive deeper into these points -- especially number two! -- in this episode.) #2: Apply the 80/20 rule to your decisions. Ask yourself: - What are the 80 percent of great results coming from 20 percent of my efforts? - What are the 80 percent of negative things that I don't like? What focused 20 percent of efforts can get rid of 80 percent of the negative? #3: "Wastefulness comes from inefficient methods in pursuing things." #4: Invent what people want. Not what you think they should want. #5: Learn the 2 questions that improve every decision: What must be true for this to be a good decision? How can I test that? #6: How can you find happiness at work? You'll need to be satisfied with RED: rewards, experience and demands. Rewards - Your compensation, security, advancement potential, and your pride in the organization and its activities. Experience - Your day-to-day experience at work, appreciation from others, enriching and psychologically safe environment, compelling tasks, sense of purpose, learning and growth, and autonomy. Demands - What are total hours needed and the flexibility of those hours? Find more at http://affordanything.com/episode97 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#96: Today I tackle 4 real estate questions that come from the listeners. Chris, age 25, says: Over the next 30 years, I'd like to acquire 15 rental properties. Then, at age 55, my wife and I can retire and travel. To begin, I'd like to buy a duplex, live in one unit and rent the other on Airbnb. Once I gain some equity and save enough for another downpayment, I'd like to purchase another duplex, move in, and repeat this process. However, I'm reluctant to get started for one reason. There's a decent chance that I'll need to move out-of-state within about a year or two. I don't want to be an out-of-town Airbnb host. Should I follow this plan, even though there's a good chance I might move away soon? __ The next caller, who remains anonymous, says: I love your rental property income reports; they give me a great understanding of your numbers. But you have economies of scale on your side. Your payments to your accountant, attorney, bookkeeping software, etc., are spread out across 7 rental units. When I start investing, I'll only have one unit. How well would your worst-performing property fare if it was your *only* property, and you had no other economies of scale? __ The third caller, "Anonymous from Orlando," says: I own my house free-and-clear, and I'd like to buy another one. Should I take out a conventional mortgage on my second home? Should I cash-out refinance the equity in my first home? Or should I open a HELOC? __ Finally, our last caller asks: I'm interested in rental property investing, but I don't want to deal with any hassles. Should I use a turnkey company? Tune in to find out the answers! - Paula Find resources to things mentioned in this episode at http://affordanything.com/episode96 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#95: J. David Stein used to manage billions of dollars. He retired at age 46. Now that he's retired, he faces a different challenge: How should he invest his own money? What investing philosophy should he follow in his own life? And what can we learn from that? Stein, who now hosts a podcast called Money for the Rest of Us, joins me on today's show to talk about his big-picture investing ideas. For a list of my takeaways, go to http://affordanything.com/episode95 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#94: Early retirement? Yes please. This week, I answer questions from the audience community around early retirement planning, health savings and debt pay-off. I'm interested in early retirement. How can I avoid early withdrawal penalties? How does early retirement impact the 4 Percent Rule? Should I use an HRA or an HSA? How do I open a Roth IRA? If you’re into early retirement, don’t miss today’s episode. For complete resources and show notes, go to http://affordanything.com/episode94 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#93: Do you enjoy spending time alone? Does your inner monologue chatter constantly? When you were a student, did you sometimes stay quiet even when you knew the correct answer? Do you avoid confrontation? Does small talk bore you? Have people told you that you're "too intense" or that you "get deep quickly?" Do you live inside your head? Do people see you as a good listener? Do you rarely interrupt others? Are you better at writing thoughts than speaking them? Are you good at focusing for long periods on tasks that you're really interested in, but totally checked out of tasks that bore you or that feel superficial? If so, you might be an introvert. And today's episode might be for you. If you'd like to learn how to thrive in any pursuit -- like starting a business, traveling the world or becoming an investor -- tune in to learn how to use your natural tendencies to your advantage. For more information, including links to resources mentioned in this episode, go to http://affordanything.com/episode93 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#92: If you're interested in real estate investing, and if you've wondered how to assemble an all-star team, today's episode is for you. I'm hosting another edition of Ask Paula, in which I tackle three audience-submitted questions about building a team as a real estate investor. Salome from Cincinnati asks: Who are the people I'll need on my real estate team? How much will I spend in paying them? And how can I find them? Doug from Louisiana asks: I've saved $20,000 as the downpayment on a rental property. Should I use this money? Or should I look for a loan that can cover a larger chunk of the financing? Also, how should I look for a tenant? Should I handle this myself, or hire a property manager? Patricia from California asks: I live in Bay Area. I cannot buy a house here. I want to buy a rental property in Baton Rouge, Louisiana, and I've identified the specific property/neighborhood in which I want to invest. How can I start assembling a team from out-of-state? For a full list of resources from this episode, visit http://affordanything.com/episode92 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#91: Grow the gap between your income and your expenses: How to tackle the 4 biggest expenses in the average American household budget. Also, I share non-obvious tips on how to trim back on these costs. Enjoy! Paula For more details on this presentation, go to http://affordanything.com/episode91 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#90: Curious about real estate investing? I'm rocking the microphone solo on today's episode, tackling the rental property questions that you -- the listeners -- have asked. Rachel from the Ozarks asks: I'm inspired to start investing in real estate. I live in the Ozarks region, and the cap rates around here are fantastic. However, the online reviews for local property management companies are consistently terrible. What should I do if I can't find a good property manager? Daan from Malaysia asks: I'm a Dutch national who plans to be a global nomad for the next 10-15 years. I live in Malaysia at the moment, and I plan to continually travel internationally for my work. Many people in Asia are investing in real estate; do you have any recommendations for choosing investments abroad? A caller who wants to stay anonymous asks: I live in Denver and I'm tired of paying rent. I'd like to buy a house and eventually collect rental income from it, as well. But I'm having trouble saving enough money for a downpayment. Should I just give up? What should I do? Tom asks: I own land free-and-clear. Should I build on that land? Or should I buy a property that already exists? Finally, I tell the story of my most recent bout of lifestyle inflation. It involves sleeping in the back of my car. :-) Enjoy! - Paula For more information, visit the website at http://affordanything.com/episode90 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#89: Imagine you’re financially secure. You have enough money to support yourself, your family and pursue your dreams. You’ll need to continue working, but it’s fulfilling work with a reasonable schedule. What would you do with both your time and money? Next, imagine you’re financially independent. You DON’T need to work anymore. Your investments create enough money to support yourself and your family. What would you do? Okay, let's shake things up. Imagine you visit your doctor, who tells you that you only have 5-10 years to live. You’ll never feel sick, and you’ll have no advance notice of the moment of your death. Your financial position is the same as it is today. What would you do? Now imagine the same scenario as before -- you have 5-10 years to live -- but in this scenario, you have unlimited funds. What would you do? These are 4 of the 11 questions about money and life that I asked a crowd of 100+ people at the World Domination Summit. I share the rest of the questions on today's episode. Get Rich Slowly founder J.D. Roth also joins me on this episode to discuss building a fulfilling life. For more, visit http://affordanything.com/episode89 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#88: Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I answer 4 questions from the Afford Anything community. We chat about how to control lifestyle inflation, how to break up with a financial planner, how to invest your first $10,000, and whether or not sector-specific or theme-specific funds are a good idea. #1: Laura is transitioning to a new job, and she's discovered that her new responsibilities require some lifestyle inflation. She needs work-appropriate clothing, for example; she can't wear leggings everyday anymore. She and her husband are going to need two cars, instead of one. And she's ordering restaurant delivery more often, because she doesn't have time to cook. She recognizes that lifestyle inflation is unavoidable, and she's curious: what's legitimate and what's not? What's the difference between healthy lifestyle inflation vs. over-the-top upscaling? #2: Nakia wants to "divorce" her financial planner. But she's not sure how to break the news gently. Her financial planner is a friend and neighbor; their kids are friends. What should she say? #3: Megan and her husband both want to retire early. They have saved $10,000, which they'd like to invest in the Vanguard Total Stock Market Index Fund, Admiral Shares (VTSAX). This fund requires a minimum of $10,000 as an initial investment. Should they put this money into a taxable brokerage account, so that they can access this in early retirement? Or should they save more and then each open an IRA? #4: Nancy is a single mom with a five-year-old son. She recently transitioned into a lower-stress lifestyle, but as a result, her income dropped significantly. She's a beginner investor without much money, and she's curious about Motif Investing, a platform that focuses on sector-specific and thematic investments. Would this platform be right for her? Enjoy!  - Paula Resources Mentioned: FINRA website -- Broker Check https://brokercheck.finra.org MadFientist article on how to access retirement funds early http://www.madfientist.com/how-to-access-retirement-funds-early Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#87: A week and a half ago, I flew to Portland for the World Domination Summit -- a conference with an admittedly eyebrow-raising title. The conference is hosted by Chris Guillebeau, the New York Times best-selling author of multiple books, including The Art of Non-Conformity. He was also a previous guest on this podcast. I've wanted to check out WDS for years, so I was thrilled when Chris asked me to give a presentation there. Then he mentioned that my presentation should be three hours long, which sounded terrifying. But that's all the more reason to say yes. I choose my own eyebrow-raising topic, How to Afford Anything, and ... promptly procrastinated on planning for several months. Yeah, that definitely happened. #guilty Then, at the beginning of July, I flew into a frenzy, called a few friends for advice, scanned over several books, watched multiple talks for inspiration, and isolated myself in a remote, empty house for several days. (Past guest Cal Newport would call this a "deep work retreat.") The result was a half-day workshop that synthesized many of the ideas about money that I've formed after six years of nonstop reading, writing, talking and thinking about this topic. In today's episode, I share the first part of this presentation. Today's episode focuses on myths, assumptions and limiting beliefs that we hold around money, work and life. This is the first of a three-part series. In episodes 89 and 91, I'll share the second and third parts of the talk. You can catch the slides (and watch this as a video) on http://YouTube.com/affordanything Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#86: The real estate questions keep coming in, so today I’m answering questions from three Afford Anything listeners: Heather is ready to buy her first rental property. She wants to acquire about one house per year, following a buy-and-hold strategy. Salome and her husband are renting out an unused room in our house on Airbnb. We're interested in venturing into buying rental properties later. Then Caren talks about coming across several real estate investing clubs, or memberships, in which the organization pulls together a list of various contractors and property managers. What are Paula’s thoughts and experiences with these types of things? For a full list of show notes and resources, visit http://affordanything.com/episode86 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#85: Like many people, Nick Loper used to work a full-time job that didn't excite him. Unlike most people, Loper decided to escape his uninspiring work life. First, he launched a shoe-comparison website that began collecting side income. Over time, this side project grew increasingly profitable, until -- finally -- he thought he could run this website full-time. Loper quit his job. That's when all hell broke loose. Within days, Loper's website lost 80 percent of its search traffic and advertising revenue. Loper found himself both unemployed and without a viable business. He spent several months correcting course, making his business solvent again. More importantly, he learned the importance of creating *multiple streams of income.* Loper launched multiple small side businesses in order to diversify his income. Some succeeded; others quietly fizzled out. He made enough 'small bets' that he wound up with a handful of winners. Today, his income comes from a cacophony of different sources. He's diversified. Loper joins us on this week's episode to explain how to develop a "side hustle," a small micro-business that provides a supplemental source of income.     Here are some of his suggestions: #1: Tap the Sharing Economy We've heard about Uber, Lyft, Airbnb, Instacart and TaskRabbit -- popular 'sharing economy' platforms that allow people to turn their car, home and/or time into extra cash. But beyond those obvious examples, there are plenty of sharing-economy websites that niche down into higher-paying specializations, such as: http://Turo.com -- A website in which you can rent your car; no driving required. You make money from the asset, not from your time. http://EatWith.com -- A dinner-party-hosting website ideal for people who are skilled cooks, chefs, or party hosts, but don't necessarily have the capital to start their own restaurant. "Each of these is a little mini-search-engine," Loper says. 2. Freelancing / Expertise-Based Businesses The stronger your expertise, the more money you can potentially earn. After all, you're not just selling your time; you're selling your *knowledge.* Websites that help people profit from their expertise include: http://TheExpertInstitute.com -- A website where attorneys look for expert witnesses. http://Thumbtack.com -- A website for service professionals, from CAD designers to nutritionists to CPR training. http://Wyzant.com -- A website for expert tutors in every subject from calculus to piano. http://Clarity.fm -- A website for on-demand coaching or consulting from experts. 3. E-Commerce Loper outlines two models for selling physical products online:      - **The Retail Arbitrage Model:** Under this model, you find and flip items online. - **The Private Label Model:** Under this model, you design, manufacture, package and import your own product. Loper dives into details about all of these side hustle opportunities -- and also describes the biggest mistakes that he sees entrepreneurs and wantrapraneurs make -- in today's episode. Enjoy! ________________ Resources Mentioned: Side Hustle Nation http://www.sidehustlenation.com 200 Sharing Economy Platforms http://www.sidehustlenation.com/sharing-economy-make-extra-money Steve Chou episode of the Afford Anything Podcast http://podcast.affordanything.com/make-100000-year-online-steve-chou-wife-quit-job Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#84: This week, I tackle your questions with my good friend, recovering financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy. Here's what we answer: 1. I'm asking for a friend -- no, really, I'm asking for a friend! My friends are married and buried. They're a married couple, buried in $500,000 of debt. Some is federal student loans, some is private student loans, and some is credit card debt. They're paying the minimum on their student loans, with the hope that these loans will be forgiven after 25 years. They're also saving money in their retirement accounts. Is this a terrible plan? Should they stop saving for retirement while they wipe out their student loans? If so, how can I convince them? 2. My husband and I are both 30 and live in Ft. Collins, Colorado. We don't plan on having children. We know that long-term care insurance gets more expensive as you age. Should we buy this insurance now? Or can we self-insure for this through adequate retirement/investment funds? 3. I own my home free-and-clear, and I'm buying a second home. Should I take a cash-out refinance on my primary home? Get a conventional loan from the bank? Or something else? 4. My wife, 4 children and I live in the San Francisco Bay Area. We have $5,000 in credit card debt, which we've paid down from $30,000 in the last two years. We owe $20,000 on a minivan and $18,000 on student loans, both of which have 2-3 percent interest rates. We have two IRA's, one Traditional and one Roth. I also have about $20,000 in my company's non-matching 401(k). Should I focus my future investments on Traditional or Roth accounts? What accounts should I use when saving for my children's college funds? 5.  I'm curious about your own investments, Paula. What's under the hood? __ Thank you to everyone who left a comment after last week's show. I'll talk more about these amazing responses at the end of Episode 85 (next week's episode.) For now -- enjoy today's show! Thanks! Show notes can be found at http://affordanything.com/episode84 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#83: Hey. It’s time we talked. I’ve made many tough decisions in my business. I’ve said “no” to thousands of pitches, turned away countless advertising requests, and made difficult choices about content and tone. And sometimes I don’t know whether or not I’ve made the right choice. Today’s podcast episode is a painfully personal one. I open up my mind, explaining exactly how I make decisions about how to lead this online community. I’m frank about the doubts I hold and the choices I’ve questioned in hindsight. I’m blunt about the things I still do not know; the ethical quandaries that plague me. Today’s episode, perhaps more than any episode I’ve ever done, comes from my heart. I hope you enjoy it. ---------- Have thoughts/concerns/suggestions regarding what I discussed in this episode? Feel free to reach out on the site (http://affordanything.com/episode83), Twitter (@affordanything), Instagram (@paulapant), or YouTube (https://www.youtube.com/affordanything).  Also, note to new listeners: I HIGHLY suggest you don't start with this episode! There's way more valuable content in the interviews and Ask Paula episodes that I've previously published. You can check those past episodes out on iTunes, or on the site: http://podcast.affordanything.com/listen Thanks! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#82: Welcome to another Ask Paula episode! This week, I answer three real estate questions: #1: What criteria do you use when you’re shopping for an investment property? What qualities make you say, “heck yeah I’m buying this!!” — and what qualities make you say, “No way!” #2: I enjoy renting my personal home, but I still dream of investing in rental properties. Does it make sense to buy a rental property, even while I’m still a renter myself? #3: I’m a 45-year-old actress, and my income probably won’t qualify me for conventional bank financing for an investment property. But I already own a property with a lot of equity. Should I tap that in order to buy another rental? Or look for a private loan? Enjoy!   For more Ask Paula episodes, visit http://podcast.affordanything.com/tag/ask-paula Want your question answered? Leave a message here: http://www.affordanything.com/voicemail  Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#81: Jenny Blake used to have an enviable job. As a Career Development manager at Google, she enjoyed the perks of a Silicon Valley life, plus the satisfaction of helping people everyday. She co-founded Google's Career Guru Program, and helped countless Google employees find their right career "fit." But, ironically, Blake sensed that her own career wasn't on the right track. So she took a brave plunge that few would dare: Blake quit Google, packed her bags, and moved from California to New York in search of a new life. She launched her own business. She began publishing books. Today, she joins us on this podcast to share the knowledge she's accumulated over many years about how *anyone* can pivot into a new career or direction. If you're feeling stuck in your job, and you're thinking about making a major life change -- regardless of whether you'd like to try a new industry, retire early, or start your own business -- you might want to hear some of Blake's advice. Enjoy! http://podcast.affordanything.com/episode81 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#80: Chris, age 30, makes $200,000 per year and saves 50 percent of his income. What accounts should he use in order to maximize his tax benefits? Dee, age 39, is getting tired of apartment living. She found a great neighborhood in which she'd like to own a home, and she's saving for a 20 percent downpayment. But she's nervous about the high cost of home maintenance. How can she deal with this? Chelsea just moved into a new house with her husband. He purchased the house outright, in cash, and she wants to pay him so that she can share in the home's ownership and equity. But she also has student loan and credit card debt. Should she make progress towards all three of these goals (build equity, pay off  student loans, pay off credit cards) at the same time? Or should she prioritize one -- and if so, which one? Charlene is curious: what's so great about Vanguard? Why do Joe and I like the Vanguard Target Date funds so much, as compared to funds from another brokerage? (Note: neither of us have any financial relationship with Vanguard, other than being an ordinary, run-of-the-mill customer.) Alma is looking for a term life insurance policy that'll protect her if she passes away outside of the United States. Where and how can she find this? My friend Joe Saul-Sehy, a former financial planner and host of the award-winning Stacking Benjamins podcast, joins me today while we tackle these 5 questions ... and somehow, also we go on a tangent about Burger King. It's a whopper of an episode. :-) Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/80-life-insurance-vanguard-home-costs-goals-more/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#79: When Laura Roeder was 22, she quit her job to become a full-time freelancer. She earned $30,000 in her first year as a freelancer; $60,000 in her second year. Ten years later -- (Laura is now 32) -- her company earns $4 million in annual revenue. (Can I repeat that? Did I bury the lede? *Laura went from making $30,000 per year to owning 100% of a company that earns $4 million per year.* And she did this within a decade. Oh, and she also had a baby.) (Like, whoa.) Laura is the founder and CEO of a software company called Edgar, which provides social media automation for entrepreneurs and small businesses. In this interview, I ask Laura (sophisticated) questions such as "How the f**k did you make the leap from freelancer to multi-million-dollar company owner?" Here are some of the insights that she shares: #1: You have nothing to lose. When Laura quit her job, she conquered her fears by reminding herself: "Hey, worst-case-scenario, I work an hourly retail job for awhile if I can't find any clients." Sure, that might suck. But is the worst-case-scenario *so bad* that it's a deal-breaker? When Laura realized that the worst-case-scenario was something that she could live with, she proceeded full-speed ahead. #2: Cut the cord. When Laura transitioned from freelancing to consulting (her intermediate step before starting Edgar), she knew that if she maintained her client base, she wouldn't be motivated to grow her consulting business. So she cut the cord. She dropped all of her clients, including one extremely lucrative contract, in order to motivate herself. #3: Look for what's next. Laura's transition follows a sensible narrative arc: employee, freelancer, consultant, software company founder. Each step led to the next opportunity. Freelancing turned into consulting, which turned into a kernel of an idea for a software  company. She couldn't have predicted, at age 22, where she'd be in 10 years. She simply proceeded one step at a time. ____ Listen to Laura describe her story -- and share advice for people who want to start companies and/or work remotely -- in today's episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#78: Imagine that you're looking for a rental property. It's a warm Saturday afternoon, and you decide to cruise through a few open houses in the area. Your autonomously-driving electric vehicle pulls into the driveway. Your wifi-enabled contact lenses automatically register the property's details: square footage, year of construction, sales history, tax assessment, price-to-rent ratio, average neighborhood occupancy rates, and multiple cap rate estimates. As you walk through the property, your contact lenses display the digital history of every item -- the furnace, dishwasher, windows -- keeping you up-to-date with the full installation and service history of every home component. Welcome to the future of real estate investing. What's looming on the horizon? How will technology -- including augmented reality and 3D printing -- affect the way we analyze and purchase rental properties? I chat about this topic, and more, in today's podcast episode. This week, I feature another Ask Paula episode, answering questions that this community has submitted. This week's theme is real estate, and I've invited Will to join me as we tackle your questions about rental investing. Enjoy! For more resources, visit the website at http://affordanything.com/episode78 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#77: “Have you ever tried to stop-peeing midstream? It’s like trying to put spray cheese back in the can. The damage has been done, and the only thing left to do is try to enjoy yourself.” That’s a quote from a deleted chapter in a book written by (in my opinion) one of the funniest bloggers on the internet, Geraldine DeRuiter. Geraldine is an ‘accidental’ travel writer. Nine years ago, she found herself laid-off from a copywriting job and decided, “screw it, I’m gonna travel.” She’s since visited around 30 countries, and her resulting travel blog, The Everywhereist, describes itself as “an award-winning cry for help.” For more, go to http://affordanything.com/episode77 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#76: This week, my buddy Joe Saul-Sehy joins me to answer another round of listener-submitted questions. A listener from California asks: My husband and I will be inheriting money, which we plan to invest in index funds. We believe that our inheritance will eventually make us financially independent. However, I feel guilt about the fact that this money is unearned. Do you have any thoughts on this? Eric wants to know: Should he stick with a high-deductible health insurance plan if he's starting a family?   Hailey says: I just graduated from college; I'm making $30,000 per year, but I only work 30 hours per week, so I have time to work on side projects. I'm working on two small businesses, and also interested in buying a rental property. Where should I focus my time and dollars? Enjoy! For links and information to the resources mentioned, like Glassdoor.com, Salary.com, and Paula's article: Should You Pay Cash for a Car? -- visit http://affordanything.com/episode76 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#75: In her early 40's, Jen lived in a converted garage, buried in credit card debt and scrounging for spare change. She was the type of person who'd join her friends at a restaurant for dinner , order nothing except tap water, and fill up on the complimentary bread basket. She used duct-tape to repair her shoes. Her "splurges" consisted of buying new windshield wipers.   Despite her struggles, Jen believed that pursuing wealth was icky. She'd internalized negative social attitudes towards money, such as: Money isn't important. People are. Rich people are lucky / gross / shallow. You can't make money doing [insert your-dream-here]. You have to attend a good college to make money. Money is out of my reach. It's lonely at the top. Who has that kind of money? He/she is only about the money. Those negative attitudes, Jen says, were holding her back. So she created a more positive script -- such as "I'm good at making money," and "Money is a tool that helps me live my best life." This attitude shift made all the difference. In today's interview, Jen describes her journey from broke to badass, and she explains how everyone can become more of a maverick at making money. Enjoy! Resources mentioned in this episode can be found at http://affordanything.com/episode75   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#74: Former financial planner and friend of the show, Joe Saul-Sehy from Stacking Benjamins, joins me to answer the following listener questions: Kicking off today's episode, Nicky asks: I'm young and healthy. My car is old and not-worth-much. And my personal property isn't exactly fancy-pants. Do I *really* need health, auto and property insurance? Or can I drop these insurances and save the money? _______ Next, Shelbi says: I'm 26, recently earned a graduate school diploma, and I'm taking the first steps into my career. I take home $2,600 in monthly income, and my cost-of-living is $1,900 per month. I maintain a $5,500 emergency fund and invest 20% of my income into a Vanguard Target Date Retirement account, with a Roth tax setup. I'll get an employer match after I've spent another year on the job. My employer also contributes $100 per month into my H.S.A. account, which is the only money that I'm putting into that fund. I hold $49,000 in student loans (yikes!!) at 6.8% interest. I pay $400/mo towards this debt, which is included in my $1,900 cost-of-living and is more than the minimum required. My goal is financial independence and early retirement. She asks these three questions: -- Should she lower the 20% she's putting into her 403b in order to max out her Roth IRA and HSA, instead? -- Should she prioritize repaying her student loan debt over retirement savings? -- Should she schedule a private coaching call with me? (Surprisingly, I said no. Tune into the episode to find out why.) _______ Next, Nicole asks: What types of investments can you hold inside a self-directed IRA? If I open one of these accounts, what custodian should I use? _______ Finally, our friend anonymous asks: What's the deal with bond investing? What's a coupon payment? A maturity date? WTF? Can you help me make sense of the world of bonds and bond funds? _______ Joe and I tackle these four questions ... plus reveal a top-secret recipe for the Best. Oreo. Cookie. Dessert. EVER. Like, *ever.* Enjoy! -- Paula _______ For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode74 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#73: Last January, I went to a party at a trailer park that featured a huge bonfire, a few llamas, and a member of Public Enemy. (I realize that sounds like the setup to a joke. Welcome to my life.) While I was there, I met a former competitive chess player named Steve Gossett. Steve is a Los Angeles-based filmmaker who creates Princess Rap Battle videos for a YouTube channel with more than 1 million subscribers. But that's not why I invited Steve onto the show. I asked him to join me on the podcast to discuss the lessons that chess taught him about money, work and life. On this fascinating episode, Steve and I discuss:  - Opening Theory: At the start of the game, you have a limited selection of moves. Yet you can quickly lose the game if you choose the wrong moves. Don't lose at the outset. - Muddled Midgame: While the first few moves are (relatively) simple, even the experts don't quite understand the complexities of the mid-game. - Gambit: Sometimes, you need to be willing to give up a piece on the board for the sake of getting another strategic win. - Eliminate options: You'll fatigue yourself if you try to consider every move. Learn how to quickly eliminate options so that you can focus on choosing between a small handful of optimal moves. - Think ahead: Don't just think about the consequences of the next move. Think many, many moves ahead on the board. Also, realize that every move carries an opportunity cost: once you move a piece on the board, it's not in that same position anymore -- for better or for worse. - Study/practice/knowledge can reduce time pressure: Chess is a timed game with a ticking clock. You can make smarter, faster decisions through study and practice. Knowledge is your competitive advantage. I hope you find this conversation as fascinating as I did. Enjoy!  - Paula Links to the Princess Rap Battle and Whitney Avalon's YouTube channel can be found in the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode73   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#72: Spaghetti is a major part of my life. I eat it, of course, as many people do. I also spill it all over my pants, despite the fact that I’m 33 and should’ve learned the rules of gravity by now. But most importantly, I use spaghetti as a metaphor for my business. If I’m not sure if something will work or not, but I want to experiment with an idea, I tell myself that I’m just “throwing spaghetti at the wall.” Maybe it’ll stick; maybe it won’t. Either way, I have permission to try, permission to fail, and permission to get pasta stains all over my drywall. This week, I’m starting a new spaghetti-throwing-experiment on the podcast: I’m going to broadcast “Ask Paula” episodes every-other-week, followed by interviews with guests every-other-week. This allows me to handle the awesome volume of questions that are flowing in (which I LOVE), while still enjoying intriguing conversations with fascinating people. This every-other-week thing is just an experiment; I’d love to hear what you think. Do you want more “Ask Paula” episodes? Or should I return that segment back to its original once-a-month placement? Or am I overthinking this and I should really just get on with the show notes for this week’s episode? Assuming you’re like, “Option C, Paula — get on with the show notes!,” here they are. ___________   Our first question comes from David, who asks: Could you ever find yourself in a situation in which you could justify helping a friend by paying off their credit card, and in exchange, they pay you a modest but respectable interest rate? Here’s his situation: His friend holds $6,000 in credit card debt, with carries an interest rate ranging between 11 to 17 percent. This friend also holds $30,000 in student loans. Yikes! David, however, is debt-free, maxes out his retirement accounts, and holds cash savings of $56,000. He’s thinking of loaning his friend around $3,000 of this money, which she could use to pay off the 17 percent loan. In exchange, David would get a decent-but-not-outrageous return, perhaps in the neighborhood of 7 percent-ish. Should he do this? If so, how? Should he sit down with a lawyer? Next, Amy asks: We’re carrying debt, although fortunately it's low-interest. We're paying it off, and we're doing the best we can; this debt will be gone in a few years. How do you stay patient and calm, when progress is happening at a snail's pace? Later, Alexa says: I’ve realized that I haven’t followed my true passions, which are travel and dance. I’d like to save money for a few years, and then pursue these twin goals. What should I do with the money that I’m saving for travel? Should I keep it liquid or in stocks? Should I put it in a taxable account or a retirement account? Lyra asks: I have 5 goals: repay debt, save an emergency fund, help my son pay for college, save for retirement, and buy a rental property. How do I split my money between these five goals? Next, Kim asks: What are the pro's and con's of portfolio lending for an investment property? I keep getting hung up on the "balloon payment," in which you need to repay the full loan after a particular period of time. How would you qualify for a refinance, given that you need a portfolio loan in the first place? Finally, Daan wants to know: I’m a Dutch citizen who moves to a different country every 2-3 years. Is real estate a viable option for me?   For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode72 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#71: Roger Whitney is known as the "retirement answer man." "All I think about, all day long, is how to make that [retirement] transition successfully," he says. But he holds a dirty little secret. "I don't believe in retirement. And the most successful clients that I work with ... technically they're retired, but they're still working." Huh? What does that mean? In today's episode, Whitney and I discuss the nuances of 21st-century modern retirement -- and how this ain't nothin' like the traditional retirement that you've been taught to expect. Enjoy! ______ For the "WTF?" -- Vocabulary guide from this episode - visit http://affordanything.com/episode71   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#70: Erin Lowry, author of Broke Millennial, talks about the early childhood scripts that we learn about money. Why is this topic important? Well, if you're a parent, you want to set a good financial example for your child to follow. Giving them the right tools and information about money at an early age, as Erin's parents did, can easily set them on the right path in life. And as 'grown-ups,' many of us have negative scripts around money that we want to unearth and unlearn. Regardless of your specific situation, one thing is true: we often inherit our money mindset from our parents. For better or worse, we unconsciously internalize their actions and thoughts around money, and it shapes how we view and interact with money today. Erin shares the lessons her parents taught her about money in this episode, and discusses the impact it's had on her spending and saving. (Hint: She's always been debt-free and has set the awesome goal of being a millionaire by age 35.) For example, Erin is a natural saver and became frugal at a very young age thanks to her parents being savers. While that sounds great, she often prioritized earning money to the detriment of her social life. She shares a specific instance where she passed up what turned out to be a night to remember among friends for a babysitting gig that paid $100. These days, she allows for more balance in her budget. We also discuss: Specific financial lessons Erin's parents taught her and her sister at an early age Erin's first memories surrounding money, and how those shaped the person she is today Erin's thoughts on financial independence and retiring early How our views on real estate investing differ because of the lens with which we view it Erin's decision to become a freelancer just six months ago A personal example of when being frugal crosses the line and more! Enjoy! Find more resources at http://affordanything.com/episode70
   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#69: So many Afford Anything listeners have great questions about real estate investing. That's why this episode of Ask Paula is dedicated to answering them. Our first question comes from Ade, who has $25,000 to invest in real estate and lives in the Bay Area. Understandably, he's thinking of investing out-of-state, and wants to know if Atlanta is still a good city to invest in. Where can the best deals be found? Krystina lives and has four rentals in Vermont, but she's sick of the cold. She's thinking of selling the properties and moving elsewhere. She asks: if you had to start over, where would you buy and what type of property would you buy? The next question comes from Kayla, who wants to know how to report rental income on your taxes when you also live in the property. Are there any tax implications to be aware of? Claire is relocating to California, and is curious to know if she's better off renting, or if she should max out her mortgage loan potential and buy a house that has a detached garage she can rent out to cover the increased mortgage. Our next question comes from a listener with a paid-off rental who also has an Airbnb on her property. Nice! But, she has a $160,000 mortgage on her own house. She has $30,000 in the bank and wants to know: should she put it toward her mortgage, or use it to buy another property? Our last question comes from Katie, who's eyeing a vacation rental in one of her favorite destinations. Does it sound like a good idea? And how can she estimate the cap rate (and her expenses) without a ton of information on the property? We dive into these topics - and more - in today's episode. Enjoy! To be included in Paula's Real Estate Course, click on the link in the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode69   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#68: My buddy Joe Saul-Sehy, host of the Stacking Benjamins podcast, joins me this week for another episode of "Ask Paula (and Joe!)" -- in which we workshop through questions that came from you, the Afford Anything community. This week, Joe and I answer questions such as: - I'm getting a $2,500 tax refund. Should I use this to invest, repay debt, or upgrade my home? - I'm debt-free (except a reasonable mortgage) and maxing out my retirement accounts. What else should I be doing? - I've started savings accounts for my two daughters, ages 3 and 6, so that they can access this money for big-ticket expenses when they're young adults. How should I invest this money? - I'm interested in socially responsible investing. What specific funds should I look at? - What's your opinion of high-dividend ETFs? - What's your opinion of using whole life insurance as a 'creative' wealth-building strategy? Enjoy! -- Paula For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode68 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#67: It's the first Monday of the month, which means it's time to answer questions from the Afford Anything community. Our first question comes from a caller in a tough spot: Her mother-in-law is 66 years old. She's divorced, holds no retirement savings, and will only receive a tiny Social Security check. Her health is worsening, and she'll need to step away from work shortly. The caller wants to help her mother-in-law ... but how? Our second question comes from Erin, a listener who's moving to California and needs to buy a car. She's new to the world of car-buying, and wants to know how she can get a great deal. What red flags should she watch out for? Our third question comes from Hong, a 32-year-old mother of two who's interested in early retirement. She's thinking about saving money in a 401k until she maximizes her employer match, then switching to a Traditional IRA, and then switching back to saving in her 401k. Should she pursue this strategy? How can she maximize her tax advantages? Our fourth question comes from John, who wants to know what I've learned from building an online course. He's contemplating creating one of his own. Finally, I answer a question from Adalia, who wants to know if my online business and real estate business are structured as part of the same company, or operated as two separate entities. She asks if I can talk about how I made my business structuring decisions. Have a question? Record it from your smartphone or computer. Go to http://affordanything.com/voicemail and leave a short message. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#66: You know that rare moment when you meet someone with whom you connect *instantly*? I felt that way when I met Emma Pattee, the 26-year-old millionaire and mini-real-estate-mogul who joins me on today's episode. Emma and I share similar stories: we're both young female artists and entrepreneurs who figured out that wealth is a tool for creating the freedom that allows us to live on our own terms. We both hustled harder than words can describe, living and breathing our commitment to breaking free from the trading-time-for-money cycle. We refused to accept the defaults that were handed to us. We viewed our investments as a way to create a more sustainable, meaningful life. We rejected the limiting belief that a creative, meaningful life is somehow more 'pure' when it's lived in scarcity and deprivation. We embraced abundance. We asked "how can I create this?" We viewed every problem as inherently solve-able. We took responsibility for everything that crossed our paths. Most critically, we decided that we weren't going to let any excuses hold us back. We accepted radical responsibility for our own lives. We wouldn't allow ourselves to get trapped in a victim mindset, a comparison ("they-have-it-easier!") mindset, or an external-factors-are-holding-me-back mindset. I rarely meet people who have committed to the inner work of internalizing these lessons. Emma is one of those rare people. And that's why I'm excited to share our breakfast conversation with you. I hope you enjoy this episode. And to paraphrase Seth Godin, more importantly, I hope this episode spurs you to take action. Lots of love, Paula   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#65: I've always taken an approach to life that puts my freedom first.  My one and only 9-5 lasted only 3 years. Since then I've been self employed and built financial independence through rental real estate. And while most see this podcast as being about money, it's really about a philosophy around life that is disguised as a finance blog and podcast. Today I get real about this whole money thing. I hope you follow along the mental journey with me. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode65 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#64: Your potential is unlimited. I realize that's the type of cliche that you normally find embossed in cursive script on the side of coffee mugs. It's trite and impersonal and overused. But it's also true. Your potential to earn and grow is limitless. But it's not free. You need to invest time and money into developing your potential. Your time and money are limited, though, and you could also choose to invest in market-based assets, like stocks, bonds or real estate. How do you make that decision? Are you going to invest in yourself? Or the market? Or both -- and in what proportion? How do you make these choices? When you're buying a few shares of a total stock market index fund, you have a generally clear idea of what you're getting. You've seen the historic returns. You can predict, to a reasonable degree, the consequences of that investment over a multi-decade span. But when you're investing in yourself -- e.g. learning a new skill, developing a side business, or taking a class -- you can't rely on the same formulas or models. There's no chart mapping the historic returns. Financial capital is easy to track. Human capital is harder to quantify -- but potentially more rewarding. Can you compare investing in assets vs. investing in yourself? How can you make a smarter decision about your own path? On today's podcast, I talk to Michael Kitces -- a financial planner, entrepreneur, and all-around smart guy -- about this million-dollar decision. Find more helpful information at http://affordanything.com/episode64   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#63: It's the first Monday of the month, and you know what that means - another Ask Paula episode. Our first question comes from Richard, who wants to know if he should focus on creating a travel fund or building passive income through real estate. What did I do, and how did I manage to come back from my world travels and start building a real estate portfolio only a few years later? The next question comes from Andrew. He's contemplating purchasing two houses on the cul-de-sac he lives on and then renting them out. He only plans on living in his current house for another five years, at which time he also wants to rent it out. Is he crazy? Would proximity give him an advantage? Jennifer asks the next question. She and her husband owe $150,000 on a rental property in Portland, OR that's worth $350,000. Should they sell the house and buy more properties? What would I do with the equity in the property?   Find more resources and Ask Paula episodes at http://podcast.affordanything.com/tag/ask-paula   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#62: Joe Saul-Sehy, a former financial advisor and host of the Stacking Benjamins podcast, joins me to answer your questions in this bonus episode of Ask Paula. Joe and I are goofballs; we tell PG-13 dirty jokes; we disagree on several answers, and we have a grand 'ol time. Hopefully you'll learn something, and you'll probably end up laughing along the way. For a full list of questions and more about today’s episode, visit http://affordanything.com/episode62 Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#61: Even though John wasn't never an entrepreneur at heart -- even though he didn't (yet) self-identify as an entrepreneur -- he decided to throw himself, full-force, into the one and only business idea he'd ever had. Listen to John's story, in his own words, as he describes his journey from a small-town college kid to a successful 7-figure business owner. For resources mentioned in this episode, go to http://affordanything.com/episode61 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#60: Andrew Hallam grew a million-dollar investment portfolio on a schoolteacher's salary by his mid-30's. In his bestselling book, Millionaire Teacher, he describes these nine lessons in detail. He shares these nine rules on this podcast, and his ideas are so substantive that -- for the first time -- I decided to release his interview as a two-part series. In last week's episode, Andrew shared the first three rules of building wealth. This week, Andrew dives into the final six rules that can turn middle-class people into millionaires. Here's a sneak peek:     •    #1: Learn how to think and spend like a millionaire.     •    #2: Start investing early. Time is your greatest investment ally.     •    #3: Choose low-cost index funds. Small fees pack big punches.     •    #4: Understand your inner psychology. Conquer the enemy in the mirror.     •    #5: Learn how to build a balanced, responsible portfolio.     •    #6: Create an indexed account, no matter where you live.     •    #7: Don't resign yourself to taking this journey alone.     •    #8: Inoculate yourself against slick sales rhetoric.     •    #9: If it sounds too good to be true, it probably is. These rules may sound simple, but our discussion took an advanced turn. Andrew and I dive deep into thorny topics like hedge funds, casinos, and human psychology. Enjoy this two-part series, and don't forget to check out Andrew's excellent book, Millionaire Teacher. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#59: By his mid-30's, Andrew Hallam became a millionaire on a teacher's salary. He began by investing $100 a month upon advice given by a mechanic. Then he began saving nearly half his $28,000 teacher’s salary. Andrew rode a bicycle 35 miles to work, found ways to avoid paying rent, and regularly ate pasta and potatoes as well as clams he picked himself for added protein. In today's interview, Andrew shares that story. Find more comprehensive details at http://affordanything.com/episode59 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#58: Ashley is a single mom saving diligently for her 2-year-old son. What alternatives are there to 529s and brokerage accounts? Julie and her husband invest quarterly. Should she try buying European equities when they are much cheaper due to Brexit? Nicholas and his wife make too much money for a Roth IRA. Should hey do a backdoor Roth? Melissa has money to save, invest, or pay down rentals. What’s her best option?   Find more in the show notes at http://affordanything.com/episode58 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#57: Philip Taylor, aka PT, is one of the most well-connected guys in the personal finance world. He’s spent the past half-dozen years building tight relationships with some of the most influential authors and speakers in this space. Today he shares his top five money lessons learned over the past decade. PT shared several tactical tips, including:     •    Buy term life insurance, rather than whole life.     •    Focus on low-cost investing, such as passively-managed index funds.     •    Automate your savings.     •    Focus on income growth.     •    View frugality as a discipline. It’s not a means to an end; it’s a lifestyle and a core value. For a full explanation of PT’s 5 takeaways, visit http://affordanything.com/episode57 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#56: Former professional Poker player Billy Murphy has an intriguing story. He achieved financial independence at age 29, and he did this by applying a concept known as "expected value" to his online businesses. In this episode, I chat with Billy about how expected value is more than just a formula; it’s a framework for how to evaluate your options; how to assess risk, reward, probability, and variance. Let's back up a little. What is expected value? It’s the sum of all possible values for a variable, with each value multiplied by its probability of occurrence. “Whaaaa? What does that mean?” Here’s a simple example:   Imagine that you have a full-time job. You’ve also built a side business that’s earning $20,000 per year. You’re trying to decide whether to stay in your full-time job vs. quit your job and focus on growing your side hustle into a full-time business. You ask your two best friends for their opinion. One says, “that’s risky! What if you fail?” The other says, “you could become a millionaire! Whoa!” You realize that both of those remarks are fueled by emotion and speculation. You want to make a more informed decision, so you decide to compare the ‘expected value’ (EV) of both options in Year One. After assessing the market (e.g. studying customer demand, etc.) you determine that in your first year of running the business full-time, under best-case-scenario conditions, you could earn $250,000. There’s a lot of promise within your field; you calculate a one in four chance of this happening. In worst-case-scenario conditions, you don’t make a dime of additional money; your business stagnates at its current income. There’s a lot of competition within your field; you assess that there’s also a one in four chance of this situation unfolding. In middle-case-scenario conditions, you’d make around $100,000 per year. This is the most likely outcome, and you give it 50% odds. What’s the expected value of diving full-time into this business? EV of biz = 25% chance of earning $250k = $62,500 50% chance of earning $100k = $50,000 25% chance of earning $20k = $5,000 EV = $117,500 Okay, great. Next, what’s the expected value of staying at your current job? EV of job = Salary + $20,000 in additional income Of course, this is an over-simplified example, for the sake of illustration. Obviously, the decision gets more complex, because you need to account for future growth of your business — the 5-year outlook, the 10-year outlook — as well as future career growth potential within your 9-to-5 job. You’d also need to assess revenues vs. profit margins, etc., etc. But this simple example illustrates the concept of using the expected value formula to inform your decision-making. Rather than just saying, “oh, that’s risky!” without any data, you can use EV as a starting point for a conversation about probability and risk. The point is, when you're making a decision, your emotions and other people's opinions often override any rational thought you might have. Those emotions don't take risk or variance into consideration. Expected value does. By running the numbers and identifying the worst-, mid-, and best-case scenarios, you can take calculated risks that have a higher likelihood of paying off. Find out how Billy built a seven-figure business by applying this one incredible rule to his decision making process in this episode. Enjoy! -- Paula Resources Mentioned: Billy's site, Forever Jobless
 Wikipedia - Expected Value   Find more about Billy Murphy and his podcast, Forever Jobless, in the show notes at http://affordanything.com/session56 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#55: Scott Alan Turner used to be a money moron. (In his words.) He traded a Jeep for a Porsche in his 20s, purchased a 3,000 sq. ft. house with two mortgages, and bought luxury furniture on credit. The Porsche cost him $800 per month. The house cost $200,000. The furniture? Who knows.
 Scott didn't have a budget and never tracked his spending. He only knew that he could afford the monthly payments on these luxuries ... until one day he realized his mortgage was due in a few weeks. And his bank account was rather empty. And he didn't have an emergency fund. Oops. Scott realized he was drowning in debt. So he decided to make a change. He sold the Porsche and paid $6,500 cash for a truck. He paid off his credit card. He aggressively attacked the mortgage on his house. Step-by-step, he made strides toward improving his financial future. After listening to Clark Howard on the radio, he realized it was important to free his money from the grip of debt and put it toward savings and retirement. Once he got married, he sold his house and downsized to his wife's town home. They then downsized to a 1,000 sq. ft. rented house, and downsized once more to a 300 sq. ft. bedroom with his in-laws.
 Throughout all of this downsizing, Scott kept saving money. He eventually saved enough to become a millionaire at age 35. Today he writes and speaks about personal finance full-time. He hosts the Financial Rock Star podcast. And he's stayed debt-free -- including mortgage-free -- since 2009. How did he go from money moron - buying expensive cars and furniture - to disciplined saver? He can answer that question in one word: Contentment. He doesn't need to buy more, because he's happy with what he already has. Scott credits his frugality to feeling satisfied with his possessions, rather than running on a hedonistic treadmill of always wanting more. While he still appreciates fine craftsmanship -- a gorgeous house, a designer car -- he realizes that he doesn't need to own luxury items. He can appreciate art and design without making a purchase. He prioritizes spending on his values: more time with friends and family; more life experiences. He doesn't spend to impress others, which is a losing game. Discover Scott's fascinating philosophy on the link between frugality and contentment (and learn from his money mistakes!) in this episode. Enjoy! -- Paula For a full list of resources, or to leave a comment, visit http://affordanything.com/episode55 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#54: It's the first Monday of the month, which means I'm fielding questions from the audience. We start with a question from Nicole. She's a new listener, and she's stuck in a confusing situation. You see, Nicole is self-employed. She'd like to save a percentage of her income -- but she doesn't get regular paychecks. How can she automate her savings, when she doesn't know how much she'll make each month? She asks a second question, as well. Nicole has $15,000 in savings and wants to buy her first rental property. However, she's intimidated by the unknown market. What should her first steps be? Next, we move to a question from podcast listener David. Should he invest his emergency fund? David is contemplating putting his emergency savings in the Vanguard Immediate-Term Investment Grade Fund (VFICX). Is this a good idea? Saul, another podcast listener interested in real estate investing, recently sold his home and has a decent chunk of change. Should he buy a 3 bed / 2 bath townhome with a small commercial space on the first floor? Or should he buy a duplex? Podcast listener Albert is wondering: should he buy a home for himself, and rent it out a few years later? He'd like to travel and work remotely. What are the downsides to this idea? It can't be that easy ... right? Finally, Abbey started a personal finance blog, and wants to know:     When should she start promoting her blog?     How much content should she write?     Does she have to share her blog with her friends and family, or can she stay anonymous?     Should she write about other things besides money and travel? I tackle these questions in this month's edition of Ask Paula. Enjoy! -- Paula P.S.  Trying to make a decision? Ask your question at http://affordanything.com/voicemail Resources Mentioned:     Renting is Throwing Money Away...Right?     Everything I Know About Blogging Condensed Into One Post     Should You Invest in This Rental Property? _______________________ To view this information online, visit http://affordanything.com/episode54 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#53: This episode is a little different. Instead of interviewing a guest, this podcast episode is a recording of a recent talk I gave in Equador. The audience wanted to know more about the context surrounding the decisions I've made regarding business, investing, and money. In other words, why I've only spent three years of my life in a 9-5 job, and why I've dedicated so much of my time to travel. There is a lot of real estate talk as I take Q&A from the audience, but the idea behind releasing this talk is for you to see how any investment can help you design your life around your values. Money and investments are just tools that you can use to craft a certain lifestyle. Here are some of the highlights from the talk: •    How I was introduced to the concept of freelancing, and how it helped me quit my job and buy real estate •    My real estate investing strategy in a nutshell - buy what no one else wants to buy •    The risk of being too excessive with renovations as an investor, and how I've managed renovations •    How I use the One Percent Rule when running numbers on a property •    My original goal for owning rental properties (and why I don't want 100's of units) •    The surprise deal that came about because of my blog •    The opportunity cost of investing in real estate instead of the stock market •    Why the next rental won't be in Vegas (where I live) •    Why I'm not in any hurry to buy another property •    Why I would buy apartment complexes in cash if I had a billion dollars •    The benefit of diversifying into a different city and how to do it •    Retailers I recommend buying from when it comes to kitchen materials •    Financing without W2 income •    Why I'm against high-leverage •    The other projects I'm working on (why my focus isn't on real estate investing right now) •    "Pearls of wisdom" from traveling •    My favorite travel destinations •    Why I started a blog and my thoughts on monetizing •    Real estate isn't a passion - it's a tool Enjoy! -- Paula Resources Mentioned: •    Cash Flow Reports for Rental Properties •    The course I'm working on - VIP List •    HUD Home Store __________________________ I also want to take a moment to thank the sponsors for this episode. First, huge thanks to Nerdwallet. Their new app lets you have one-on-one conversations with financial advisors. You can chat about anything related to money, such as retirement, investing, insurance, or paying off debt. You'll get personalized, one-on-one advice -- available at no cost to you. Check it out at no cost to you by visiting http://nerd.me/paula _________________________ If you've been listening for a while, you've heard me interview many best-selling authors. Before I interview these guests, I need to read or refresh my memory of their books. Sitting down to physically read the books can take a long time. That's why I listen to their audiobooks, thanks to my subscription to an audiobook service called Audible. If you want to give them a try for free, head to http://audible.com/trynow for a free 30-day trial. _________________________ To see the slides from Paula's presentation, go to https://affordanything.com/episode53 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#52: Imagine transitioning from making $8.50 per hour and sharing a crammed apartment with 5 people, to becoming a six-figure business owner doing what you love.   That's the journey that Julia Kelly, caricature artist and founder of JK Expressions, took.   Sounds great, right?   Well, as they say, more money = more problems.   When Julia earned $25,000 - $30,000 per year, she had fantastic money management skills. She had no debt and plenty of savings.   But when her business started making six figures, she began ignoring her finances, stopped saving money .... and racked up thousands in personal credit card debt.   Why?   Some of us write this off as life getting more expensive as we get older, but it's actually a classic case of lifestyle inflation -- when you make more, you spend more.   After Julia began earning six figures, she decided she was no longer happy with $12 haircuts from Supercuts. She happily splurged for $75 salon style cuts instead.   She started paying for convenience. One-click Amazon order? Check. Ordering an Uber or Lyft so she didn't have to deal with parking at the airport? Check. Eating out? Check.   She became lazy about saving money, assuming that she could always earn more. Money was coming into her bank accounts at an unprecedented pace – so her finances would take care of themselves, right?   Wrong.   As Julia discovered, when you "upgrade" certain aspects of your life, you may find it difficult to downgrade. You keep spending more and more, trapped on a consumer treadmill. You’re forced to work to fuel your spending addiction.   Left unchecked, this saps every ounce of freedom from your life.    Ouch.   In this episode, you'll learn: · Why you shouldn't take lifestyle inflation lightly · How to stop lifestyle inflation before it happens · What Julia regrets buying … and what she doesn’t · The easiest, most effective antidote to lifestyle inflation · How Julia differentiates between saving time vs. wasteful convenience spending · What Julia's advice is to those who are increasing their income, but don't want to succumb to lifestyle inflation -- Paula   Resources Mentioned:     •    Gretchen Rubin's episode, The Power of Habit Formation     •    Julia's story on the Afford Anything blog
     •    Cal Newport's episode, The Incredible Value of Deep Work, Instead of Distraction     •    Julia's site, JKExpressions.com __________________________ I also want to take a moment to thank the sponsors for this episode. First, huge thanks to Nerdwallet. Their new app lets you have one-on-one conversations with financial advisors. You can chat about anything related to money, such as retirement, investing, insurance, or paying off debt. You'll get personalized, one-on-one advice -- available at no cost to you. Check it out at no cost to you by visiting nerd.me/paula. _________________________ If you've been listening for a while, you've heard me interview many best-selling authors. Before I interview these guests, I need to read or refresh my memory of their books. Sitting down to physically read the books can take a long time. That's why I listen to their audiobooks, thanks to my subscription to an audiobook service called Audible. If you want to give them a try for free, head to audible.com/trynow for a free 30-day trial. _________________________ For a full list of show notes, visit http://podcast.affordanything.com/52-how-to-combat-lifestyle-inflation-with-julia-kelly Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#51: Today's guest is Mary Beth Storjohann, CFP®, Founder of Workable Wealth, and author of the book Work Your Wealth. As I was reading through her book, one thing stuck out to me: the financial frenemies we all have, and how to deal with them in a constructive way.
 What's a financial frenemy? They're the people in your life that are sabotaging your efforts to improve your net worth. Sometimes they're friends, sometimes they're family, and other times, they might just be people that have no business asking about your financial situation in the first place. 
 Whoever they are, we've all known one at some point or another.
 In fact, I bet one of these sounds familiar:
 1. The Entitled Frenemy: "Can you spot me? I'll get you next time!" 2. The Budget-Buster: "You deserve it, you should buy it!" 3. The One-Upper: "You got a $1,000 bonus? Nice. I got a $10,000 bonus." 4. The Priers: "How much do you make?" "How much did you spend on that?" 5. The Green-Eyed Monster: "Must be nice that you can afford such a big house." 6. The FOMO Frenemy: "You can spend your money just this once!" Navigating conversations with these financial frenemies can be tough, but Mary Beth has some awesome advice on how to do it and not feel bad about your words.
 Even though it might sound scary, honesty is the best policy.
 While saying, "I don't feel comfortable answering that" means enduring a few moments of awkwardness, the alternative is answering truthfully and proceeding to wonder if your "friends" are judging you...every single time you interact with them.
 Finally, we need to realize that what they're saying isn't a reflection on us - it's a reflection on them. If they're jealous, feel the need to one-up you, or discourage you from your financial goals, that's on them, not you.
 Mary Beth offers other great tips on how to deal with financial frenemies in this episode, and we even role-played a scenario to give you a script to follow.
 Resources Mentioned: • Workable Wealth
 • “Work Your Wealth" on Amazon • Mary Beth's Twitter & Instagram
 Enjoy! -- Paula Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#50: Mark, a 55-year-old listener, has no savings. He's been listening to personal finance podcasts. He recently read Tony Robbins' Money: Master the Game. He called this podcast to tell us that he's feeling overwhelmed by the scope of what's ahead of him. Mark doesn't know how to apply this information -- and he's afraid of needing to work in fast food when he's 80 years old. What can he do? We tackle his question first on today's Ask Paula episode. Next, we take a call from Adalia. Adalia, another podcast listener, wants to earn extra money on the side. She's intrigued by the idea of becoming a virtual assistant -- a side hustle that allows her to work from home, setting her own hours. How should she start? Where can she find clients? Tyler, a podcast listener and fellow FinConner, is carrying $20,000 in credit card debt, with interest rates ranging from 11% - 23%. He also runs a side business on Amazon, making  43-50% returns for every dollar he puts in. Should he focus on reinvesting money back into his lucrative business, or should he pay his credit card debt off? Podcast listener Carlos just purchased his first rental property, and wants to know: are home warranties are worth the money? Todd, another listener, is curious to know if he and his wife should go without health insurance as the cost of premiums increase. He has an HSA, emergency fund, makes a good living, is in good health, and saves everything he can. Could going without insurance really save him money? Our last question comes from listener Lynsey, who has her sights set on financial independence. She works a second job during the cold Minnesota winters, which pays $25/hr. However, she wonders if she should use that time to invest in her future earning potential, by starting a business or getting an advanced degree. Should she go after the immediate cash, or focus on her future? All of these questions are answered in this episode of Ask Paula! Enjoy! -- Paula _____________________ I also want to take a moment to thank the sponsors for this episode. First, huge thanks to Nerdwallet. Their new app lets you have one-on-one conversations with financial advisors. You can chat about anything related to money, such as retirement, investing, insurance, or paying off debt. You'll get personalized, one-on-one advice -- available at no cost to you. Check it out at no cost to you by visiting nerd.me/paula. _____________________ If you've been listening for a while, you've heard me interview many best-selling authors. Before I interview these guests, I need to read or refresh my memory of their books. Sitting down to physically read the books can take a long time. That's why I listen to their audiobooks, thanks to my subscription to an audiobook service called Audible. If you want to give them a try for free, head to audible.com/trynow for a free 30-day trial. _____________________ Want more "Ask Paula" episodes? Head on over the the website and binge all you want: Show Notes and other Ask Paula episodes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#49: If you're a longtime listener, you might remember J.D. Roth, founder of Get Rich Slowly and owner of Money Boss, from Episode 20. In this previous interview, J.D. shared how he went from being in debt to financially independent. Today, he's back for a special edition of the podcast. J.D. and I didn't actually record an interview for this episode. Instead, we hit "record" on one of our private mini-mastermind conversations, where we talk candidly about our businesses. By listening to this episode, you'll get a behind-the-scenes look at what's going on in the Afford Anything and Money Boss world - without any filters. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#48: Imagine that your goal is to build a flat stomach and stronger biceps. But deep down, subconsciously, you’re afraid you might fail. So you procrastinate. “I’ll work out tomorrow,” you tell yourself. “Or next week. Or next year.” As a result, you don’t make progress. But let’s flip the script. Instead of focusing on the result — your appearance — you focus on the smallest possible action. You create a new goal: Everyday, you’ll do a single push-up. You’ve designed a goal that cannot fail. The moment you commit to this goal, you drop to the ground and do a push-up. Congratulations. You’ve succeeded today. You repeat this everyday for a week. You build a new habit and new sense of self-identity. You’re the type of person who does daily push-ups. One day, while executing your single push-up, you figure, “Ah, what the heck,” and pump out a few more. One push-up grows into five, ten, fifteen, twenty. You focus on tiny actions, rather than their potential long-term payoff. Eventually, you get results. In today's episode, Stephen Guise, author of Mini-Habits, describes how the "one push-up" mentality accelerated his progress faster than a "100-pushup" mentality ever could. He explains why he decided to start focusing on actions, he shares the technique that he uses to conquer writer's block, and he talks about embracing "imperfectionism." Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#47: New York Times bestseller, radio and television personality, Clark Howard is known as a personal finance expert, that title doesn't tell the whole story. He started reading stock tables when he was in fifth grade. He began investing in real estate at the age of 22. He created his own travel agency business at the age of 25. And he became financially independent and retired at age 31. However, after four years of living on the beach, he was ready to get back to work. He wanted to help people take control of their money and, consequently, their lives. Clark believes that money is the result of the discipline you bring into your life. Unfortunately, most people want to take the path of least resistance when it comes to achieving their goals. That's why so many people fail. Clark says that the most common mistake he sees his listeners make is getting in their own way. People give up before they've started and play the victim. That's not the path to success - financial or otherwise. So, how can you stop standing in the way of your own success? In this episode, we cover that, as well as:     •    Clark's journey to financial independence     •    Why he chose to pursue this audacious goal     •    Why he felt ready to jump back into work after enjoying four years of retirement     •    Why we behave the way we do when it comes to achieving goals     •    What money means, and why it matters     •    How to control your reaction to the inevitable setbacks we experience in life     •    Why everyone must live beneath their means and spend less than they earn to achieve any financial goal     •    What the future of money holds There were so many takeaways in this episode, I couldn't list them all. Clark is brilliant and offers some amazing insights into the financial industry, as well as business lessons he's learned throughout his years of being an entrepreneur and managing teams. Enjoy! Resources Mentioned: Clark.com Podcast
 Radio Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#46: This episode is a little unusual because I interviewed fellow podcast listeners live at FinCon (a conference for financial bloggers). Why? To get to know you and understand you better. I want to know what makes you tick, and where your interest in money comes from. Ultimately, why you're here, listening to this podcast, when most people couldn't care less about these topics. Why are you different? To discover that answer, here are some of the questions I asked our panelists: • Why did you decide to make learning about personal finance your hobby? Why do you spend hours reading blogs and listening to podcasts about money? • What made you approach personal finance head-on, rather than burying your head in the sand, like most people do? • Do people in your "regular" life know that you want to retire early and reach financial independence? Or do you avoid talking about this because people give you funny looks when you mention it? • Have you all had the same experience that community - finding like-minded individuals - is important in this journey?
 I hope you were able to learn and identify with your fellow listeners about why you manage your limited resources in such a conscientious way. The chief takeaway I got from this episode was the importance of building a community, which is critical to maintaining motivation on the journey to reach financial independence. Not only that, but you're the average of the five people you spend the most time with. Seek out a support system of people with similar values and goals to have your back when times get tough.   Resources Mentioned: 
 • Nick: True Tightwad • Melissa, "The Roamer": Traveling Wallet • Emma: Emma Lincoln • Gwen: Fiery Millennials • The One Percent Challenge Facebook Group • Everything I Know About Blogging, Condensed into One Post • Financial Independence Subreddit • Meetup.com -- Paula Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#45: Podcast listener Eva is interested in opening a Vanguard account. She noticed that people need $50,000 to access their personal advisor services. It’ll take her several years before she can access this. What should she do in the meantime? Amy, another podcast listener, wants to invest $5,500 into her Roth IRA in 2017. Should she invest the full amount on January 1, or should she spread this throughout the year? ...and more can be found at https://affordanything.com/45-ask-paula-invest-5500-one-huge-chunk-investing-questions/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#44: When Leslie Samuel immigrated to the U.S. at age 17, he hoped for the American Dream: an education, a secure job, and a traditional career path. But during his college years, Leslie realized he had an entrepreneurial streak. He made a few attempts at working for himself. He failed. He lost money that he'd set aside for his wedding. He tried investing in the stock market. He lost more money, savings that he'd set aside to pay his tuition. But he didn't quit. Leslie graduated, married, and accepted a job as a high school science teacher. He felt happy and secure. Yet his entrepreneurial itch persisted. He started building an online business in his spare time.  Leslie began earning an extra $14,000 per year on the side, a nice supplement to his income. A few years later, Leslie landed his dream job as a university professor. He loved his work. He earned a solid income. His wife gave birth to a healthy baby boy. Everything seemed perfect. But his entrepreneurial calling persisted. Ultimately, Leslie made the difficult decision to quit his dream job in order to become a full-time online entrepreneur. In this episode, he shares why he made this tough choice – and how he handled the fear and doubts that blocked the way. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#43: Jean Chatzky, financial editor for the TODAY Show, host of the HerMoney podcast and a frequent guest on TV shows like Oprah, Regis & Kelly, and The View is the bestselling author of many books, including Money Rules, which we discuss in today's episode. Here are a few of the Money Rules we cover: #1: The more time you spend looking, the less happy you’ll be with what you find. #2: Your retirement trumps their tuition. #3: Losing money hurts more than it should. #4: Big numbers make smart people do stupid things. #5: Don’t lend money to friends & relatives, and don’t co-sign for loans. #6: If its 50% off, it's still 50% on. __ It’s not about having it all. It’s about having what you value most. How can you match your money with your values? Jean and I tackle this question in the second half of the podcast. This leads us into discussing tactics that can prevent wasteful spending, such as: • The 10/10/10 Rule – How will you feel about this purchase in 10 minutes? 10 months? 10 years? • The 24 Hour Rule – Delay the purchase by 24 hours. Do you still want it? • Only Pay Full Price – Paradoxically, avoiding sales – and ONLY buying items at full price – might help you save more money in the long run. __ Finally, we chat about how to balance financial priorities when you and your spouse want different things. What if you want to retire early, but your spouse doesn't? How do you handle this? Jean shares her ideas on all these topics in today's episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#42: Your most valuable asset isn’t your house, car or retirement portfolio. It’s your attention. Most knowledge workers spend their day frantically hopping between meetings, emails, phone calls and social media. But that’s not the best way to stand out in the modern economy. Emails are necessary, says author and professor Cal Newport. They’ll keep you from getting fired. But they won’t get you promoted. In fact, his Deep Work Hypothesis states that the ability to do deep work is becoming more rare, yet at the same time, more valuable. That means if you can train your mind to resist the common distractions we all face, you’ll become more valuable in the workplace, whether you’re self-employed or traditionally employed. The problem, however, is that most of us are intimidated by deep work. We welcome distractions from difficult tasks that take a toll on our brain power. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/cal-newport/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#41: Mollie, a listener, is making smart money moves. She's getting the maximum match on 403b contributions. She's saving for a downpayment on a home. Her husband opened a Roth IRA. What's next? After listening to the Jim Collins episode, Mollie wants to open a Vanguard account. How can she balance this with the rest of her saving and investing goals? Is she spreading herself too thin? Meanwhile, podcast listener Elizabeth is trying a little-known tactic to rebalance her portfolio. Traditional advice tells people to rebalance by selling their gains. But Elizabeth wants to let those gains ride. She'd prefer to rebalance by buying undervalued assets. Are their hidden dangers to her strategy? Finally, podcast listener Chris wants to remodel his basement. He's an aspiring Airbnb host who'd like to make extra cash by renting out part of his home. How much money should he spend on his basement remodel? Are there any good rules-of-thumb? I tackle these three questions in today's Ask Paula episode. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#40: Most of us want to develop better habits. We want to exercise more, eat healthier, get more sleep, watch TV less, pay off debt, or save money. The problem? We make excuses. We tell ourselves we'll splurge "just this one time." We convince ourselves that we're too busy to start a side business. We reward ourselves with a hall pass from our intended new habit. Today's guest, Gretchen Rubin, talks about how we can create habits that stick. Gretchen Rubin is the New York Times bestselling author of The Happiness Project, which sold more than a million copies. Her latest book, Better Than Before, explores how to create habits that lead to a healthier, happier, richer life. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#39: It's tempting to think of "financial independence" as a finish line. You've either crossed the finish line, or you're still running the race. But financial independence is more nuanced, says today's guest, Joshua Sheats. We experience seven stages of financial independence, Joshua says, and we should break down our Major Goal -- financial independence -- into a series of smaller steps. Joshua, a financial planner and host of the hit podcast Radical Personal Finance, describes these seven stages in today's show, offering tips about how to reach each one. Want a sneak peek at the seven stages? Check out https://affordanything.com/episode39 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#38: There are 168 hours in a week.   If you work 40 hours per week and sleep 8 hours per night, you’ve accounted for 96 hours. You have an additional 72 waking hours per week.   What are you doing with this time?   That’s the question today’s guest, Laura Vanderkam, tried to answer by analyzing more than 1,000 time logs kept by full-time professional workers. Our collective narrative says that Americans are overworked, sleep-deprived and don’t have enough time for family or personal lives. That’s our emotional truth. But statistics paint a different picture. When more than 1,000 professionals track their time in 15-minute increments over the course of a 168-hour week, the data doesn’t point to time deprivation.    In today’s episode, Laura describes this surprising fact: we have more time than we think.   She also shares tactics on how to reduce chores and errands, stay focused and productive at work, and recognize the difference between efficacy and diminishing returns. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#37: Chris writes about life, work and travel. He has visited every country in the world and written a number of New York Times best selling books. He joins us to talk about challenging ourselves, experimentation,and deliberately changing our direction. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/chris-guillebeau/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#36: It's the first Monday of the month, and you know what that means ... Time for another Ask Paula episode! On today's show, I answer a handful of phone calls from listeners who posed questions about real estate investing. One caller from Atlanta said that he's thinking about buying a rental property from a turnkey investing company. (These are companies that buy, renovate and rent out properties, and then sell those properties to investors.) On the surface, this sounds appealing: all benefit and no work. But what are the drawbacks? Are those risks worth it? Should this listener buy a turnkey property? Or should he stay wary of red flags? Another caller, who says he loves real estate investing, mentioned that he's curious about the lack of compound interest in the real estate game. If you're investing in an index fund, he noted, your dividends and gains are automatically reinvested. That's not the case with a rental property. Sure, you can reinvest the cash flow from that property into buying more properties (or buying other investments, like index funds), but that's not the same thing. So ... what does this mean? When you take compound interest into consideration, are rental properties still a good deal? Or are real estate investors missing out on this crucial wealth-building tool? Another wanted to hear more details about a couple whom I mentioned in Episode 4, The Ultimate Beginner Guide to Real Estate Investing. This couple's strategy is to buy a home as a primary residence, live there for at least one year, move out, convert their former home into a rental property, and repeat. They've done this over and over, and now they're raking in the rental cash. The listener wanted more details about that strategy ... which I offered in droves. (And yes, I led myself into another little rant.) Finally, one listener called to share his success story. In an earlier episode, he asked whether he should repay his credit card debt, or save for the downpayment on a house. I told him to pay off his credit cards ... and he's now DEBT-FREE!!!!!! He tells his success story on today's show. Enjoy! Paula Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#35: Carrie Smith enjoyed her full-time accounting job, but she wanted to make extra money on the side. Who doesn't, right? She landed a second job in a tax office, working 9-to-5 for one employer and 5-to-9 for the other. She earned decent money, but her schedule had no flexibility ... and she felt unhappy.  This needs to change, she realized. I need to make good money while also enjoying my lifestyle. Even though she had zero experience as a writer, she wondered if she could leverage her skills as an accountant into a new, creative field. She volunteered to write one or two tax planning articles for a client, just to test the waters. She enjoyed the work. She wanted more.  She started reaching out to websites and companies that might need tax-related article writing. She landed her first major client, Yahoo Finance. Then another. Then another.  After a few years, her freelance business grew large enough that she quit her comfortable accounting job. She's her own boss now.  In this episode, Carrie tells her story and offers advice for anyone who wants to earn extra money as a freelancer -- whether its a side hustle or a path towards quitting your 9-to-5 day job.   For more, visit http://podcast.affordanything.com Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#34: Steve Chou's wife used to work grueling hours at a job she dreaded and despised. When she became pregnant with their first child, she decided to quit.  The problem? She earned six figures, and their family needed that income.  She opened an online store, buying handkerchiefs wholesale from China and retailing these online at a significant markup. She and Steve worked together to build a retail website and find customers. They bought Google Ads; they wrote blog posts; they created seller accounts on various shopping portals.   They earned more than $100,000 in their first year of business. In this episode, Steve explains how he and his wife earn six figures as online retailers while enjoying a much more relaxed, liberated lifestyle. He offers pointers for anyone who's interested in making money selling goods online -- either as a side business or as a method for quitting your day job.   For more, visit http://podcast.affordanything.com Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#33: After serving in the Navy for 20 years, Doug Nordman, then-age 41, retired from his military career. Most of his peers started second careers in the civilian world.    But Doug didn't. He had an ace up his sleeve: he had spent his military career saving 40 percent of his income. By the time he turned 41, he held an investment portfolio worth $1 million. Those investments, coupled with a Naval pension for $30,000 per year, propelled him into financial independence.   He's remained retired since leaving the Navy. He's now 55. He surfs three times a week. He travels to Europe on a whim. His retirement portfolio survived two recessions and is now worth $1.7 million.     In this interview, Doug shares the story of how he became a millionaire on a military salary. He also talks about the fulfillment he's found through financial independence.   Enjoy! Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#32: Should you sell your stocks, given that we might be heading for a possible downturn? Also, what are the downsides of index funds? Should you invest in out-of-state rental properties, and if so, how can you figure out where to look? These are just a few of the many questions Paula answers in this week's Q&A episode. Enjoy. For more information, visit http://podcast.affordanything.com Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#31: Jim Collins, also known as popular blogger JL Collins, has been financially independent since 1989. He achieved this in the simplest way possible: he saved half of his income and invested in index funds. Jim says the simplest possible approach is the best, if your goal is to build financial freedom. "The great irony of investing is the simpler of an approach you use, the more powerful of results you get." In this episode, he shares his ultra-simple approach to investing. He says that when you prioritize simplicity, above all else, you can ignore your investments and move on with your life: "Most people don't want to think about this stuff all the time. Most people want to get on with curing diseases and building bridges and writing peace treaties. But the smart ones know they have to have some kind of handle on their money." Check out Jim's ultra-simple path to wealth in this week's episode. http://podcast.affordanything.com Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#30: When Jim Wang was 29-and-a-half, life changed forever. Jim started an online company (a blog) in his mid-20's. His website grew to several hundred thousand readers and started earning five-figure monthly sums. It sounds too good to be true. I know. But it's Jim's life. He experienced the heady, surreal boom; that crazy era when a business grows beyond wildest expectation. He experienced the fear and worry that the good days might not last. And he experienced the reality of trading his website for a life-changing seven-figure sum. And then what? What happens when you're 29-and-a-half, and you suddenly discover that you're financially independent? What's next? Where do you go from there? What becomes important? And what lessons, what universal truths, can this reveal about our own lives? What can we learn from the aftermath of financial independence -- regardless of our current bank balance? Jim and I have a frank, forthright and insightful conversation on today's show. It's a long episode, but a good one. To receive updates via email or more information about the show, visit http://TheMoneyShow.co Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#29: Paula answers questions you sent in about multi-level marketing, paying off credit card debt vs buying a house, and socially responsible investing. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode-29-socially-responsible-investing/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#28: Most people only pay attention if there's a problem - that includes money. Guest, Evelyn Connors gets honest and raw about her previous understanding of how money works and her uber-excitement of taking control of her FI (financial independence). For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode-28-debt-is-normal-myth-evelyn-connors/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#27: Pete the Planner talks about why millionaire-dom is important and why it's important to try a "mock retirement". For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode27 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#26: Sometimes you need to let go of the good for the great. Jay Money has started a lot of projects, only to let them go because they didn't match his goals. The show must go on - and it will with Paula at the wheel. Jay will be back from time to time (and in every episode, as you will notice in future episodes). For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode-26-last-episode-with-jay/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#25: Would you rather...have $15k in quarters or $15k in dollar bills? Today we have fun with Joe Saul-Sehy, Len Penzo and Greg McFarlane (HELLO Greg) from the Stacking Benjamins Roundtable. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode-25-would-you-rather-game-stacking-benjamins/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#24: You ask. We answer. Let's grab a beer. This is the first Ask Us Anything in which we hear YOUR voices -- which makes this episode extra-awesome.  In this week's episode, Paula and J. Money tackle listener-submitted questions, such as: Investing: What's the deal with these robo-advisors? Should I plunk my money into their accounts? Betterment, Wealthfront ... what's the deal with these companies? Who can keep track? Index funds vs. rental properties -- what's better for scoring tax breaks? Entrepreneurship: I'd like to hire a virtual assistant. How do I start? What should I look for? Grab Bag: Don't forget about Canada! What are the best blogs and podcasts for money-savvy Canadians? Find out the answer to these questions and more in today's episode. Note: We received so many real estate questions that we'll devote another AUA episode exclusively to that topic.  Today's episode (mostly) covers other arenas. Enjoy! Visit http://TheMoneyShow.co for more great episodes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#23: Farnoosh Torabi is host of CNBC's Follow the Leader. She shares stories about spending 48 hours with the most influential business leaders in the nation. For a list of notes and resources, visit https://affordanything.com/episode-23-farnoosh-torabi-host-cnbc-follow-leader/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#22: Jeremy and Winnie are the bloggers behind Go Curry Cracker. They took a vacation to the Philippines and decided this was where they wanted to live - and retire there early (like REALLY early). For more information visit https://affordanything.com/episode-22-jeremy-winnie-retired-forbes-go-curry-cracker/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#21: Carrie Olsen started podcasting with her husband, then dipped her toe into the voice-over industry and is KILLING IT! For more information, https://affordanything.com/episode-21-making-money-voice-over-actor-with-carrie-olsen/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#20: The Money Boss, JD Roth, went from $35k in credit card debt to selling a personal finance blog for an undisclosed amount of money. Today he shares how financial independence affected him - and how having enough money to be financially independent forces us to face our problems. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode-20-debt-financial-independence-get-rich-slowly-jd-roth/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#19: Financial Advisor to the stars, Rob Wilson, gives us the inside scoop on what kind of help celebrities and sports heroes need. What he tells us may surprise you! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode19 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#18: Listener questions are back by popular demand! Paula answers your questions about real estate investing niches, strategies, and things to stay away from. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode18 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#17: Harry began driving for Uber 2 years. Now he's making 6-figures sharing tips for how to maximize time and profit with Uber, Lyft, DoorDash and PostMates. For Harry's rideshare money-making tips, visit https://affordanything.com/episode17 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#16: Aaron Epstein shares his story of shoveling snow as a kid to launching a profitable website during college to selling a multi-million dollar company. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode16 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#15: Q&A #2 with Paula, the analytical one, and J. Money, the heart of your M.O.N.E.Y. Team  Follow along with the answers: https://affordanything.com/episode15 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#14: Can you make money as a blogger? How? We share the good and bad reasons for choosing to go into blogging. Send us your questions or comments https://affordanything.com/episode14 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#13: Steve and his wife got on the Dave Ramsey plan and they paid off their house! Plus, you'll want to check out Steve's little coaching trick of Rent vs Buy vs Invest. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode13 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#12: It's time to pick the brains of Paula and J. Money with our first ever "ASK US ANYTHING" episode.  Follow along with the answers: http://affordanything.com/episode12 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#11: Jay and Ryanne have created a beautiful life for themselves scavenging for resale items in rural areas and renting houses in the Shenandoah National Park area of VA. Read more at https://affordanything.com/episode11   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#10: OMG! It's Tom Corley, the RICH HABITS guy! Jay is having a heart attack. Tom Corley studied self-made millionaires and poor people to come up with some interesting results. He wrote about it in a story called "Rich Habits". Tom shares his story of being well off as a child before his dad lost everything. Then he worked hard to bring himself up to not-broke status and on to becoming an accountant. After studying some of his clients he expanded to 233 self-made millionaires and 150 poor people. The results of those studies were very telling - but nobody really cared about it. Then he got a break when Farnoosh Torabi did a segment about the Rich Habits on Yahoo Finance. The rest is history in the making. Watch for Tom Corley's new book - Change Your Habits, Change Your Life - which gives more of the "how to" rich habit change. You can find it at http://ChangeYourHabitsBook.com For links to some of Jay's favorite Tom Corley articles, visit https://affordanything.com/episode10 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#9: Checking, savings, investment accounts, car insurance, credit cards, even umbrella insurance - it's all covered in this episode. These are the financial tools Jay Money and Paula Pant use. For a complete list of resources, visit https://affordanything.com/episode9 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#8: J. Money is a HALF-MILLY! He loves to share his journey to growing net worth on his blog, as well as the net worth of 180 other financial bloggers. See the short list and find links to resources by visiting the blog at https://affordanything.com/episode8 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#7: One of the M.O.N.E.Y. Show's favorite personal finance bloggers joins Paula and J. Money to talk about retiring early and hacking your HSA. For full show notes with links to resources, visit https://affordanything.com/episode7 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#6: J. Money says a hustle is "a way to make money on the side, but more of a passion project or something that is fun. You do it for more than just money.” Paula says it’s a “microbusiness". No matter how you slice it, a hustle is a way to make extra money doing activities outside of a normal J.O.B. Paula and J. Money share their stories of working on hustles to become the entrepreneurs they are today. Visit http://TheMoneyShow.co/06 for more information about hustles Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#5: Paula wants to know how J. Money’s life has changed as a hustler since having kids. For a while, J worked less and made less money. "It was a conscious decision to not make as much money for a while. I was more than happy making less because I was working on stuff I cared about. I also had a fear of being a work-a-holic and picking my hustle over my kids. Having kids forced me to have a work/life balance." Leave comments, contact us, or find links to more of our stuff at http://themoneyshow.co/05 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#4: Paula shares a confession. Then she redeems herself by sharing her gross monthly income. (Yeah. Listen from the beginning). Full show notes at http://TheMoneyShow.co/04 There are a variety of ways to invest in real estate: Flipping houses Buy-and-hold Tax liens Wholesale Income-producing rental properties (commercial and residential) Paula loves residential rental properties. Ask yourself: Do you want capital appreciation or cash flow from rental income? Paula puts a few guidelines in place to determine if a property is right for her. First of all, the monthly rent needs to be at least 1% of the total acquisition price. Example: A $100,000 home would need to rent for $1,000 a month. Why? Because roughly half of the rent is gobbled up by operating overhead: Taxes, Insurance, property management, and repairs/maintenance Paula offers much more valuable information in this episode and on her blog, AffordAnything.com.   Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#3: Paula and J. Money share the financial habits they use to grow wealth. Full show notes can be found at http://themoneyshow.co/03 Listen as they share their favorites (and a couple neat tricks): Track Net Worth Maximize retirement savings accounts Pay bills at least 1 month in advance Set up bills on auto-pay Leave a buffer in your checking account Round up debt payments Double the principle payments of your mortgage Enjoying the show? Please leave a comment or write a short review for the show in iTunes: http://themoneyshow.co/itunes Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#2: Once again, Paula and J. Money see things differently. J. Money preaches budgeting, Paula practices the “anti-budget”. J. Money examines every expense to find savings. A couple years ago he switched phone providers and saves $100 a month, $20 a month on insurance and $60 on cable. Paula recommends saving at least 20 percent of your income first, then go wild with the rest; “Don’t feel guilty about spending money on Coke Zero or turtle food” Who is right? To leave a comment or contact the hosts, visit https://affordanything.com/episode2 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#1: Becoming successful in finances takes more than M.O.N.E.Y. - it takes heart and hustle. Meet Paula Pant and J. Money. Both worked day jobs before becoming successful bloggers. They share their stories about buying a house before the market tanked, starting their side-hustles, and achieving "mini-retirement", at least for Paula. We value your input. Please visit https://affordanything.com/episode-1-story-of-money-podcast to leave a comment. If you like what you hear, please subscribe for free in iTunes http://TheMoneyShow.co/iTunes. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices